^gJIERGENCY RESPONSE BRANCH REGION VIII
QUALITY ASSURANCE PROJECT PLAN
PREPARED FOR:
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
EMERGENCY RESPONSE BRANCH, REGION VIII
999 - 18TH STREET, SUITE 500
DENVER, COLORADO 80202-2405
PREPARED BY:
ECOLOGY AND ENVIRONMENT, INC.
REGION VIII TAT
DENVER, COLORADO
AND
U.S. EPA REGION VIII
EMERGENCY RESPONSE BRANCH
JANUARY, 1990
-------
oait
ERB QAPjP
Revision 1
Date 1/22/90
ENDORSEMENT AND APPROVAL
FOR IMPLEMENTATION
Name:
John R. Giedt
Phone : ^j// 7 J?3
Title: Chief, Emergency Response Branch
Signature:
Date: v
Name: James Luey
Phone: 2.1 •J- 7s~/ 3
Title: Region VIII Quality Assurance Officer
Signature:
7
Date: *5 J ('^J 9 o
Name: FloyH ft. Nichols— Phone
Title: Chief. Removal Section— __
Signature: ¦ - ¦:—^ :—
Date: ¦'
i
-------
ERB QAPjP
Revision 1
Date 1/22/90
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
TITLE PAGE N/A
ENDORSEMENT AND APPROVAL FOR IMPLEMENTATION. ...... i
TABLE OF CONTENTS ii
INTRODUCTION 1
PURPOSE 2
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES 3
PLAN PREPARATION, REVIEW AND APPROVAL 3
GENERIC QUALITY ASSURANCE PROJECT PLAN 4
APPENDIX A - Region VIII ERB-QA Sampling Guidelines
APPENDIX B - ERT Computerized Sampling QA/QC Plan
APPENDIX C - Organization and Delegation of QA
Responsibilities for the ERB Analytical
Data Collection Activities
ii
-------
ERB QAPjP
Revision 1
Date 01/22/90
INTRODUCTION
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) policy requires that
all organizational units performing environmentally-related
measurements, including program offices, all EPA regional
offices, and EPA laboratories, participate in a centrally managed
quality assurance (QA) program. This requirement applies to all
environmental monitoring and measurement efforts mandated or
supported by EPA (Administrator's Memorandum, May 30, 1979). As
stated in EPA Executive Order 5360.1, "Policy and Program
Requirements to Implement the Mandatory Quality Assurance
Program," the primary goal of the QA program is to ensure that
all environmentally-related measurements performed or supported
by EPA produce data of known quality. The quality is known when
all components associated with its derivation are thoroughly
documented, with such documentation being verifiable and
defensible.
As part of their participation in the Agency-wid« QA
program, EPA program offices are required to establish their own
"QA Program Plan." The plan is to be prepared and annually
updated based on guidelines established by the Quality Assurance
Management Staff (QAMS). The Office of Emergency and Remedial
Response (OERR), within the Office of Solid Waste and Emergency
Response (OSWER), is responsible for developing and managing the
CERCLA (Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and
Liability Act) QA Program. The OERR has established four levels
of QA documentation (OSWER Directive 9360.0-01, Figure 1):
Quality Assurance Program Plan
(Headquarter Level)
Regional QA Program Plan
(Regional Level)
Generic QA Project Plan
(Branch Level)
Sampling QA/QC Plan
(Site Specific)
Figure 1: EPA Quality Assurance Documentation
1
-------
ERB QAPjP
Revision 1
Date 01/22/90
As per QAMS-004/80 guidance, OSWER Directive 9200.1-05
provides the structure, responsibilities, and authorities of the
CERCLA QA Program Plan. It describes resources for performing
quality assurance and specifies the QA activities involved in the
development of environmental data that relate to the
implementation of CERCLA, which includes the Removal program.
The EPA Region VIII Environmental Services Division (ESD) is
responsible for developing and managing the Region VIII QA
Program Plan (RQAPP, Document Control #R8-QAMS-89-1). The RQAPP
is management's statement of and commitment to the total process
that governs the quality assurance activities within thevregion.
To meet the requirements for a QA Project Plan, the
Emergency Response Division (ERD) of OERR established a QA
Workgroup to provide QA guidance for the Agency-wide Removal
program. The Workgroup decided that the QA Project Plan would be
divided into two functional documents: a generic "Branch QA
Project Plan," and a site specific "Sampling•QA/QC Plan."
Combined, both documents should address the sixteen elements
described in QAMS-005/80. As a result, OSWER Directive 9360.4-01
provides a detailed description of each section to be contained
in a "Sampling QA/QC plan." The Environmental Response Team
(ERT) computerized the "Sampling QA/QC plan" in WordPerfect 5.0
(called Quality Assurance Sampling Plan (QASP)).
The Region VIII Emergency Response Branch (ERB) develops
this Branch QA Project Plan (QAPjP) for Removal program in Region
VIII under the guidance of OSWER Directive 9200.1-05, OSWER
Directive 9360.4-01, Region VIII QAPP (R#8-QAMS-89-1), and
Guidelines and Specifications for Preparing Quality Assurance
Project Plan (QAMS-005/80). The Branch QAPjP is to be reviewed
and updated at any time if necessary to reflect operational
changes in the Region VIII Removal program.
PURPOSE
This ERB QAPjP specifies the policies and all other
essential elements of a QAPjP for Removal program within the
Region. As stated in OSWER Directive 9360.4-01, this document is
used as a generic ERB QAPjP for Removal projects. For each
specific site, where sampling would be performed, a Sampling
QA/QC Plan would be prepared. In the case of emergency response
(classic emergency/opportunity sampling), this ERB QAPjP will be
used as a generic QAPjP. However, all emergency responses
require a QA Project Plan/site-specific Sampling QA/QC Plan to be
in files no later than 30 days after the response date,
2
-------
ERB QAPjP
Revision 1
Date 1/22/90
even though the requirement for the plan was initially waived
(OSWER Directive 9200.1-05i.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES
A large number of field and laboratory operations can be
standardized and written as Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs).
The EPA-ERB has developed the Region VIII ERB-QA Sampling
Guidelines that cover all routine activities which could directly
or indirectly influence data quality. The Region VIII ERB-QA
Sampling Guidelines contents include:
Health and Safety Procedures
Instrumentation
Sampling Procedures
Field QA/QC Control
Sample Handling, Custody, Packaging and Shipping
Laboratories and Analytical References
A copy of the Region VIII ERB-QA Sampling Guidelines is
incorporated into this ERB QAPjP as an Appendix (Appendix A).
This includes references of all available EPA approved/adopted
documents. If necessary, the ERB On-Scene Coordinator (OSC) has
the option to adopt other SOPs utilized by the Environment
Response Team (ERT) or the sampling contractor(s).
PLAN PREPARATION, REVIEW, AND APPROVAL
The OSC has the responsibility to ensure that the Sampling
QA/QC Plan is developed, and that his/her objectives and'all
requirements specified in this ERB QAPjP are met. To develop the
site-specific Sampling QA/QC Plan, the OSC may wish to use the
instructions in the ERT computerized Sampling QA/QC Plan as
amended (Appendix B). If a site specific QAPjP is needed or
required by the OSC, the sixteen elements listed in QAMS 005/80
which are described in this QA Project Plan should be addressed.
The OSC will review and approve the site-specific Sampling
QA/QC Plan and may obtain assistance from the Regional Quality
Assurance Officer (QAO).
For the potentially responsible parties (PRPs) Removal
project overseen by EPA-ERB, it is required that the PRP develops
its own QAPjP which should be reviewed and approved by the OSC.
3
-------
GENERIC QUALITY ASSURANCE PROJECT PLAN
4
-------
(1.0 Title Page)
QUALITY ASSURANCE PROJECT PLAN
(THE SITE/PROJECT NAME)
Prepared For:
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
REGION VIII
EMERGENCY RESPONSE BRANCH
Prepared By:
(NAME/CONTRACTOR NAME)
(ORGANIZATION)
(EPA Work Order/Contract Number)
Date:
APPROVALS
(CONTRACTOR)
EPA-
(Task Leader)
Date
(EPA-OSC)
Date
(Project Manager) Date
(Name/Title)
Date
5
-------
(2.0 Table of Contents)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 .0 TITLE PAGE 5
2.0 TABLE OF CONTENTS 6
3.0 PROJECT DESCRIPTION 8
3.1 Introduction 8
3.2 Background 8
3.3 Project Objectives and Scope 8
4.0 PROJECT ORGANIZATION AND RESPONSIBILITY 8
4.1 Project Management 8
4.2 Project Schedule 9
5.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE OBJECTIVES 11
6.0 SAMPLING PROCEDURES 14
6.1 Sample Media/Matrix and Design 14
6.2 Field Instruments, Equipment and
Decontamination Procedures 14
6.3 Sampling Collection Techniques 15
6.4 Personnel Safety 15
7.0 INTERNAL QUALITY CONTROL CHECKS 16
7.1 Sample Containers 16
7.2 Quality Control Samples 16
8.0 FIELD SAMPLING SUMMARY 16
9.0 SAMPLE DOCUMENTATION AND CUSTODY 21
10.0 ANALYTICAL PROCEDURES 21
10.1 Analytical Parameters 21
10.2 Laboratories and Analysis Request
Procedures 21
11.0 CALIBRATION PROCEDURES AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 22
12.0 DATA REDUCTION, VALIDATION, AND REPORTING 22
13.0 PERFORMANCE AND SYSTEM AUDITS 22
6
-------
14.0 SPECIFIC ROUTING PROCEDURES FOR DATA QUALITY
ASSURANCE REVIEW 23
15.0 CORRECTIVE ACTION 2 3
16.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE REPORTS TO MANAGEMENT 24
LIST OF FIGURES', TABLES AND ATTACHMENTS
7
-------
3.0 Project Description
3.1 Introduction
A brief description of the site including the name,
location, and site specific features. A brief description
of the events or occurrences that led to the initiation of
the sampling activity.
3.2 Background
A brief description of the site's history (past/current
operations). The history includes information of chemicals
known to have been processed, dumped, or spilled on site
which possibly contributed to the suspected contamination,
and a summary of previous sampling efforts. This subsection
also should include the area, size, and proximity to local
residents, or any other information that may be useful in an
assessment of the situation and determination of sampling/
analytical needs. Sources of such data may come from
inventories, manifest, or other records; prior sampling
data, such as that generated by a Remedial Investigation/
Feasibility Study (RI/FS) and geological/hydro-geological
surveys; and incidents of exposures.
3.3 Project Objectives and Scope
Identify the specific objectives of the work assignment
(i.e., to determine the presence or extent of
contamination). Determine the intended data uses (site
monitoring, site characterization, risk assessment,
enforcement action, disposal, etc.)
Give an overview of the project's scope (sample
locations, matrix, number of samples and parameters for
analysis, etc.)
4.0 Project Organization and Responsibility
4.1 Project Management
The ERB-OSC has the ultimate responsibility for
decisions concerning the project/site (See Appendix C for
Organization and Delegation of QA Responsibilities for the
ERB Analytical Data Collection Activities).
The Task Leader or Project Manager is the primary point
of contact with the EPA-OSC. The Project Leader is
responsible for the development and completion of the
Sampling QA/QC Plan, project team organization, and
supervision of all project tasks, including reports and
8
-------
deliverables.
The site QC Coordinator is responsible for ensuring
field adherence to the Sampling QA/QC Plan and recording any
deviations. The Site QC Coordinator is also the primary
project team contact with the lab. The following field
sampling personnel will work on this project:
Personnel Responsibility
i.e., ERB-OSC Overall Project
Project Manager/Leader Sampling Operations
Site QC
Site Health and Safety
Sampl. Activities Report
Laboratory Sample Analysis/QC
Data Validation/Report
Overall Q.A.
Final Report, etc.
The QA Officer, Health and Safety Officer and Project
Manager are responsible for auditing and guiding the project
team, reviewing the final deliverables and proposing
corrective action, if necessary, for nonconformity to the
Sampling QA/QC Plan or Health and Safety Plan.
4.2 Project Schedule
Identify the project tasks and time lines associated
with them in Table 1.
9
-------
Table 1: Proposed Schedule of Work
Activity
(Time Period)
1.
Laboratory Procurement
z.
Sample Staging
3.
(Sampling - Soil)
4.
(Sampling - Groundwater)
S.
Laboratory Analysis
6.
Data Review
7.
Draft Report
8.
Final Report
10
-------
5-0 Quality Assurance Objectives
The QA objectives must correspond with the data use
objectives. In order to provide defensible data, the OSC
should establish Data Quality Objectives (DQOs) for each
major sample collection effort. The data quality criteria
should be addressed as part of the DQO development process,
including:
Precision (the level of agreement among
repeated measurements of the same
characteristic);
Accuracy (the level of agreement between
an estimate based on the data and a true
value of the parameter being estimated);
Representativeness (the degree to which
the collected data accurately reflect the
medium being sampled);
Completeness (the comparison of the amount
of data to be collected and the amount
intended in the design);
Comparability (the similarity of data from
different sources included in a single data
set).
The QA objectives of this project apply to all the
following parameters:
Parameters Matrix Intended Use of Data QA Objective
(VOA)
(BNA)
.(PESTICIDE)
(PCB)
(METALS)
(CYANIDE)
(OTHER)
Note: There may be more than one Matrix or Intended Use of
Data or QA Objective for each Parameter.
1 1
-------
Three equally important QA objectives have been defined
(OSWER Directive 9360.04-01) for assessing and
substantiating the collection of data to support its
intended use. The three QA objectives, hereafter referred
-to as QA1, QA2, and QA3, are described below.
QA1 :
This objective for data quality is available for data
collection activities that involve rapid, non-rigorous
methods of analysis and quality assurance. The methods are
used to make quick, preliminary assessments of type and
levels of .pollutants. The resultant data are non-
definitive as to identification and quantitation. Methods
will be applied as per standard operating procedures and
equipment manufacturer's specifications.
The following requirements apply:
Sample documentation
Instrument calibration or a performance check of a
test method (i.e. Draeger tubes, test strips,
spot tests)
Determination of detection limit (unless
inappropriate)
Note: QC procedures prescribed in SOPs and methods must
be followed.
QA2:
This quality objective is intended to give the decision
maker (OSC) a level of confidence for a select portion of
preliminary data. This objective allows him/her to focus on
specific pollutants and specific levels of concentration
quickly, by using field screening methods and verifying 10%
by more rigorous analytical metho3s and quality assurance.
The following requirements apply:
Sample documentation
Chain of custody (optional for field analysis)
Sample holding times
Method blanks, rinsate blanks, trip blanks (refer
1 2
-------
to table 2, footnotes 3 and 4)
Definitive identifications: confirm the
identification of analytes via a second GC
column or mass spectra on 10% of the samples
collected (for organics only); and provide
gas chromatograms and/or mass spectra.
Definitive quantitation: verify preliminary
quantitative results by reanalyzing 10% of
the samples collected and make a
determination of precision, accuracy, and
confidence limits* by preparing and analyzing
10% or 2 pairs of matrix spike duplicates
(whichever is greater) of the samples
verified. (Note: If the preliminary method,
is a field screening procedure, an alternate,
EPA-approved analytical method must be used
to verify quantitative results.)
Initial and continuing calibration data
Performance Evaluation Sample (.optional)
Determination of detection limit (unless
inappropriate)
* See data validation procedures (OSWER Directive 9360.04-
01) for determining precision, accuracy, and confidence
limits.
QA3:
This quality objective is intended to give the decision
maker (OSC) a level of confidence for a select group of
"critical samples" so he/she can make a decision based on an
action level with regard to: treatment; disposal; site
remediation and/or removal of pollutant; health risk or
environmental impact; responsible party identification;
enforcement actions; and clean up verification.
The following requirements apply:
Sample documentation
Chain of custody
Sample holding times
Initial and continuing instrument calibration data
1 3
-------
Definitive identification: confirm the
identification of analytes via a second GC
column or mass spectra on 100% of the samples
collected (for organics only); and provide
gas chromatograms and/or mass spectra.
Definitive quantitation: analyze 100% of the
"critical" samples collected and make a
determination of precision, accuracy, and
confidence limits* by preparing and
analyzing 20% or 4 pairs of matrix spike
duplicates (whichever is greater) of the
critical samples collected.
Method blanks, rinsate blanks, and trip blanks
Performance Evaluation Samples
Determination of detection limit (unless
inappropriate)
* See data validation procedures (OSWER Directive 9360.04-
01 ) for determining precision, accuracy, and confidence
limits•
6.0 Sampling Procedures
6.1 Sample Media/Matrix and Design
Provide a sampling location map, a summary listing the
matrices to be sampled, and a short rationale for the
selection of sample locations. Details of sample numbers,
locations, and rationale, etc., should be addressed in the
sampling activities report.
6.2 Field Instruments, Equipment, and Decontamination
Procedures
Provide a list of field instruments (if any) to be
utilized at the site (See Region VIII ERB-QA Sampling
Guidelines in Appendix A, Section 2.1).
The following equipment will be utilized to obtain
samples from the respective media/matrix:
1 4
-------
Matrix/Media Sampling Equipment Fabrication Dedication
Indicate decontamination solution (if any) to be
utilized for equipment decontamination procedures (See
Region VIII ERB-QA Sampling Guidelines in Appendix A,
Section 3.3).
6.3 Sampling Collection Techniques
(The following collection techniques could be obtained
from Region VIII ERB-QA Guidelines. See Appendix A, Section
3.2) :
Surface Soil Samples
Subsurface Soil Samples
Sludge and Sediment Samples
Surface Water samples
Ground Water samples
Air Samples
Petroleum Product Samples
Soil Gas Sampling Methods
Special Wastes
Field Screening
(Note: Other collection techniques, if not addressed
explicitly in Appendix A, Section 3.2, could be
obtained through its references, Section 3.4. The
other alternative is addressed in Section "Standard
Operating Procedures Guide", page 3 in this QAPjP.)
6.4 Personnel Safety
(See Region VIII ERB-QA Sampling Guidelines in Appendix
A, Section 1.)
1 5
-------
7.0 Internal Quality Control Checks
7.1 Sample Containers
Sample containers used in sampling efforts will
generally be provided by a Superfund Sample Bottle
Repository (SSBR) and will have passed the quality control
criteria for that program. If non-SSBR containers are used,
selection of a supplier with a quality control program
similar to SSBR will have to be made. Container testing
procedures and quality control data will be maintained by
the container supplier. No additional testing of sample
containers is required for specific sampling projects.
7.2 Quality Control Samples
Indicate (if any) following QA/QC samples are
collected. A summary of results are listed in Tables 2 and
3 (See Section 8).
(Information regarding to following QA/QC samples could
be obtained from Region VIII ERB-QA Sampling Guidelines.
See Appendix A, Sections 4.1 and 4.2)
Trip/Field/Rinsate Blanks
Duplicate/Co-located Samples
Splits (Duplicates and Replicate/Triplicate)
Background Samples
Spike Samples
Performance Evaluation (PE) Samples
8.0 Field Sampling Summary
(See- Tables 2 and 3)
-------
Table t Field Sampling Summary
Analytical
Parameter
Level
of
Sensiti-
vi ty
Matrix*
Container Type
and Vol trie
(# container rq'd)
Preserv-
ative
Holding
Times
Subtotal
Samples
QC Extras
Total
Field
Samples
Rinsate
Blanks
Trip
Blanks
(VOAs)
°C. 4
Positives
Matrix
Soikes
VOA
S
40ml vial
(1)
4*C
7day
1
VOA |
w
40ml vial
(3)
4'C
7day
1
1
1
1
SNA
s
8oz glass
(1)
4*C
7/40d
1
1
SNA
u
32oz amber glass
(2)
4*C
7/40d
| |
PEST
s
8oz glass
(1)
4*C
7/40d
PCS
s
8oz glass
(1)
4*C
7/40d
PEST
w
32oz ameer glass
(2)
**
4*C
7/40d
PCS
u
32oz ancer glass
(2)
4*C
7/40d
1
1
1
P.P.
METALS
s
Soz glass
(1)
4'C
6mon
P.P.
METALS
u
1 liter glass or
polyethylene
(1)
MOj ph<2
4*C
6mon
1
1
* Matrix: S-Soil, U-Water, O-Oil, DS-Orun Sol id, DL-Orun Liquid, TS-Tank Solid, Tl-Tank Liquid, X-Cther, A-Air
** If residual chlorine is present, preserve with 0.008X NajSjOj-
1. The concentration level, specific or generic, that is needed in order to make an evaluation. This level
will provide a basis for determining the analytical method to be used.
2. Only required if dedicated sampling tools are not used. One blank required per parameter per 20 samples.
3. One trip blank required per cooler used to ship VOA samples. Each trip blank consists of two 4Qal vials
filled with distilled/deionized water.
4. Performance check sanples; optional for QA-2, mandatory for OA-3 Level. One per parameter.
5. For QA-2: One matrix spike duplicate per lot of 10 samples; therefore, collect two additional environmental sample
vol Lines (water matrix) for every 10 environmental samples. For solid matrix, one additional volume per 10
environmental sanples. For QA-3: Two matrix spike duplicates per lot of 10 environmental samples; therefore,
collect four additional volumes of environmental samples for every 10 samples. Collect two additional volunes of
environmental sample for solid matrix- spikes.
1
-------
Table 2: Field Sampling Summary (continued)
Analytical
Parameter
Level
of
Sensiti-
vi ty
Matrix
Container Type
and Volume
(j¥ container rq'd|
Preserv-
ative
Holding
Times
Subtotal
Samples
SC extras
Total
F ield
Samples
Rinsate
Blanks
Trip
BI ants
(VOAs)|
QC 4
Positives
Hatrix
Spikes
CYANIOE
S
8oz glass
(1)
4*C
14day
CYANIDE
w
1 liter
polyethylene
(1)
NaOH to
pH > 12
4*C
14day
I
I
PHENOLS
S
8oz glass
(1)
4'C
28day
- —
i 1
1
1
! 1
PHENOLS
w
1 liter amoer
glass
C1)
H-SO, to
pH < 2
4*C
28day
i
i
i
i
1
* Matrix: S-Soil, U-Water, O-Oil, OS-0run Solid, Dl-Orun Liquid, TS-Tank Solid, TL-Tank Liquid, X-Other, A-Air
** If residual chlorine is present, preserve with 0.0O8X Ma^S^O^.
1. The concentration level, specific or generic, that is needed in order to make an evaluation. This level
will provide a basis for determining the analytical method to be used.
2. Only required if dedicated sampling tools are not used. One blank required per parameter per 20 samples.
3. One trip blank required per cooler used to ship VGA samples. Each trip blank consists of two 40ml vials
filled with distiIled/deionized water.
4. Performance check samples; optional for QA-2, mandatory for OA-3 Level. One per parameter.
5. For QA-2: One matrix spike duplicate per lot of 10 samples; therefore, collect two additional environmental samole
volumes (water matrix) for every 10 environmental samples. For solid matrix, one additional volume per 10
environmental samples. For OA-3: Two matrix spike dedicates per lot of 10 envircrmental samoles; therefore,
collect four additional volumes of environmental samples for every 10 samples. Collect two additional volumes of
environmental sample for solid matrix spikes.
13
-------
Table 3: QA/QC Analysis and Objectives Surmary
Analytical
Parameter
«
Matrix
Analytical
Method Ref.
Spikes
QA/QC
Detection
Limits
L
QA Objective
Matrix^
Surrogate^
VOA
S
8240/SU-846
VOA
w
624/CLP
1
j
BNA
S V
S2S0 or 3270/
SU-346
BNA
u
625/CLP
PEST
s
3030/SW-346
PCS
s
8080/SU-846
PEST
u
608
PCS
u
608
P.P.
METALS
s
SU-846
P.P.
METALS
u
EPA-600/CFR 40
- <¦
* Matrix: S-Soil, U-Uater, O-Oil, OS-Oruti Solid, OL-Qrun Liquid, TS-Tank Solid, TL- ank iquid, X-Ot er,
A-Air
1 For QA2: One matrix spike delicate analysis per lot of 10 samples. For QA3: Two matr x spike duplicate
analyses per lot of -10 samples.
2 Surrogate spikes analysis to be run (enter yes) for each sample in OA-2 and QA-3.
3 To be determined by the person arranging the analysis.
4 Enter OA Objective desired: QA-1, QA-2, or QA-3.
19
-------
Table 3: QA/QC Analysis and Objectives Summary (continued)
Analytical
Parameter
Matrix*
Analytical
Method Ref.
Spikes
OA
Detection
Limi ts
'QC
QA Objective
Matrix1
Surrogate^
CYANIDE
S
SU-846
>iM
CYANIDE
u
SU-846
PHENYLS
s
8040/SU-S44
PHENOLS
u
604/CFR 40
Matrix: S-Soil, U-Uater, 0-0fl, DS-Drun Solid, DL-Onjn Liquid, TS-Tank Solid, TL-Tank Liquid, X-Other,
A-Air
1 For QA2: One matrix spike duplicate analysis per lot of 10 samples. For QA3: Two matrix spike duplicate
analyses per lot of 10 samples.
2 Surrogate spikes analysis to be run (enter yes) for each sample in QA-1 and QA-2.
3 To be determined by the person arranging the analysis.
4 Enter OA Objective desired: QA-1, QA-2, or QA-3.
20
-------
9.0 Sample Documentation and Custody
(The following procedures are described in Region VIII
ERB-QA Sampling Guidelines. See Appendix A, Sections 4.3,
5.4, 5.5, and 5.7)
Field Activity Logbook
Traffic Reports
EPA Sample Tags/Labels
Chain of Custody Record
Chain of Custody Seals
Sample Handling/Shipping
10.0 Analytical Procedures
10.1 Analytical Parameters
The type of analyses required for the satisfactory
completion of this project have been determined by the EPA-
OSC based on guidance in Section 6, Appendix A.
Analytical parameters are summarized along with the
sample types and quantities in Tables 2 and 3. Analytical
requirements, including any special data delivery time
requirements, have been summarized on the laboratory
specification form if the TAT has been tasked to arrange for
analyses. If the OSC tasks another agency or party with any
responsibility for sample analyses, the analytical
requirements for those samples will be arranged by that
agency or party. All sample analysis-related decisions need
to be approved or agreed upon by the ERB-OSC.
10.2 Laboratories and Analysis Request Procedures
The following laboratories will be providing the
following analyses:
Lab Name/Location Lab Type Parameters
21
-------
(Information regarding to laboratories, analysis request
procedures and analytical references could be obtained from
Region VIII ERB-QA Sampling Guidelines. See Appendix A,
Section).
11.0 Calibration Procedures and Preventative Maintenance
The field instrumentation list, and its calibration
procedures and maintenance are described in Region VIII ERB-
QA Sampling Guidelines (See Appendix A, Section 2).
12.0 Data Reduction, Validation, and Reporting
Where the analytical data have been reduced, the method
of reduction will be described in the report.
Validation of all analytical data will be performed by
TAT, ERT, Environmental Services Division (ESD), or other
EPA contractor(s). The criteria for validation are
specified in "Removal Program Data Validation Procedures
Interim Guidance" (OSWER Directive 9360.4-01). Upon
completion of the review, the reviewer will be responsible
for developing a QA report and submitting to the management
(ERB-OSC). The format for reporting the results depend on
the requirements for a given site.
13.0 Performance and System Audits
The National Enforcement Investigation Center (NEIC) is
responsible for performance and system audits. In addition,
un-announced performance and system audits are possible at
the discretion of the QAMS/Regional QAO. Performance and
system audits may also be conducted upon the ERB-OSC
request.
A field performance audit may be conducted to evaluate
the execution of sample identification, sample control,
chain-of-custody procedures, field documentation, and
sampling operations. This type of audit is generally based
on the extent to which the QAPjP and applicable SOPs are
followed.
A system audit consists or an evaluation of both field
and laboratory quality control procedures to determine their
proper selection and use. System audits will be conducted
before or shortly after the system is operational and on a
regularly scheduled basis during the lifetime of the
program. After the program is operational and generating
data, performance audits are conducted periodically to
22
-------
determine the accuracy of the total sampling and laboratory
program or its parts.
14.0'Specific Routine Procedures For Data Quality Assurance
Review
The following QA/QC protocols will be addressed while
following "Removal Program Data Validation Procedures
Interim Guidance", OSWER Directive 9360.4-01:
sample documentation
chain of custody documentation (optional for
field analysis)
sample holding time documentation
collection and evaluation of blanks and sample
replicates (Refer to Tables 2 and 3)
instrument calibration documentation
PE samples, if appropriate
detection limit, unless inappropriate
definitive identification: Determined by QA
level.
definitive quantitation: Determined by QA level.
15.0 Corrective Action
The EPA-OSC is responsible for making decisions on all
field activities which may affect the project; including the
schedule, scope of field investigation, sample locations,
sampling techniques, etc. ' All these changes should be
clearly documented in the field log books, and this
documentation will be available upon completion of the
Sampling Activities Report.
Corrective action for both on-site and off-site labs
are specified in the Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste
(SW-846) adopted by the EPA Contract Laboratory Program
(CLP). The SLW-846 specifies quality control; selection of
appropriate test methods; and analytical methods for
metallic species, organic analytes and miscellaneous
analyt-es and properties.
Corrective action can be initiated as a result .of
QA/QC audit activities, including:
Performance audit
System audit
Laboratory comparison studies
23
-------
QA program audit conducted by QAMS"
The audit shall be done routinely by the ESD or upon
the ERB-OSC request. The ERB-OSC will receive the audit
report and recommendations for correction. Corrective
action will be taken at the discretion of the EPA-OSC, based
on the audit recommendations or when data are found to be
outside the predetermined limits of acceptability.
Documentation that supports major corrective actions
must be maintained in the project files.
16.0 Quality Assurance Reports to Management
The Contractor/Project Leader will maintain contact
with the EPA-OSC to keep him/her informed about the
technical and financial progress of this project. This
communication will commence with the issuance of the work
assignment and project scoping meeting. Activities under
this project will be reported in field sampling activities
report and other deliverables.
The following deliverables will be provided under this
project:
Field Sampling Activities Report
The Sampling Activities Report will be prepared
within two weeks of the last day of sampling
mobilization. The Sampling Activities Report shall
include a summary of sampling.activities; including
date(s) and personnel on-site (affiliations and phone
numbers), a discussion of problems encountered, a
documentation of EPA-OSC field decisions and any
deviations from the QAPjP/sampling plan. The report
also should include information of field equipment if
any, a map detailing sample locations, a summary of
sample descriptions (sample collection date and time,
QC samples, sample numbers, sample locations and
rationales), requested laboratories and analyses, and
expected result date to be received from the labs.
Additional information may include all photographs of
sampling related activities, copies of Field Logbook
notes, Chain of Custody documentation, packaging and
shipping papers, etc.
Analytical Report
An analytical report will be prepared for samples
analyzed under this plan. Information regarding the
analytical methods/procedures employed, sample results,
24
-------
QA/QC results, chain-of-custody documentation,
laboratory correspondence, and raw data, if requested,
will be provided within this deliverable.
_ Data Review/Validation and' Draft Final Report
A review of the data generated under this plan
will be undertaken. The assessment of data
acceptability or useability will be provided separately
or as part of the analytical report.
A draft final report will be prepared to correlate
available background information with data generated ~
under this sampling event and identify supportable
conclusions and recommendations which satisfy the
objectives of this QA project plan.
25
-------
(SITE/PROJECT TITLE)
Figure 1-1 Site Location Map
-------
APPENDIX A
Region VIII ERB-QA Sampling Guidelines
-------
REGION VIII ERB-QA SAMPLING GUIDELINES
Prepared by
Ecology and Environment, Inc.
Under TDD #T08-8812-013
January 12, 1990
-------
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
SECTION 1 - HEALTH AND SAFETY PROCEDURES
1.1 Health and Safety Requirements Checklist 1-1
1.2 Health and Safety Program 1-1
1.2.1 Medical Surveillance Program 1-1
1.2.2 Emergency Medical Care and Treatment 1-1
1.2.3 Health and Safety Training 1-2
1.2.A Standard Operating Safety Procedures 1-2
1.2.5 Site Safety Plan 1-3
1.3 References 1-4
SECTION 2 - FIELD INSTRUMENTATION
2.1 Field Instrumentation List 2-1
2.2 Field Instrumentation Standard Operation Procedures . . . 2-1
2.2.1 Hnu Photoionizer 2-1
2.2.2 Organic Vapor Analyzer (OVA) 2-2
2.2.3 Explosimeter/Oxygen Meter 2-4
2.2.4 Vapor Detection Tubes (Draeger) 2-5
2.2.5 Radiation Monitor 2-6
2.2.6 Geiger Counter 2-8
2.2.7 pH Meter 2-9
2.2.8 Conductivity/Salinity Meter 2-10
2.2.9 Geophysical Equipment EM 31, 34 2-11
2.2.10 Photovac 2-13
2.2.11 XRF 2-14
SECTION 3 - SAMPLING PROCEDURES
3.1 Sample Types 3-2
3.2 Sampling Techniques 3-4
3.2.1 Surface Soil Sample Collection Methods 3-4
3.2.2 Subsurface Soil Sample Collection Methods ..... 3-8
3.2.3 Sludge and Sediment Sample Collection Methods . . 3-20
3.2.4 Surface Water Sample Collection Methods 3-25
3.2.5 Ground Water Sample Collection Methods 3-31
3.2.6 Air Sample Collection Methods 3-46
3.2.7 Petroleum Product Sample Collection Methods . . . 3-53
3.2.8 Soil Gas Sampling Methods 3-54
3.2.9 Sample Collection Methods For Special Wastes . . 3-58
3.2.9.1 Leachate 3-58
3.2.9.2 Drums/Closed Containers 3-58
3.2.9.3 TCDD - Dioxin 3-64
3.2.9.4 Volatile Organics in Soil 3-64
3.2.9.5 Wipe Sampling 3-64
-------
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont.)
Page
3.2.9.6 Waste Pile Sampling 3-66
3.2.9.7 Above Ground Storage Tanks 3-67
3.2.9.8 Underground Storage Tanks 3-67
3.2.10 HAZCLS Screening 3-68
3.3 Equipment Decontamination 3-77
3.4 References 3-82
SECTION 4 - FIELD QA/QC CONTROL
4.1 QA/QC Sample Checklist 4-1
4.2 QA/QC Samples 4-1
4.2.1 Sample Blanks 4-1
4.2.2 Duplicates/Replicates 4-2
4.2.3 Spiked Samples 4-3
4.2.4 Background Samples 4-3
4.2.5 Split Samples 4-3
4.2.6 .Performance Evaluation Samples 4-3
4.3 Field Activity Logbooks 4-4
4.3.1 General Guidelines 4-5
4.3.2 Logbook Format 4-6
4.4 References 4-8
SECTION 5 - SAMPLE HANDLING, CUSTODY, PACKAGING AND SHIPPING
5.1 Concentration/Hazard Level Criteria 5-1
5.1.1 Low Level Samples 5-1
5.1.2 Medium Level Samples 5-1
5.1.3 High Level Samples 5-1
5.2 Sample Analyses, Containers, Preservation,
and Holding Time Requirements 5-1
5.3 Sample Custody 5-10
5.4 Sample Documentation 5-11
5.4.1 Low Level Samples 5-11
5.4.2 Medium Level Samples 5-14
5.4.3 High Level Samples 5-14
5.4.4 Dioxin Samples 5-19
5.4.5 Special Analytical Services 5-19
5.5 Sample Packaging Procedures 5-22
-------
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont.)
5.5.1 Lov Level Samples 5-22
5.5.2 Medium and High Level Samples 5-23
5.5.3 Dioxin Samples 5-2'3
5.6 Federal Express Shipping Requirements 5-24
5.7 DOT Shipping Requirements 5-24
5.7.1 Low Level Samples 5-24
5.7.2 Medium and High Level Samples 5-30
5.7.3 Radioactive Material 5-33
5.7.4 Poison A 5-33
5.7.5 Flammable Gas 5-35
5.7.6 Nonflammable Gas 5-37
5.7.7 Flammable Liquids/Solids 5-38
5.8 References 5-40
SECTION 6 - LABORATORIES AND ANALYTICAL REFERENCES
6.1 Program Structure and Utilization 6-1
6.1.1 Contract Laboratory Program 6-1
6.1.2 EPA Laboratories 6-8
6.1.3 Special Project Laboratory 6-8
6.1.4 Other Laboratories 6-9
6.2 Analysis Initiation/Request Procedures 6-9
6.2.1 Contract Laboratory Program 6-9
6.2.2 EPA Laboratories 6-12
6.2.3 Special Project Laboratory ... 6-12
6.2.4 Other Laboratories 6-12
6.3 References 6-12
APPENDIX A - Site Safety Plan
APPENDIX B - Department of Transportation Guide for
Hazardous Materials Shipping Papers
APPENDIX C - Department of Transportation Guide for Markings
-------
LIST OF FIGURES
F igure Page
3-1 Hand Augers 3-6
3-2 Sampling Trier, Auger and Hand Corer 3-9
3-3 Powered Hand Auger 3-11
3-4 Split-Spoon Sampler and Ponar Grab 3-16
3-5 Gravity Corers and Peristaltic-Pump Sampler 3-22
3-6 Pond Sampler and Weighted-Bottle Sampler 3-28
3-7 M.odified-Kemmerer Sampler 3-30
3-8 Ground Water Measurement Data Sheet 3-32
3-9 Standard Bailer 3-38
3-10 Tenax Cartridge Designs 3-48
3-11 Tenax Sampling Train 3-49
3-12 PUF Sampling Train and High-Volume Air Sampler 3-52
3-13 NEIC Bung Remover and Penetrating Sampler Device .... 3-60
3-14 Hand Vacuum Pump 3-65
3-15 HAZCLS Data Sheet 3-72
5-1 Sample Collection Requirements . . . 5-2,3,4
5-2 Organic Traffic Report 5-12
5-3 Organic Traffic Report (new form) 5-13
5-4 Inorganic Traffic Report 5-15
5-5 Inorganic Traffic Report (new form) 5-16
5-6 Chain-of-Custody Sheet » . 5-17
5-7 Sample Tag and Sample Seal 5-18
5-8 CLP Dioxin Shipment Record 5-20
5-9 Special Analytical Services Packing List 5-21
5-10 Federal Express Form 5-25
5-11 Federal Express Form for Restricted Articles 5-26
5-12 Sample Shipment Label Examples 5-27
6-1 EPA Laboratory Services Request Sheet 6-11
6-2 NEIC Hazardous Waste Sample Preparation Request Sheet . . . 6-13
6-3 Routine Analysis Request 6-14, 15
6-4 Special Analytical Services Client Request .... 6-16, 17, 18
-------
LIST OF TABLES
Table Page
3-1 Comparison of Coring Devices 3-23
3-2 Comparison of Bottom Grabs : 3-24
3-3 Monitoring Well Sampling Equipment Checklist 3-33, 34
3-4 Volume of Water in Casing or Hole 3-37
3-5 Evaluation of Well Evacuation Methods 3-40
3-6 Organics Collected in Ambient Air Using PUF Procedures . . . 3-51
3-7 HAZCLS Supplies and Equipment 3-69
3-8 HAZCLS Bench Test Flow Chart 3-70
3-9 General Purpose Decontamination Solutions . 3-79, 80
3-10 Recommended Solvent Selection 3-80
5-1 Sample Container Types, Preservatives and Holding
Times 5-5, 6, 7, 8
5-2 Documentation and Shipping Label Summary 5-28
5-3 Concentrations of Hazardous Materials Used as
Preservatives in Water Samples That Are Exempt From
DOT Hazardous Materials Regulations 5-29
5-4 DOT Hazardous Material Classification 5-31
5-5 DOT List of Class A Poisons 5-32
6-1 List of EPA Approved Inorganic Test Procedures 6-2, 3
6-2 List of EPA Approved Organic Test Procedures 6-4
6-3 List of EPA Approved Miscellaneous Test Procedures ..... 6-5
6-4 Target Compound List 6-6, 7
-------
SECTION 1 - HEALTH AND SAFETY PROCEDURES
1.1 HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS CHECKLIST
Compliance with health and safety regulations requires that workers
be covered by a health and safety program encompassing the following
major points:
Medical surveillance program
Emergency medical care and treatment
Health and safety training
Standard operating safety procedures
Site Safety Plan
1.2 HEALTH AND SAFETY PROGRAM
The U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
regulations governing employee health and safety at hazardous waste
operations and during emergency responses to hazardous substance
releases contain general requirements for safety and health programs,
site characterization and analysis, site control, training, medical
surveillance, engineering controls, work practices, personal protective
equipment, exposure monitoring, informational programs, material
handling, decontamination, emergency procedures, illumination,
sanitation, and site excavation.
Personnel responding to environmental incidents involving hazardous
substances may encounter a wide range of physical and chemical hazards.
To ensure the safety of response personnel, an effective, comprehensive
health and safety program must be established and followed. The minimum
components of the health and safety program include:
1.2.1 Medical Surveillance Program
Pre-employment medical examinations to establish the
individual's state of health, baseline physiological data, and
ability to wear personnel protective equipment.
Follow-up medical examinations performed annually or more often
due to known or suspected exposures.
Termination examinations conducted at the end of employment.
Permanent maintenance of all personnel medical records.
1.2.2 Emergency Medical Care and Treatment
Advanced first aid and emergency lifesaving (CPR) training for
all personnel.
Refresher training for First Aid and emergency lifesaving
(CPR).
Site-specific medical emergency procedures. Detailed
1-1
-------
procedures are part of the Site Safety Plan.
1.2.3 Health and Safety Training
All personnel involved in responding to environmental incidents and
who could be exposed to hazardous substances and other health hazards
must receive a Basic 40-Hour Health and Safety Training Course
including:
Use of personal protective equipment.
Safe work practices and standard operating procedures.
Hazard recognition and evaluation.
Medical surveillance requirements.
Site safety plans and plan development.
Site control and decontamination.
Site entry and use of monitoring equipment.
Training for Sampling of Hazardous Materials.
In addition, personnel must attend annual 8-hour refresher training
courses in safety, first aid and CPR.
Anyone vho directs activities on a hazardous waste site is
considered a supervisor and is required to attend an additional 8 hour
safety training course for supervisors.
1.2.4 Standard Operating Safety Procedures
Standard operating safety procedures should be developed and
written by competent safety professionals and include safety precautions
and operating practices that all responding personnel should follow.
All personnel involved in site activities must have access to copies of
the safety procedures and be briefed on their use.
Standard procedures include guidelines for personnel precautions,
weather conditions, and site survey and reconnaissance.
State and local regulations and EPA's Standard Operating Safety
Guides supplement the OSHA regulations and may also be considered when
developing worker health and safety programs.
Prior to site entry, all suspected conditions that are immediately
dangerous to life and health (IDLH) shall be identified, and the
following information shall be gathered:
Site location and size.
Description of response activities or job function.
Planned duration of employee activity.
Site topography.
Site accessibility by air and roads.
Pathways for hazardous substance dispersion.
Present status and capabilities of local emergency response
teams for employee on-site emergencies.
Hazardous substances involved or expected at the site and their
chemical and physical properties.
•1-2
-------
Location and route to local hospital.
Prior to initiating any site activities, the Site Safety and Health
Supervisor shall conduct a site inspection and hold pre-entry safety
briefings.
OSHA personnel may conduct safety inspections at any time during
site activities.
1.2.5 Site Safety Plan
A site safety plan must be developed and implemented for all phases
of site operations in accordance with the appropriate OSHA regulations.
The plan should be conspicuously posted or distributed to and discussed
with all response personnel. All personnel must be familiar and act in
compliance with the site safety plan, which must include:
Name of key personnel and alternates.
Name of health and safety personnel.
Task/operation safety and health risk analysis.
Employee training.
Personal protective equipment to be used.
Frequency and types of air monitoring, personnel monitoring,
and sampling techniques.
Site control measures.
Decontamination procedures.
Site standard operating procedures.
Site contingency plan.
Confined space entry procedures.
Medical surveillance program.
Location and route to local hospital.
The site safety plan used by Ecology & Environment is included in
Appendix A as an example.
The various contractors working on a hazardous waste site will, in
all likelihood, want to supply their own site safety plan. The OSC may
elect to review all plans as submitted by the contractors and request
modifications. This action is to ensure a thorough, detailed plan.
1-3
-------
1.3 REFERENCES
1. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. "Standard Operating
Safety Guides." Memorandum from Henry L. Longest II. 5 July
1988.
2. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Occupational Safety and
Health Guidance Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activities.
Developed by NIOSH/OSHA/USCG/EPA. October 1985.
3. Occupational Safety and Health Administration. "Interim Final
Rule for Hazardous Operations and Emergency Response." 29 CFR
1910.120. 19 December 1986.
4. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. A Compendium of
Superfund Field Operations Methods. Office of Emergency and
Remedial Response. December 1987.
5. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Field Standard Operating
Procedures (FSOP) #4, Site Entry. Office of Emergency and
Remedial Response. January 1985.
6. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Field Standard Operating
Procedures (FSOP) #6, Work. Zones. Office of Emergency and
Remedial Response. April 1985#.
7. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Field Standard Operating
Procedures (FSOP) #7, Decontamination of Response Personnel.
Office of Emergency and Remedial Response. January 1985.
8. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Field Standard Operating
Procedures (FSOP) #8, Air Surveillance. Office of Emergency
and Remedial Response. January 1985.
rev 1/11/90
1-4
-------
SECTION 2 - FIELD INSTRUMENTATION
2.1 FIELD INSTRUMENTATION LIST
1. HNu Photoionizer (Model PI-101)
2. Organic Vapor Analyzer (OVA-128)
3. Combustible Gas (Explosimeter)/Oxygen Alarm (MSA 261) and the
Hydrogen Sulfide, Combustible Gas and Oxygen Alarm (MSA 361)
4. Vapor Detection Tubes (Draeger Gas Detector)
5. Radiation Monitor (Victoreen Thyac III Model 490)
6. Geiger Counter (Ludlum Model 5)
7. pH Meter. (Corning pH Meter 3)
8. Conductivity/Salinity Meter (YSI Model 33)
9. Geophysical Equipment (Geonics EM 31 and EM 34)
10. Photovac (Model 10S70)
11. X-ray Fluorescence Analyzer (X-MET Model 840)
2.2 FIELD INSTRUMENTATION STANDARD OPERATION PROCEDURES
Field instruments are typically used for health and safety
monitoring, estimating the extent of contamination at the site, and
generating data used in refining sampling plans.
Sections 2.2.1 through 2.2.8 provide basic information on the
operation of field instruments typically used in Region VIII and are not
intended to be training manuals or technical references for these
instruments. Refer to the listed references for further information.
Sections 2.2.9 through 2.2.11 contain introductory information on
field instruments which should only be used by trained and experienced
operators.
2.2.1 HNu Photoionizer (Model PI-101)
Capabilities:
The HNu photoionizer is used to determine the concentration of
organic and inorganic vapors and gases with ionization potentials
of less than the probe rating. The analyzer employs the principle
of photoionization for detection and is non-specific depending on
the chemical nature of the molecular species being measured. The
useful range of the instrument is from a fraction of a ppm to about
2,000 ppm.
Restrictions:
The HNu photoionizer does not respond to methane or hydrogen
cyanide and will not detect a compound if-the probe used has a
lower energy level than the compound's ionization potential.
Sensitivities for various gases are not uniform. Response is not
linear over a wide range of concentrations. The. instrument's
sensor cannot be immersed and the lamps are sensitive to acid
vapors. The response is affected by high humidity, powerlines, and
cold temperatures. It should be noted that certain compounds in
2-1
-------
very high concentrations may affect readings.
Start Up and Calibration:
1. Connect the 10.2 ev. probe to readout assembly making sure
that the function switch on the control panel is in the OFF
position.
2. Turn the function switch to the BATT position and verify
condition of the battery. If the needle on the meter is in
the lower portion of the battery arc, the instrument should be
recharged prior to making any measurements. If the red LED
comes on, the battery should be recharged.
3. Turn the function switch to STANDBY and rotate the zero
potentiometer until the meter reads zero.
4. Turn the function switch to STANDBY and let instrument warm up
for about 5 minutes. Calibrate instrument using
manufacturer's calibration gas. Adjust span setting to read
ppm as specified on calibration gas bottle. Record span
setting in field log.
Operation:
1. Select the appropriate range. For most survey operations, the
setting used is 0 to 20 ppm.
2. Verify the instrument's operation by exposing an organic vapor
source, such as a marker or butane lighter, to the probe.
Check the end of the probe to see that the lamp is operating.
3. To shutdown, turn the function switch to OFF and disconnect
the probe from the readout unit.
References:
1. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. A Compendium of
Superfund Field Operations Methods. Office of Emergency and
Remedial Response. December 1987. Section 15.2.
2. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. "Standard Operating
Safety Guides." Memorandum from Henry L. Longest II. 5 July
1988. Appendix I.
3. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Field Screening Methods
Catalogue, User's Guide. Office of Emergency and Remedial
Response. September 1988. Pages 16-17.
4. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Field Screening Methods
Catalog, User's Guide. Office of Emergency and Remedial
Response. September 1988. Page 15.
5. Manufacturer's literature.
2.2.2 Organic Vapor Analyzer (0VA-128)
Capabilities:
The OVA uses hydrogen flame ionization to detect and measure
organic gases and vapors found in ambient air. Vill detect
methane. Detection limit of 1 ppm in air.
2-2
-------
Restrictions:
The OVA will not detect inorganics. The OVA—which does not
evaluate explosive potential—should be used in conjunction with an
explosimeter for initial screenings. DOT shipping regulations are
strict for the OVA which is fueled with pressurized hydrogen. A
relative humidity greater than.95 percent will cause inaccurate and
unstable responses and a temperature less than 40°F will cause slow
and poor response. Specific¦contaminants and their quantities
cannot easily be identified. In the absence of a specific
analytical standard, the concentration of total hydrocarbons is
expressed as ppm methane equivalent.
Start Up and Calibration:
1. Connect the probe/readout connectors to the side-pack
assembly.
2. Check battery condition and hydrogen supply.
3. For measurements taken as methane equivalent, check that the
GAS SELECT dial is set at 300.
4. Turn the electronics on by moving the INST switch to the ON
position, and allow 5 minutes for warm-up.
5. Set CALIBRATE switch to X10; use CALIBRATE knob to set
indicator to 0.
6. Open the hydrogen tank valve and supply valve all the way.
Check that the hydrogen supply gauge reads between 8.0 and
12.0 psig.
7. Turn the PUMP switch ON, and check the flow system (see
manufacturer's instructions).
8. Check that the BACKFLUSH and INJECT valves are in the UP
posi tion.
9. To light the flame, depress the igniter switch until a meter
deflection is observed. The igniter switch may be depressed
for up to 5 seconds. Do not depress for longer than 5
seconds, as it may burn out the igniter coil. If the
instrument does not light, allow the instrument to run several
minutes and repeat ignition attempt.
Operation:
1. Confirm operational state by exposing an organic vapor source,
such as a marker or butane lighter, to the probe.
2. Establish a background level in a clean area or by using the
charcoal scrubber attachment to the probe (depress the sample
inject valve).
3. Set the alarm level, if desired.
4. For shutdown, close hydrogen supply and tank valves (do not
overtighten), and turn INST switch to OFF. Wait until
hydrogen supply gauge indicates system is purged then svitch
off pump (approximately 10 seconds).
2-3
-------
Operation of the OVA in the Gas Chromatography Mode:
When operated in the gas chromatography (GC) mode, chemical
standards of known constituents and concentration must be analyzed
by the GC. These standards must be run at the same operating
conditions used in the sampling procedure i.e., carrier gas
flovrate, column type and temperature, and ambient conditions. The
purpose of running standards is to determine retention times,
concentrations (or instrument response), and optimal instrument
operating conditions. It should be noted however that the
operation of the instrument in the GC mode should be left to
personnel that have been trained specifically for this purpose.
References:
1. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. A Compendium of
Superfund Field Operations Methods. Office of Emergency and
Remedial Response. December 1987. Section 15.3.
2. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. "Standard Operating
Safety Guides." Memorandum from Henry. L. Longest II. 5 July
1988. Appendix I.
3. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Field Screening Methods
Catalogue, User's Guide. Office of Emergency and Remedial
Response. September 1988. Pages 15-16.
4. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Field Screening Methods
Catalog, User's Guide. Office of Emergency and Remedial
Response. September 1988. Page 13.
5. Manufacturer's literature.
2.2.3 Combustible Gas (Explosimeter)/Oxygen Alarm (MSA 261) and the
Hydrogen Sulfide, Combustible Gas and Oxygen Alarm (MSA 361)
Capabilities:
These instruments test atmospheres for sufficient oxygen
content, and for the presence of hydrogen sulfide (model 361),
combustible gases or vapors which may pose a potential flammabili ty
hazard.
Restrictions:
Instrument response must be appraised by someone trained or
experienced in properly interpreting the instrument readings.
Check. Out and Calibration:
1. Open the instrument lid and turn the center ON-OFF control to
the HORN OFF position. Meter pointers will move and one or
more alarms may light.
2. The-% LEL meter pointer should be set to zero by adjusting the
ZERO LEL control. Adjustment should be made within 30 seconds
after instrument is turned on; this is to prevent accidental
2-4
-------
activation of the meter latch circuit.
3. Press the SELECT button firmly to obtain X OXY on the readout
(Model 361 only). If the % oxygen meter stabilizes at a value
other than 20.8%, set to 20.8% by using the CALIBRATE 02
control.
4. On Model 361, press the SELECT button firmly to obtain PPM TOX
on the readout; then set the readout to zero (00) by adjusting
the TOX ZERO control.
5. Press the ALARM RESET button; the Alarm(s) should reset and
the green pilot light should flash.
6. Momentarily place a finger over the sample inlet fitting or
the end of the sample line probe. Observe that the flow
indicator float drops out of sight, indicating no flow. If
the float does not drop, check the flow system for leaks.
7. On Model 261, press the CHECK button and observe the % LEL
meter. The pointer must read 80% LEL or higher as marked by
the BATTERY zone on the meter. On Model 361, a low battery
condition is indicated by a BATT sign in the readout or by a
steady horn.
Operation:
On the Model 261, turn the 0N-0FF control to the ON position.
The pilot lamp should light continuously.
On the Model 361, turn the FUNCTION control to MANUAL for
continuous readout of any one gas or to SCAN for automatic scanning
of the three gas readings. All alarm functions operate in either
posi tion.
References:
1. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. A Compendium of
Superfund Field Operations Methods. Office of Emergency and
Remedial Response. December 1987. Sections 15.4, 15.5 and
15.6.
2. Manufacturer's literature.
2.2.4 Vapor Detection Tubes (Draeger Gas Detector)
Capabilities:
The colorimetric tube and pump measures concentrations of
inorganic and organic vapors and gases. The detector tubes are
specific for individual compounds, or groups of compounds, and
require specific sampling techniques.
Restrictions:
Cross sensitivity is typical and there is a large degree of
error in the readings. Not useful where contaminant is unknown.
2-5
-------
Start Up and Calibration:
No calibration required. However, pump must be checked for
leakage. Check pump by placing an unbroken tube into the suction
inlet of the pump and completely depressing the bellovs. The
bellows should not completely extend in fewer than 30 minutes.
Check the expiration date of each detector tube.
Operation:
1. Break off both tips of the Draeger tube in the break-off
eyelet located on the front pump plate.
2. Tightly insert the tube into the pump head with the arrow
pointing toward the pump head. If multiple tubes are used,
join the tubes with the rubber tube provided, then insert the
tube into the pump head.
3. Fully compress the bellows and allow the bellows to re-extend
until the chain is taut. Repeat as often as specified in the
tube operating instructions.
4. Read concentration as specified in the instructions included
with the tube.
References:
1. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. A Compendium of
Superfund Field Operations Methods. Office of Emergency and
Remedial Response. December 1987. Section 15.7.
2. Manufacturer's literature.
2.2.5 Radiation Monitor (Victoreen Thyac III Model 490)
Capabilities:
The Victoreen Model 490 Thyac III is a sensitive portable
pulse count ratemeter designed to be used with a variety of
detector probes. The pancake probe is sensitive to alpha (with cap
removed), beta, and gamma ionizing radiation. This type of
instrument is capable of detecting very small amounts of radiation,
but is energy (type of radiation) dependent.
The ionization chamber has a high voltage applied to its
electrodes. Any ionization within the chamber causes a brief
electrical pulse to pass between the electrodes. The rate of these
pulses can be related to the ionizing radiation intensity.
Limitations:
1. Should be used only by persons who can properly interpret its
readings and are familiar with the appropriate safety
procedures to be followed in the presence of radiation.
Failure to follow instructions and warnings contained in the
instruction manual or on the instrument may result in
2-6
-------
inaccurate readings and/or user hazard.
2. Does not give a uniform response for different radiation
energy levels and is accurate only for the type of radiation
energy it is calibrated for.
3. Special consideration for respiratory protection should be
used when alpha exposures may be present.
Start Up and Calibration:
1. This instrument is shipped with batteries removed. To install
batteries:
Snap open the pull catch at each end of the case and
separate the case top from the case bottom. This exposes
the battery box and battery retainer clip.
Remove the clip by squeezing its end until it can be
pulled out of the slots in the battery box.
Insert the two D-cell batteries in the battery box (the
battery box is designed to be mechanically selective so
that the batteries cannot be inserted with reversed
polarity).
Replace the battery retainer clip.
Align the case top with the bottom and squeeze them
together gently.
Snap the pull catches closed.
2. Primary factory calibration should be conducted annually by
the manufacturer. The meter should bear a calibration sticker
as a result of this work. This documentation should indicate
the expected counts per minute (CPM) for the stated instrument
and probe from the affixed operational check source. This
check source should be found fastened to the side of the case.
To test the calibration, the pancake probe should be placed
directly over the 3/8-inch diameter circle on the operational
check source. A reading approximately equal to that given on
the primary calibration document should result. This check
must be carried out in an area free from any source of
radiation.
Operations:
1. Designed for up to two-hundred hours of continual use on two
"D" cell batteries.
2. Temperature limits at -30 to +50 degrees centigrade.
3. Do not connect or disconnect any detector while the instrument
is on. Wait two minutes after instrument has been turned off
before making any such connections or disconnections.
2-7
-------
References:
1. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. A Compendium of
Superfund Field Operations Methods. Office of Emergency and
Remedial Response. December 1987. Section 15.8.
2. Manufacturer's literature.
2.2.6 Geiger Counter (Ludlum Model 5)
Capabilities:
The Ludlum Model 5 is a 5-scale (0 to 2000 MR/Hr),
self-contained Geiger Counter. This type of instrument can detect
beta and gamma ionizing radiation. The unit is operated vith two
"D" size batteries (carbon zinc) for operation from 150° to
approximately 32°F. For temperature operation to 0°F, either very
fresh alkaline batteries or rechargeable NiCad batteries may be
used. Note: Never store the instrument over 30 days without
removing the batteries.
Limitations:
This instrument should only be used by trained and qualified
operators who are thoroughly familiar with its use and operation,
and can interpret its results.
Start Up and Calibration:
1. Slide battery box button to rear, open lid and install two "D"
size batteries. Match battery polarity to the marks on the
inside of the lid. Do not twist lid button - it slides to the
rear. Close battery box lid.
2. Turn instrument range switch to xlOOO. Depress BAT switch.
Meter should deflect to the battery check position of the
meter scale. If meter does not respond, recheck to be certain
that batteries have proper polarity.
3. Expose detector to radiation check source. Speaker should
click with audio switch in the ON position.
4. Move range to lower scales until meter reading is indicated.
Toggle switch labeled F-S should have fast response in "F",
slow response in "S".
5. Depress RES switch. Meter should zero.
6. Check calibration and proceed to use the instrument.
Operation:
An instrument operational check should be performed prior to
each use by exposing detector to a known source and confirming
proper reading on each scale. r
2-8
-------
References:
1. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. A Compendium of
Superfund Field Operations Methods. Office of Emergency and
Remedial Response. December 1987. Section 15.8.
2. Manufacturer's literature.
2.2.7 pH Meter (Corning pH Meter 3)
Capabili ties:
Electrochemical pH determination utilizes the difference in
potential occurring between two aqueous solutions of different pH
separated by a special glass membrane. A complete pH measuring
system consists of a glass pH electrode, a sample solution,
reference electrode, and a pH meter. This instrument will measure
pH through a range of 2-12 pH (0-14 extended) at an accuracy of 0.2
pH units.
Limitations:
For accurate work, fresh buffer solution should be used.
Contamination of the buffer solution may occur after repeated
insertion of the electrode into the bottle. To verify the quality
of the buffer, check against the fresh replacement buffer solution.
The electrode, buffers and samples should be maintained at the same
constant temperature during measurements.
Calibration and Operation:
1. Turn the ON/OFF switch to the ON position.
2. Check the battery by turning CALIBRATE knob fully clockwise.
The needle should swing into the green section on the scale.
3. Install the electrode by removing the fill hole plug and the
wetting cap and inserting the electrode connector into the pH
input on the right side of the meter.
A. Lower the electrode into the pH buffer and allow the meter
needle to stabilize. If the pH of the material is known
approximately then the instrument should be calibrated with
the buffer closest to the pH of the material eg. 4.00, 7.00 or
10.00 and confirmed with another pH buffer.
5. Adjust the CALIBRATE knob so that the needle is on the proper
pH.
6. Adjust the TEMPERATURE control knob to the temperature of the
solution to be measured.
7. Remove the electrode from the buffer and rinse with the
solution to be measured or distilled water.
8. Immerse the electrode into the unknown solution and read the
pH value from the meter. If it is not within +/- 3 pH units
of the buffer, remove the electrode, rinse with distilled
water, and immerse it into a second buffer solution of known
pH and temperature identical to that of the first buffer.
Adjust the TEMPERATURE control knob until the meter reads the
2-9
-------
pH value of rhp second bnffer.
9. The pH range can be extended by calibrating the pH 7¦buffer
solution to read 5.0 or 9.0 on the meter and adding or
subtracting 2 pH units respectively to the readings.
Maintenance:
1. Change battery as needed.
2. Replace electrode as needed.
3. If readings are noisy or drift.
- Check electrolyte solution.
- Check that reference electrode fill hole is open.
- Try new electrode.
4. If poor buffer agreement.
- Check buffers.
- Check temperature setting.
5. If electrode response sluggish.
- Check electrode.
- Response is slow in unbuffered media.
- Wait for stabilization.
References:
1. Manufacturer's literature.
2.2.8 Conductivity/Salinity Meter (YSI Model 33)
Capabilities:
The YSI Model 33 is designed to measure the salinity,
conductivity, and temperature of fluids. It consists of a sampling
probe and meter povered by two "D" cell alkaline batteries.
Specific conductance is measure in the range of 0 to 50,000
micromhos per centimeter (umho/cm). Salinity is measured in the
range of 0 to AO parts per thousand (ppt). Temperature is measured
from -2° to 50°C (28° to 122°F).
Operation:
1. With the unit in the OFF position, adjust the meter to 0 umho
and then plug the probe into the jack.
2. Turn the.MODE switch to the RED LINE position. Then turn the
RED LINE control to adjust the needle to the red line
indicated on the meter.
3. To read temperature, set the switch to the TEMPERATURE
position and read.
4. To read salinity, set °C control to the temperature determined
above. Turn the MODE switch to the SALINITY position and read
salinity as 0 to 40 ppt.
2-10
-------
5. To read conductivity, set the MODE switch to the appropriate
conductivity scale and multiply the meter reading by the
factor indicated.
Maintenance:
1. Check the battery condition using the CELL TEST button and
replace the batteries, if necessary. If the unit is not to be
used for an extended period of time, remove the batteries.
2. Clean the probe in fresh water whenever it is exposed to salt
water.
3. Replatinize the probe when the RED LINE adjustment cannot be
made. This is done using YSI Kit No. 3139.
References:
1. Manufacturer's literature.
2.2.9 Geophysical Equipment (Geonics EM 31 and EM 34)
Capabilities:
The EM technique uses low-frequency electromagnetic impulses
to measure terrain conductivity. Terrain conductivity is a
variable of several factors, but is largely keyed to the
concentration and abundance of electrolytic solutions and/or the
presence of metallic materials in the subsurface. EM methods are
useful for detecting lateral changes in conductivity, and to a
lesser extent, vertical changes in conductivity. Specific
capabilities include:
Defining location of a contamination plume.
Locating- buried objects such as drums, tanks, pipelines
cables, monitoring wells.
Addressing presence and/or location of bedrock fault and
fracture systems.
Mapping boundaries of discontinuous clay-rich layers.
Defining bedrock lithological boundaries (units).
Mapping buried trenches.
Defining lateral extent and relative depth of buried bedrock
valleys.
Operation:
The conductivity value resulting from these instruments is a
composite; it represents the combined effects of the thickness of
soil or rock layers, their depths, and the specific conductivities
of the materials. The instrument reading represents a combination
of these effects, extending from the surface to the depth range of
the instrument. The resulting values are influenced more strongly
2-11
-------
by shallow materials than by deeper layers. Conductivity
conditions from the surface to the instrument's nominal depth range
contribute generally 75 percent of the instrument's response.
However, contributions from highly conductive materials lying at
greater depths may have a significant effect on the reading.
In areas surrounding hazardous vaste sites, contaminants may
escape into the soil and the groundwater system. In many cases,
these fluids contribute large amounts of electrolytes and colloids
to both the unsaturated and saturated zones. In either case, the
ground conductivity may be greatly affected, sometimes increasing
by one to three orders of magnitude above background values.
However, if the natural variations in subsurface conductivity are
very low, contaminant plumes of only 10 to 20 percent above
background may be mapped.
In the case of spills involving heavy nonpolar, organic fluids
such as diesel oil, the normal soil moisture may be displaced, or a
sizable pool of oil may develop at the water table. In these
cases, subsurface conductivities may decrease, causing a negative
EM anomaly.
The following table summarizes operational data and
exploration depths for the EM-31 and EM-34:
EM-31 EM-34
Required personnel 1 to 2 persons 2 to 3 persons
Data recording Continuous Station
or station
Intercoil spacing (meters) 3.7 10, 20, 40
Effective exploration Up to 6 7.5, 15, 30, 60
depth (meters)
Several factors are involved in the choice of EM
instrumentation. The most obvious is exploration depth. Based on
the geologic and hydrogeologic setting, types of wastes and
containerization, and length of time since disposal, an estimate
may be made of the lateral and vertical extent of contamination.
If the site is large and there is little time to cover it, the
EM-31 is much faster to use than the EM-34. In most cases, the
EM-31 will be most appropriate for general reconnaissance due to
its ease of use and ability to detect waste in the near-surface
region, where most wastes are buried.
Design of the geophysical survey, operation of the
instruments, and interpretation of the data should only be done by
trained and experienced personnel.
2-12
-------
Limi tations:
In order for EM techniques to be useful, a detectable
conductivity contrast must exist betveen the natural geologic
setting and the contamination. Non-heterogeneity of subsurface
materials may reduce the background-to-signal ratio and hamper data
interpretation.
References:
1. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. A Compendium of
Superfund Field Operations Methods. Office of Emergency and
Remedial Response. December 1987. Section 8.
2. Manufacturer's literature.
2.2.10 Photovac (Model 10S70)
Capabilities:
The Photovac Model 10S70, an updated version of -the Model
10A10, is a portable ultraviolet photoionization detector for
monitoring many organic and some inorganic gases and vapors in air
samples. Most halogenated and aromatic compounds typically found
at hazardous waste sites can be detected by the PID.
Calibration:
Calibration of this instrument requires specific compounds
with known concentrations. Due to the complexity of the procedure
the manufacturer's instructions for the specific compound should be
followed.
Operation:
This instrument should only be operated by personnel that
have been trained in its use.
Limitations:
1. Effective use requires that the operator understand the
operating principles and procedures, and be trained and
experienced in calibrating, reading, and interpreting the
instrument.
2. Does not detect methane, or compounds with ionization
potentials greater than 11 electron volts.
3. Response may change when gases are mixed.
4. -Specific calibration standards are required to perform the
analysis. Calibration standards for a variety of compounds
are available.
5. Readings can only be. reported relative to the calibration
standard used.
6. Sample analysis times are dependent upon compound sought and
2-13
-------
any potential interferences, but can take up to 10 mimites.
Detectable compounds to 1 ppb or less include ethylene oxide,
vinyl chloride and other chloro-ethylenes, benzene, toluene,
xylene, ethane and higher alkalies to octane, isoprene, ethylene,
methylene chloride and other chloro-raethanes, light
chloro-benzenes, hydrogen sulfide, flight mercaptans, organic
sulfides to DMDS, acetone and MEK, arsine and phosphine,
acetaldehyde and subsequent aldehydes up to hexanal.
Detectable compounds to 50 ppb or less include glycol ethers,
fluorochloromethanes (Freons), methylisocyanate, chloro-ethanes, .
cyclohexanone, ethyl aerylate, and light alcohols.
All detection limits are estimated. Practical quantitation
limits vary vith sample matrix but are usually higher.
References:
1. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. A Compendium of
Superfund Field Operations Methods. Office of Emergency and
Remedial Response. December 1987. Section 15.1. (Model
10A10 only).
2. Manufacturer's literature.
2.2.11 X-Ray Fluorescence Analyzer (X-MET Model 880)
Capabilities:
The X-MET 880 unit is a portable XRF analyzer capable of
providing screening analytical data on most metals vith the
exception of mercury in soils and other solid matrices. Samples
may be analyzed with no preparation, using a hand-held probe, or
with minimal preparation. The detection limit varies with the
element of interest, the matrix, and with the presence of
interference. Estimated detection limits for arsenic, copper,
lead, and zinc are approximately 100 ppm, however practical
quantitation limits are usually higher.
The XRF analyzer irradiates metal complexes present in the
soil, resulting in the emission of X-rays characteristic of the
excited elements. The instrument examines the energies of the
X-rays emitted by the irradiated sample and compares the
intensities against reference standard emissions to quantitate the
metals concentration. It is microprocessor controlled enabling
ease of operation and is capable of the simultaneous assay of six
elements per sample type.
Operation:
The analyzer needs approximately 60,minutes to stabilize. The
actual analysis time varies (15 to 200 seconds).
2-14
-------
Calibration programs are built-in and are interactive. To
calibrate the X-MET 880 for a desired application, measurements are
made on a series of samples with known concentrations. The
measurements results, together with the concentration data, are
then processed using a built-in multiple regression program. The
acceptable calibration coefficients are then automatically
transferred to the memory. Refer to the Instruction Manual fo-r
details.
Limitations:
Operation of this instrument and interpretation of the data
should only be done by a trained and experienced operator.
References:
1. Manufacturer's literature.
2. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Field Screening Methods
Catalog, User's Guide. Office of Emergency and Remedial
Response. September 1988. Pages 3,5.
rev. 1/11/90
2-15
-------
SECTION 3 - SAMPLING PROCEDURES
The goal of hazardous waste site sampling activities is to generate
verifiable and comparable data of sufficient quantity and quality to
reduce risks surrounding necessary decisions at a site to an acceptable
level. Toward that end, the application of consistent and documented
field techniques is of primary importance in ensuring that sampling data
is representative of the media being sampled and indicative of site con-
ditions. The purpose of this manual is to outline a variety of standard
sample collection methodologies for use in hazardous waste site investi-
gative work. Routine application of these techniques will promote
development of accurate, verifiable, and comparable data upon which site
decisions can be based.
Due to the extreme variety of site conditions and investigative
objectives that may be encountered, complete enumeration of all poten-
tially applicable sampling techniques is not practical here. Rather,
the goal is to present a summary description of those techniques most
frequently or likely to be required. Modification of techniques to ad-
dress site-specific considerations may often-times be necessary. Sample
collection techniques must be clearly documented either in planning
documents or in final reports.
Sampling programs are generally included to satisfy one or more of
the following objectives:
Presence of contamination;
Magnitude of contamination;
Impact of contamination;
The effectiveness of new sampling methods;
The effectiveness of new instrumentation;
Waste characterization;
Migration pathway characterization;
Health affects assessment;
Enforcement support;
Emergency response; and
Remedial investigation/feasibility study support.
Extent of Contamination Survey
Satisfaction of any or all of these objectives in a particular
sampling program depends, to a large extent, on the methods chosen to
collect the samples. For example, data intended to support enforcement
activities may require the use of more rigorous sampling techniques than
data used in emergency response activities. Accordingly, specification
of program objectives is a pre-requisite to selection of a sampling
technique(s).
Similarly, operational concerns such as personnel health and
safety, training requirements, resource availability and experience, and
community relations may impact the choice of sampling techniques. Each
of these, as well as a variety of related issues, must be considered
when developing and/or implementing a sampling plan. Pre-sampling con-
siderations that may impact sampling methodologies are listed below, but
are not discussed in detail. Other technical or policy documents can be
3-1
-------
accessed for further information. Pre-sampling considerations that
impact sample collection activities include:
Establishment of Data Quality Objectives (DQOs);
Choice of relevant analytes;
Site safety plan acceptance;
Field team experience;
Special equipment requirements;
Budget and schedule constraints;
Community and institutional issues.
Sample collection activities require attention to detail and a rou-
tine that insures quality and consistency while maintaining efficiency.
Specific steps should be carried out during each sampling event, defined
by a regular time period (e.g., day, shift) or sampled medium (e.g.,
tanks, ponds, ground water, etc.):
• Before collection of samples, thoroughly evaluate the site
(observe the number and location of sample points, landmarks,
references, and routes of access or escape);
Record pertinent observations (include a sketch, where appro-
priate, identifying sample locations);
Prepare all sampling equipment and .sample containers prior to
entering site (provide protective wrapping to minimize con-
tamination) ;
Place sample containers on flat, stable surfaces for receiving
samples;
Plan to collect samples first from those areas that are sus-
pected of being the least contaminated so that areas of sus-
pected contamination are collected last, thus minimizing the
risk of cross contamination;
Samples should be handled by as few people as possible;
Collect samples and securely close containers as quickly as
feasible;
Document all steps in the sampling procedures (discussed in Sec-
tion 3.2);
Minimize investigation-derived waste.
All planning document requirements (Sample Plan, Site Safety Plan)
should be adhered to or documented if changed.
3.1 Sample Types
There are two general sampling techniques recognized for defining
contaminant distribution in the environment: grab and composite. A
grab sample is defined as a discrete aliquot representative of a speci-
3-2
-------
fic location at a given point in time. The sample is collected all at
once and at one particular point in the sample medium. In general, as
sources vary over time and distance, the representativeness of grab
samples will decrease.
Composites are non-discrete samples composed of more than one
aliquot collected at various sampling locations and/or different points
in time. Analysis of this type of sample produces an average value and
can in certain instances be used as an alternative to analyzing a number
of individual grab samples and calculating an average value. It should
be noted, however, that compositing can mask problems by diluting iso-
lated concentrations of some hazardous compounds below detection limits.
For sampling situations involving medium and high hazard wastes,
grab sampling techniques are generally preferred because grab sampling
minimizes the amount of time sampling personnel must be in contact with
the wastes, reduces risks associated with compositing unknowns, and eli-
minates chemical changes that might occur due to compositing. Composit-
ing is often used for environmental samples and may be used for more
hazardous samples under certain conditions. For example, compositing of
hazardous samples is often performed (after compatibility tests have
been completed) to determine an average value over a number of different
locations (group of drums). This procedure provides data that can be
useful by providing an average concentration within a number of units,
can serve to keep analytical costs down, and can provide information
useful to transporters and waste disposal operations.
The proper number of composited subsamples should reflect ultimate
data use. Typically, by increasing the number of subsamples, the inter-
pretive value of the data is reduced. By compositing samples of widely
variable concentrations, those species appearing intermittently or in
small quantities may be diluted out or masked by high detection limits
imposed by species occurring in high concentrations. Data used to
define the contents of drums for shipping to a TSD facility will be
interpreted differently than data providing site characterization.
These considerations should be evaluated at the time of sample plan
conceptualization by calculating compositing outcomes with various
possible data sets. As a rule, composite subsample numbers should not
exceed five, for a reasonable expectation that data interpretation can
be applied successfully under a wide range of conditions. This number
may be increased if expected data variability is low or decreased if
expected variability is high.
Biased sampling is the collection of samples from chosen locations,
such as areas of spills, etc. Biased samples are often used for en-
forcement to prove that contamination exists, at a given site. A biased
sampling approach can be used for grab or composite sample collection.
Systematic sampling involves a statistically based method of choos-
ing sampling points. A common method of systematic sampling is to grid-
off a site and either equally space sample points or number the gridded
units and use a random numbers chart to determine sample points.
Systematic sampling can be used with both grab and composite sampling.
3-3
-------
3.2 Sampling Techniques
3.2.1 Surface Soil Sample Collection Methods
Surface soil samples, whether composite or grab, should be col-
lected using the following guidance:
Avoid leaves, sticks, roots and rocks unless they are
specifically needed. Screening may be necessary.
Avoid mixing soil types unless specifically required.
Samples should be collected to a uniform depth and from a
uniform area.
Anomalies such as animal burrows, root channels, desiccation
cracks, sand lenses, and other aspects which may influence
pollutant migration should be recorded. Consider taking the
sample below the root or turf zone.
To provide a more representative sample, three to six subsamples
may be collected in a consistent pattern surrounding the desig-
nated sample locations and composited.
Samples should be thoroughly homogenized either by tumbling/
mixing or by multiple subdivision, unless analyses for volatile
compounds are anticipated (the laboratory will use only a few
grams of soil from a sample jar, so the sample should be well
mixed from top to bottom).
An effective field compositing method requires use of large stain-
less steel mixing pans. These can be obtained from scientific, restau-
rant, or hotel supply houses. They can be decontaminated and are able
to stand rough handling in the field. Sub-samples are placed in the
pans, broken up, then mixed using a large stainless steel scoop. Care-
ful observance of the soil will indicate the completeness of the mixing.
The soil is spread evenly in the bottom of the pan after mixing is
complete. The soil is quartered and a small sample taken from each
quarter and placed in the sample container. Excess soil is disposed of
as waste. Case must be taken to avoid cross contamination when using a
single mixing pan to composite several samples. To demonstrate the
effectiveness of the pan decontamination process, rinsate blank samples
may be required (see Section 4.2.1).
Surface soil sample collection methods of preference include scoop/
trowel techniques, hand-held augers, soil punches, and ring samplers.
Descriptions of each follow.
3.2.1.1 Scoop or Hand Trowel
Due primarily to its convenience, the scoop or trowel is generally
the tool of choice for surface soil sampling. The scoop or trowel
3-4
-------
should be made of stainless steel and, if possible, decontaminated under
laboratory conditions prior to initiation of field work. It is trans-
ported to the field in a clean, sealed plastic bag or other appropriate
sealed container to ensure cleanliness. If possible, sufficient scoops/
trowels should be available to avoid collection of more than one sample
with one trowel. When multiple sampling with a single unit is required,
the tool must be decontaminated between samples. Decontamination, if
necessary, may also require the preparation of one or more rinsate
blanks.
To collect a surface soil sample with a scoop or trowel:
Gently scrape away obvious leaves, rocks, etc. from the sample
location, unless needed, with a clean spoon or knife;
Collect soil from a predetermined area and to a predetermined
depth, depending on the volume of soil required;
Collect the VOA sample, if any, and place it into the
appropriate sample container (if one homogenizes a VOA sample
more than likely the contaminant of concern will volatize);
Place the sample in a stainless steel bowl or mixing pan and
record its appearance;
Homogenize the sample, depending on the analyses required, by
mixing with the scoop/trowel;
Remove leaves, twigs, roots, bark, rocks, etc; and
Transfer sample to an appropriate sample container, label it,
and prepare it for storage/shipping.
Limi tations
It is often difficult to collect identical sample volumes from dif-
ferent locations using the scoop or trowel. Consequently, this method
should be avoided when volume, depth, and/or area are critical factors.
3.2.1.2 Hand-Held Augers
Commonly used hand-held augers include the Iwan, ship, closed-
spiral, and open-spiral augers (Figure 3-1). Samples are generally col-
lected using one of the following two techniques:
Bore a hole to the desired sample depth, extract the auger, and
remove the soil from the auger flights or bucket to a stainless
steel mixing pan using a stainless steel spoon or knife (works
with Iwan style or other similar'augers); or
Bore a hole to a point just above the desired sample depth,
remove the auger and replace the auger tip with a tube corer,
push the corer into the soil to the desired sample depth, and
extract the corer with sample (several adjacent cores may be
3-5
-------
FIGURE 3-1
liAUD AUGERS
Ship Auger
Cloaaa-Spiral Auger
Op*n- Soiral Auger
ti
Iwan Auger
3-6
-------
necessary to collect the desired sample volume at a specific .
depth).
As with the scoop/trowel technique, care should be taken to avoid
collection of grass, etc., unless specifically required. Also, sample
appearance should be recorded as described previously, prior to homo-
genization and transfer to the sample container.
Limitations
The auger methods are not recommended in predominately sand (unless
wet) or clay soils.
3.2.1.3 Soil Punch
The soil punch is a thin walled, 15 cm to 20 cm long steel tube
that extracts short cores from the soil. The tube is driven into the
soil by the sampler's foot or with a wooden mallet, extracted with the
sample core, and the soil is then pushed out of the tube into a stain-
less steel mixing bowl. Frequently encountered soil punches include the
short King-tube samplers or the tube type density samplers used by the
Corps of Engineers. The latter is machined to a predetermined volume
and is designed to be handled and shipped as a soil-tube unit. A number
of similar devices are available for collecting short cores from surface
soils.
The soil punch is fast and can be adapted to a number of analytical
schemes provided precautions are taken to avoid contamination during
shipping and in the laboratory. This method is potentially most useful
in the collection of surface soil samples for volatile organic analysis.
The tubes can be sealed with a Teflon plug and coated with a vapor sea-
lant, such as paraffin or nonreactive sealant. These tubes can be de-
contaminated on the outside and shipped to the laboratory for analyses.
3.2.1.A Ring Sampler
Ring samples consist of a seamless steel ring, approximately 15 to
30 cm in diameter, which is driven into the soil to a depth of 15 to 20
cm. The ring is extracted as a soilring unit and the soil removed for
analysis. This device allows a constant surface area of soil to be
sampled at each location and should be used when analytical results will
be expressed on a per unit area basis.
Limitations
Removal of ring sampler cores is often difficult in very loose
sandy soil and in very tight clayey soils. The loose soil will not stay
in the ring. The clayey soil is often difficult to break loose from the
underlying soil layers.
This device has not been used extensively for collecting samples
for chemical analysis but the technique should offer a useful method for
collecting samples either for area contamination measurements or for
taking large volume samples.
3-7
-------
3.2.2 Subsurface Soil Sample Collection Methods
Subsurface soil samples, whether composite or grab, should be col-
lected using the following guidance:
Avoid mixing soil types or geologic formations in a single
sample;
Drain excess water from-samples prior to packaging;
Sample appearance, including texture, wetness, grain size dis-
tribution, degree of roundness, color, etc., should be recorded
per the United Soil Classification System;
Anomalies such as root channels, fractures, sand lenses and
other aspects which may influence pollutant migration should be
recorded; and
Samples should be thoroughly homogenized either by tumbling/
mixing or by multiple subdivision, unless analyses for volatile
compounds are anticipated.
Subsurface soil samples are collected using a variety of manual or
mechanically assisted techniques. The choice of a particular method de-
pends primarily on the soil type or geologic formation .to be sampled and
the sample depth. Descriptions of several of the most popular tech-
niques follow.
3.2.2.1 Handheld Augers
A handheld auger (Figure 3-2) may be used to collect subsurface as
well as surface soil samples. Sampling techniques are identical to
those described in Section 3.2.1.2. Sample depth is generally limited
to a maximum of ten feet and the method is most applicable to cohesive
soils above the water table from which disturbed samples are acceptable.
Collection of undisturbed samples is possible through the use of
tubecoring tips. However, in such cases care must be taken to
thoroughly clean out the bottom of the borehole and scrape off the top
1/4 inch of core so that sloughed soil from the borehole walls is not
inadvertently sampled.
The choice of auger design is dependent on soil conditions. Ship
augers are recommended for use in cohesive soils while open spiral
augers are best suited for loosely consolidated deposits. Closed spiral
augers work well in dry clay and gravelly soils, and the Iwan auger is
useful in a variety of soils.
Limitations
Hand augers generally result in collection of mixed samples and it
is frequently difficult to define locations of changing strata. The
method is not useful in hard or cemented soils, in noncohesive soils
3-8
-------
FIGURE 3-2
SAMPLING TRIER,
UiGIR and IIAXD CORER
\
#1-100 cm
124-40*) _
\r
\
YJ
-H H-
1.27-2.54 cm (0.5-1*)
Samoitng TViar
Kano Corar
Ajjqar
3-9
-------
where "collapse or slough is likely, or cobbly soils. Depth of sampling
is generally limited to ten feet.
3.2.2.2 Trier/Hand Corer
A slotted sampling trier (Figure 3-2) or hand corer (Figure 3-2) is
useful for collection of shallow subsurface samples (maximum depth of
approximately three feet). The trier or corer is simply pushed into the
ground and the soil core extracted. Advantages of the method include
its ability to collect undisturbed cores and, in the case of the trier,
allow visual observation of the core prior to placement in a sample jar.
Limitations
The trier and corer are not recommended for use in rocky or com-
pacted/cemented soils.
3.2.2.3 Powered Hand Augers
A variety of powered hand augers are available to increase depth
and penetration capabilities of manual auger techniques (Figure 3-3).
Sampling methods utilized with power augers are identical to those used
with hand augers. Advantages of these units are their portability and
their ability to penetrate soils that were not possible with a hand
auger. Portable power augers are also relatively easy to use. Dis-
advantages of the drills are their difficulty in penetrating cobbly or
rootbound soils. These augers become increasingly difficult to operate
with depth, and are best suited for boreholes less than ten feet deep.
3.2.2.4 Backhoe/Trenching
Trenching and test pitting are excellent methods of obtaining waste
samples from dumps and landfills. While borings may be useful at
greater depths, drilling through a landfill or dump creates unusual
hazards (e.g., hitting pockets of explosive gases, rupturing buried
containers, or potentially contaminating the transfer by penetrating
confining layers beneath a landfill). Additionally, the samples
gathered by drilling are not representative of the heterogeneous condi-
tions found in a landfill. Trenching and test pitting allow a larger,
more representative area to be observed, permit selection of specific
samples from the pile of spoiled or stockpiled material (biased grab
sampling), and, with reasonable precautions, allow the retrieval of in-
tact, buried containers.
Backhoe and trenching methods involve the creation of shallow ex-
cavations for the purpose of obtaining detailed information about shal-
low subsurface conditions. It is a less cost effective sampling method
than hand auguring, but far cheaper than hiring a drill rig.
Additionally, sampling from excavations at hazardous waste sites
necessarily involves consideration of several health and safety issues,
including the possibility of sidewall collapse and concentration of
toxic or explosive gases within the excavation. Backfilling of the
trench may require the segregation of hazardous materials to a collec-
3-10
-------
Powarad Hand Aug*'
-------
tion area and addition of clean fi*ll to make up the lost volume. The
"hazardous material" may be defined by look (oily, colored) or by air
moni toring.
The following guidelines for construction of test pits and
trenches, and collection of samples are taken from EPA's A Compendium of
Field Operations Methods: Volume 1.
Test pits and trenches may be excavated by hand or by power equip-
ment to permit detailed explanation and clear understanding of the
nature and contamination of the insitu materials. The size of the ex-
cavation will depend primarily on the following:
• The purpose and extent of the exploration;
The space required for efficient excavation;
The chemicals of concern;
The economics and efficiency of available equipment.
Test pits normally have a cross section that is four to ten feet
square; test trenches are usually three to six feet wide and may be ex-
tended for any length required to reveal conditions along a specific
line. Fifteen feet is considered to be the economical vertical limit of
excavation. However, larger and deeper excavations have been used when
special problems justified the expense.
The construction of test pits and trenches should be planned and
designed in advance as much as possible. However, field conditions may
necessitate revisions to the initial plans. The field supervisor should
determine the exact depth and construction. The test pits and trenches
should be excavated in compliance with applicable safety regulations as
specified by the health and safety officer.
If the depth exceeds four feet and people will be entering the pit
or trench, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) require-
ments must be met: walls must be braced with wooden or steel braces,
ladders must be in the hole at all times, and a temporary guardrail must
be placed along the surface of the hole before entry. It is advisable
to stay out of test pits as much as possible. If possible, the required
data or samples should be gathered without entering the pit. Samples of
leachate, ground water, or sidewall soils can be collected with tele-
scoping poles, etc.
Stabilization of the sides of test pits and trenches, when re-
quired, generally is achieved by sloping the walls at a sufficiently
flat angle or by using sheeting. Benching or terracing can be used for
deeper holes. Shallow- excavations are generally stabilized by sheeting.
Test pits excavated into fill are generally much more unstable than pits
dug into natural inplace soil.
Sufficient space should be maintained between trenches or pits to
place soil that will be stockpiled for cover, as well as to allow access
and free movement by haul vehicles and operating equipment. Excavated
soil should be stockpiled to one side, in one location, preferably down-
wind, away from the edge of the pit to reduce pressure on the pit walls.
3-12
-------
Devatering may be required to assure the stability of the side
walls, to prevent the bottom of the pit from heaving, and to keep the
excavation dry. This is an important consideration for excavations in
cohesionless material below the ground water table. Liquids removed as
a result of devatering operations must be handled as potentially con-
taminated materials.
The overland flow of water from excavated saturated soils and the
erosion or sedimentation of the stockpiled soil should be controlled. A
temporary detention basin and a drainage system should be planned to
prevent the contaminated wastes from spreading.
Sampling Guidelines
Sampling from test pits can be performed by "disturbed" and "un-
disturbed" methods. Sampling should begin from within the pit or trench
only after proper safety precautions have been initiated.
Disturbed samples are those that have been collected in a manner in
which the in situ physical structure and fabric of the soil have been
disrupted. Disturbed sampling techniques typically include sampling
from the walls or floors of the test pit by means of scraping or digging
with a trowel, rockpick, or shovel. These samples should be collected
after the face or floor of the pit is scraped clean. The sample is col-
lected without sluff and at a specific measured depth. Large disturbed
samples can be taken directly from the backhoe bucket during excavation;
however, care must be taken to assure that the sample is actually from
the unit desired and does not include slough or scraped material from
the sides of the trench.
"Relatively undisturbed" samples can be obtained from test pits.
Typically, an undisturbed sample is collected by isolating by hand a
large cube of soil at the base or side of the test pit. This sample can
be cut using knives, shovels, and the like. Care is taken to keep dis-
turbances to a minimum. After the block of soil is removed, it is
placed in an airtight, padded container for shipment to the lab. The
overexcavated sample is "trimmed" at the laboratory to the size required
for the designated test. In some instances (e.g., in soft cohesive
soil), it may be possible to get an undisturbed sample by pushing a
Shelby tube or other similar sampling device into an undisturbed portion
of the test pit and by using a backhoe.
Backfilling Guidelines
Before backfilling, the on site crew should photograph all signi-
ficant features exposed by the test pit and trench and should include in
the photograph a scale to show dimensions. Photographs of test pits
should be marked to include site number, test pit number, depth, des-
cription of feature, and date of photograph. In addition, a geologic
description of each photograph should be entered in the logbook. All
photographs should be indexed and maintained for future reference.
After inspection, backfill material should be returned to the pit
3-13
-------
under the direction of the field supervisor.
If a lov permeability layer is penetrated (resulting in ground
water flov from an upper contaminated flow zone into a lower uncon-
taminated flow zone), backfill material must represent original con-
ditions or be impermeable. Backfill could consist of a soil/bentonite
mix prepared in a proportion specified by the field supervisor (repre-
senting a permeability equal to or less than original conditions).
Backfill should be covered by "clean" soil and graded to the original
land contour. Revegetation of the undisturbed area may also be re-
quired.
3.2.2.5 Hand-Driven Split-Spoon Samplers
A hand-driven split-spoon sampler provides a means to obtain
relatively undisturbed core samples. The depth will again be limited b^
the soil type and also the number of sampling rod sections available for
the split-spoon. When the split-spoon is opened, the core should be
visually inspected for varying strata which are present. Samples should
be obtained from each, using a stainless steel scoop.
3.2.2.6 Truck or Trailer Mounted Drilling Methods
Truck and/or trailer mounted drills represent extensions of the
capabilities of powered hand augers. Drilling techniques such as solid
or hollow-stem augers, cable tool and air-rotary can be used with
several sampling devices, including split-spoons and Shelby tubes, to
collect shallow and deep subsurface samples. The choice of a particular
drilling and sampling method depends on the depth required, geologic
formation, and program objectives. Descriptions of methods most
frequently used are provided below.
Solid-Stem Continuous Flight Augers
Samples can be recovered by several methods when using solid stem
continuous flight augers. Samples may be obtained from cuttings de-
posited at the top of the hole as the auger advances, by pulling the
augers out of the hole at certain intervals and sampling the material
adhering to the auger bit or cutter head, or by driving a split spoon
sampler into undisturbed soil at the bottom of the boring. The first
method is relatively quick and easy but it is often difficult to define
the depth from which the sample was collected. The second provides
better control over sample depth (although as depth increases some
mixing of deep and shallow materials is inevitable while the augers are
pulled), but is labor intensive. Neither technique allows for
collection of undisturbed samples. Split spoon sampling is the
preferred method for collecting relatively undisturbed samples
representative of subsurface conditions.
Hollow-Stem Continuous Flight Augers
As with solid-stem augers, samples can be collected directly from
the ground surface or flights of the hollow-stem auger. The hollow-stem
method also allows for collection of relatively undisturbed samples,
3-14
-------
rhronfrh rhe use of split-spoon samplers (Figure 3-4), rore barrel
samplers, and other similar devices. To collect undisturbed samples
through a hollow-stem auger the following general steps are employed:
Drill to a point immediately above the desired sample depth;
Remove the drill rods and center bit from the hole;
Attach the sampling device to the drill rod and lower it down
the hole;
Drive the sampler beyond the lead auger to a predetermined dis-
tance ;
Record the number of blows required to drive the sampler in
six inch increments;
Retrieve the drill rod and sampler.
Once the sample is retrieved, the split-spoon sampler can be opened
and the sample logged and removed. Most core barrels are constructed
with an inner tube that contains the sample. The outer tube is first
removed and the inner tube is split to expose the sample, similar to a
split-spoon. Some inner tubes are made of transparent plastic so the
sample can be inspected before the tube is cut open. Split-spoons can
also be fitted with brass or stainless steel sleeves and catch baskets
to assist in recovering a sufficient sample volume.
In addition to split-spoons and core barrels, continuous cores can
be collected as the augers are advanced using the wireline method. A
thin-walled sample tube and special latching mechanism are placed within
the deepest hollow-stem auger. The latching arrangement permits the
tube to remain stationary while the auger rotates. When the sample tube
is full, it is pulled to the surface by a wireline hoist and exchanged
for an empty sampler. Drive samplers can also be driven out the bottom
of the augers with the wireline method. When sampling below the water
table in loose sand formations, the water level within the auger must be
kept at or above the ground water level as the plug is pulled to prevent
sand from rising up into the stem before the sampling tube is driven
into the formation. Samples of the water added to the hole must be
collected to ensure that contaminants are not introduced.
Specific descriptions of split-spoon and core barrel type sampling
methods, as provided in EPA's Compendium of Superfund Field Operations
Methods, are as follows.
Split-Spoon Samplers
The split-spoon sampler is a thick-walled, steel tube that is split
lengthwise. A cutting shoe is attached to the lower end; the upper end
contains a check valve and is connected to the drill rods. When a bor-
ing is advanced to the point that a sample is to be taken, drill tools
are removed and the sampler is lowered into the hole on the bottom of
the drill rods.
3-15
-------
FIGURE 3-4
split-spoo:;
SAMPLER and FOKAR GPAB
SeiU-Sooon SAinsisr
fonar Gr*o
3-16
-------
The sampler is typically driven 18 inches into the ground in ac-
cordance with a standard penetration test (ASTM D1586). The effort
taken to drive the sampler the last 12 inches is recorded at six-inch
intervals, and the sampler is removed from the boring. The density of
the sampled material is obtained by counting the blows per foot as the
split-spoon sampler is driven by a 140-pound hammer falling 30 inches.
This field penetration test is valid from a lower limit of 5 to 10 blows
per foot to an upper limit of 30 to 50 blows per foot. It is applicable
to fairly clean, coarse-grained sands and gravels at a variety of water
contents and saturated or nearly saturated fine-grained soils.
The standard-size split-spoon sampler has an inside diameter (ID)
of 1.38 to 1.5 inches. When soil samples are taken for chemical
analysis, it may be desirable to use a 2 or 2.5 ID sampler, which
provides a larger volume of material but cannot be used to calculate
aquifer properties by using the stated ASTM test method.
The split-spoon sampler is decontaminated between samples. In some
instances, separate, previously decontaminated split-spoon samplers may
be advisable for each sample taken to expedite the sampling process.
Aliquots are taken from the sampler at selected increments and are
placed in jars or, where lenses or layers are evident, the material
types should be separated into different jars.
Thin-Valled Tube Samplers
Thin-walled samplers, such as a Shelby tube, are used to take re-
latively undisturbed samples of soil from borings. The samplers are
constructed of cold, drawn steel tubing about 1 mm thick (for tubes two
inches in diameter) or 3 mm thick (for tubes five inches in diameter).
The lower end is bent to form a tapered cutting edge. The upper end is
fastened to a check valve to help hold the sample in the tube when the
tube is being withdrawn from the ground. Thin-walled tube samples are
obtained by any one of several methods including pushed-tube, Pitcher
sampler, Denison sampler, and piston sampler methods. Choosing the most
appropriate method requires that field personnel use their own
judgment. Since the purpose of thin-walled tube sampling is to obtain
the highest quality undisturbed samples possible, special care should be
taken in the sampling, handling, packaging, and shipping of these
samples.
In obtaining pushed-tube samples, the tube is advanced by hydrauli-
cally pushing in one continuous movement with the drill rig. The maxi-
mum hydraulic pressure is recorded. At the end of the designated push
interval and before lifting the sample, the tube is twisted to break the
bottom of the sample.
Upon recovery of a thin-walled tube, the actual length of sample is
measured and recorded (excluding slough or cuttings). At least 1/2 inch
of soil is cleaned from each end of the tube, and the ends of the soil
sample are squared off.. Usually the top of the sample will contain cut-
tings or slough. These must be removed before sealing. The soil that
3-17
-------
has been cleaned from the tube can be used for a visual classification
of the sample. The resulting space at each end of the tube is filled
vith melted sealing material, such as approved wax, or with expandable
packers. Previously decontaminated Teflon or stainless steel plugs are
also used. After this initial sealing, a dry filler such as cuttings,
sand, or paper can be placed in the remaining void areas, and sealing is
again conducted. This filler prevents the sample from breaking the
initial end seals during handling and shipment. The ends of the tube
are then closed vith tight-fitting metal or plastic caps, and the seam
between the cap and tube is wrapped vith tape. Finally, the ends are
dipped in hot wax, completely covering the tape to ensure sealing.
Cable-Tool (Percussion) Drilling
The cable tool method is best suited for drilling relatively shal-
low holes in large, caving, gravelly formations with cobbles and boul-
ders. It is also used effectively for detecting perched or narrow, con-
fined water bearing zones. Sampling unconsolidated materials by the
cable tool method present comparatively few difficulties. The depth
from vhich the samples are obtained can be measured accurately.
Collecting samples by the cable tool method involves drilling and
driving casing a short distance and then using a bailer to clean out the
plug of material. Compact plugs may have to be loosened and mixed by the
drill bit before the material can be picked up by the bailer. The cas-
ing may be driven about one foot (0.3 m) into interbedded sand and clay,
or several feet in thick sand to isolate a sample.
Heaving sand conditions may interfere vith sampling and logging
when the cable tool method is used. There is no way to know what part
of the sand formation is represented by the material inside the casing
after the heave takes place. In addition, upward flow of the sand tends
to separate fine fractions from coarse fractions. The usual practice is
to discard materials that move up into the casing. Some drillers add
water to the casing to control heaving. Be sure that the water added is
from a controlled supply source and that samples of it are collected to
check for contaminants.
More than one bailer load of material should be mixed together .to
provide a sample that is reasonably representative of the sampling
interval. This is particularly important when sampling sand and gravel
formations.
Several types of bailers can be used to remove the cuttings. A
flat-valve bailer is worked down into a loose mass by a pumping action
produced by lifting and dropping the bailer only a few inches. The
driller often does this by pulling on the sand line. A sand pump with
rod plunger is also useful for sampling work because the upward stroke
of the plunger draws material up through the valve and into the bailer.
The action produces some washing of the sample and this fact must be
kept in mind. A dart-valve bailer is not as useful in sampling sand
formations because it is effective only when enough clay is mixed with
the sand to hold it in suspension in a mud slurry.
3-18
-------
The method known as drive-core sampling provides the most accurate
means of obtaining representative formation samples from unconsolidated
strata. The method consists of driving a tube two to four feet (0.6 to
1.2 m) long into the material and then withdrawing it. To prevent loss
of the core from the core barrel, the tube is overdriven - that is, it
is driven a distance greater than its length in order to compact the
nfaterial inside the tube. This practice permits recovery of the core in
most cases, jeven when sampling clean sand or clean sand and gravel. The
drive-core tube may be driven into a plug or material inside the casing
after driving the casing a short distance, or it may be driven into the
material below the bottom of the casing. The driller usually must
determine the best procedure by trial in any given situation.
Air Rotary Drilling
Air rotary is an efficient method of drilling through both uncon-
solidated and consolidated deposits. It is of particular value in
consolidated formations or formations that contain erratics or boulders
that present serious problems for other drilling methods.
Some drawbacks to air rotary drilling are the fact that compressed
air is used to force the cuttings to the surface. This air must be
filtered to assure no trace contamination by oil carried in the com-
pressed air. Several filters are available for this purpose, but are
fairly costly. In addition, the agitation of both cuttings and ground
water as they are brought to the surface will affect concentration of
volatile compounds and affect the original soil structure for logging
purposes. These factors should be considered and precautions taken if
it appears that these conditions could jeopardize a drilling sampling
program.
When collecting samples using the air rotary method of drilling,
the cuttings are blown from a discharge point into a "cyclone" or other
type of collection device. The exit velocities for these materials are
fairly high so a sieve or strainer with a long handle is essential to
catching the sample. Several scoops should be combined as a particular
interval is penetrated to minimize the effects of sorting as the cut-
tings are brought to the surface.
3.2.2.7 Compositing Strategies
Methods for compositing subsurface soil samples are identical to
those described for surface soils (Section 3.2.1). The subsurface com-
posite sample can be obtained by mixing aliquots from the same soil type
or formation from several holes as well as vertically from the same
hole.
3.2.2.8 Summary
Regardless of the sampling method, each sample should be completely
and accurately identified. Excess water should be drained from the
samples before sending them to the laboratory. The depth from which the
sample was collected, the thickness of material that it represents, and
its sequence in the soil profile should be clearly documented.
3-19
-------
It is important that all equipment coming in contact with the soil
be decontaminated between sampling locations (see Section 3.3).
Many techniques exist for obtaining subsurface soil samples. It is
important that the type of samples collected satisfy the purpose of the
investigation. Discuss the type of samples needed with the project
manager and driller to ensure the objectives of the sampling episode are
met. Follow all health and safety guidelines when handling samples, be-
cause the sample often is the closest you will come into contact to
hazardous materials. Dispose of any extra samples in an acceptable man-
ner .
3.2.3 Sludge And Sediment Sample Collection Methods
Sludge and sediment samples, whether composite or grab, should be
collected using the procedures outlined in Section 3.2.1 for surface
soil. However, it must be noted that sludge may represent concentrated
wastes (i.e., from bottom of sump or drum) and should therefore be
handled with caution.
General items that should be considered when sampling sediments in-
clude the distance from the bank of a stream or pond one should be be-
fore sampling (i.e., bank versus bottom) and consideration of stream
hydraulics in deposition of sediments (where are the erosion.points ver-
sus main areas of sediment deposition).
Sludge and sediment sample collection methods of preference include
hand/gravity corers, the ponar grab, the ekman grab, and scrape/scoop
collection.
3.2.3.1 Hand Corer
This device is essentially the same type of thin-wall corer des-
cribed for collecting soil samples (Figure 3-2). It is modified by the
addition of a handle to facilitate driving the corer and a check valve
on top to prevent washout during retrieval through an overlying water
layer.
Hand corers are applicable to the same situations and materials as
the scoop described in Section 3.2.1.1. It has the advantage of
collecting an undisturbed sample that can profile any stratification in
the sample as a result of changes in the deposition.
Some hand corers can be fitted with extension handles that will
allow the collection of samples underlying a shallow layer of liquid.
Most corers can also be adapted to hold liners generally available in
brass or polycarbonate plastic. Care should be taken to choose a
material that will not compromise the chemical integrity of the sample.
3-20
-------
3.2.3.2 Gravity Corer
A gravity corer is a metal tube vith a replaceable tapered nose-
piece on the bottom and a ball or other type of check, valve on the top.
The check, valve allows water to pass through the corer on descent but
prevents washout during recovery. The tapered nosepiece facilitates
cutting and reduces core disturbance during penetration. Most are con-
structed of brass or steel and many can accept plastic liners and addi-
tional weights (Figure 3-5).
Corers are capable of collecting samples of most sludges and sedi-
ments. They collect essentially undisturbed samples that represent the
profile of strata that may develop in sediments and sludges during vari-
ations in the deposition process. Depending on the density of the sub-
strata and the weight of the corer, penetration to depths of 30 inches
can be attained. Care should be exercised when using gravity corers in
vessels or lagoons that have liners, since penetration depths could ex-
ceed that of substrate and result in damage to the liner material.
There are many different types of corers that can be used for
sludge or sediment sampling. Those most commonly used are presented in
Table 3-1 with a discussion of disadvantages and advantages for each.
3.2.3.3 Ponar Grab
The Ponar grab (Figure 3-4) is a clamshell type scoop activated by
a counter lever system. The shell is opened and latched in place and
slowly lowered to the bottom. When tension is released on the lowering
cable the latch releases and the lifting action of the cable on the
lever system closes the clamshell.
Ponars are capable of sampling most types of sludges and sediments
from silts to granular materials. They are available in a "Petite"
version with a 36 square inch sample area that is light enough to be
operated without a winch or crane. Penetration depths will usually not
exceed several centimeters. Grab samplers, unlike the corers described
above, are not capable of collecting undisturbed samples. As a result,
material in the first centimeter of sludge cannot be separated from that
at lower depths. The mechanical action of these devices create
turbulence that may temporarily resuspend some settled solids. This
disturbance can be minimized by slowly lowering the sampler the last
half meter and allowing a very slow contact with the bottom. It is
advisable, however, to only collect sludge or sediment samples after all
overlying water samples have been obtained.
Although the Ponar grab is one of the most popular sediment
samplers available, it is only one of many different kinds of bottom
grabs available for collecting samples of this type. Although it has
its advantages, it can become buried in soft bottom sediment and become
difficult to remove. Table 3-2 provides a list of the most commonly
used bottom grabs and the advantages and disadvantages for each.
3-21
-------
FIGURE 3-5
• GRAVITY CORZRS and
PERISTALTIC-PUMP SAIiPLEE
PtfUtailb
u«atea<«Qrfto« Shkocm Tuoing
\Z
a=5t
Aa*oft»0 LM^iita
01 Ulloii Tuoing
Ottoftwg* To
>tw>li Cmmiimi
Parlitaltlc Pump Sampler
-------
TABLE 3-1
COMPARISON OP CORING DEVICES
Device Advantages
Kajak or K.B. Corer Does not impede free flow of water, no
pressure wave, easily applied to large area.
Hoore (Pfleger) Valve allows sample to be held.
O'Connor
Elgmork's
Jenkins
Enequist
Kirpicenko
Can sample water with hard bottoms.
Sample easily removed, good in soft muds,
easy to collect, easy to remove sample.
Good in soft sediments and for collecting
an undisturbed sediment-water interface
sample. Visual examination of benthic
algal growth and rough estimates of mixing
near the interface after storms can be made.
Good in soft/medium sediments, closing
mechanism.
Soft and hard bottoms, various sizes,
closes automatically.
Disadvantages
Careful handling necessary to avoid
sediment rejection, not appropriate in
soft sediments.
Not apporpriate in deep water.
Not appropriate in hard sediments.
Complicated.
Does not peentrate hard bottom.
Not appropriate for stony bottoms.
-------
TABLE 3-2
COMPARISON OP BOTTOM GRABS
Device
Advantages
Ponar
Ekman
Safe, easy to use, prevents escape of
material with end plates, reduces shock
wave, combines advantages o£ others, pre-
ferred grab in most cases.
Use in soft sediments and calm waters, col-
lects standard size sample (quantitative),
reduces shock wave.
Tall Ekman
Does not lose sediment over top; use in
soft sediments and calm water, standard
sample size, reduces shock wave.
Peterson
Quantitative samples in the fine sediments,
good for hard bottoms; sturdy and simple
construction.
Smith-Mclntyre Useful in bad weather, flange on jaws re-
duced material loss, screen reduces shock
waves, good in all sediment types.
Hayward Orange Peel Easy to operate, commercially available in
various sizes, does not rust easily, does
not require messenger, good bottom penetra-
tion, takes undisturbed sample of top
sediment.
Diver Can determine most representative sampling
point and current velocity.
Disadvantages
Can become buried in soft sediments.
Not useful in rought water; not useful
if vegetation on bottom.
Not useful in rough waters, other as
for Ekman.
Hay lose sampled material, premature
tripping, not easy to close; does not
sample constant areas; limited sampling
capaci ty.
Large, complicated and heavy,
hazardous, for samples to 7-cm depth
only, shock weave created.
Difficult to determine sampling cover,
two cables required, active washing
during sampling, jaws do not close
tightly, soft sediment fouls closing
mechanism.
Requires costly equipment and special
training.
-------
3.2.3.4 Teflon Beaker
To obtain sediments from larger streams or farther from the shore
of a pond or lake, a Teflon beaker attached to a telescoping aluminum
pole by means of a clamp may be used to dredge sediments.
3.2.3.5 Scrape/Scoop Collection
A trowel, or scoop or the sample jar itself can be used when ex-
posed material is being collected. Sludges from sewer lines, empty
ponds, etc. are collected by scraping/scooping and are transferred to
the sample jar. This method is not advised for sediments with a fairly
high liquid content, as disruption will alter the environment and the
liquid/solid ratio in samples.
3.2.3.6 Compositing Strategies
Aerial composites of sludge and sediment samples are generally de-
rived using the mixing bowl technique as described in Section 3.2.1. As
with the soil samples, care must be taken when compositing to regulate
the volume and number of sub-samples used in the composite. Vet samples
will tend to clump and not mix well, especially if subsamples contain
different water contents.
3.2.3.7 Summary
In general, one should choose the type of sampler that meets the
needs of the sampling program by considering the advantages and dis-
advantages of the sampler type. For the most part, equipment of simple
construction is preferred due to ease of operation and maintenance plus
lower expense.
3.2.4 Surface Water Sample Collection Methods
A number of issues should be addressed while developing a surface
water sampling methodology. In particular, consideration should be
given to the following:
The solubility and density of the compound(s) of interest deter-
mines the appropriate sample collection depth;
The degree of mixing between the source and sampling station;
Factors such as safety and accessibility determine how far from
the bank one samples;
Water samples are to contain only liquids and suspended
matter (no sludges, etc.);
A background sample is needed from upstream of the source in
question for all bodies of water (i.e., if a tributary adds to a
source stream, both must have background;
3-25
-------
Samples to be analyzed for volatile organics should have no head
space (or bubbles) in the sample jar, should be handled as lit-
tle as possible, and should be collected above areas of turbu-
lence (i.e., in streams);
Cyclical effects should be considered, such as time of discharge
from a facility, time of year and weather;
Sampling should be performed moving from downstream to upstream
locations.
Note the discharge of the stream, if possible.
Coupling surface water sample locations with sediment sample loca-
tions is beneficial as the likelihood for contamination of one media by
the other is high.
3.2.4.1 Sample Container
This is the easiest surface water sampling method, and is suitable
for collecting samples from shallow depths.
Sampler is positioned downstream of the sample location in order
to prevent stirred sediment from contaminating the sample.
• The sample container is submerged with the mouth facing upstream
(if flowing).
Allow the bottle to fill completely, as evidenced by the cessa-
tion of air bubbles.
• Raise and cap the bottle.
Wipe the bottle clean.
In surface water bodies with a shallow bottom, the sampler can dig
a hole, wait for it to fill and clear, and then collect the water
sample.
Advantages of this method are that it alleviates the need for
transferring the sample, which could significantly alter it. This is
especially important with samples collected for oil and grease analysis,
since material may adhere to the transfer container, thus producing in-
accurately low analytical results.
A disadvantage to this sampling method is that the outside of each
sample container will require decontamination prior to packaging.
3.2.4.2 Bailer or Dipper
This method is similar to using the sample container, however, de-
contamination of the final sample jar may not be necessary. Specific
sample depths cannot be guaranteed unless only the immediate surface is
3-26
-------
sampled. The increased sample handling betveen the source and rhe final
sample jar may increase the loss of volatile organics from the sample.
Sampler is positioned downstream of the sample location in order
to prevent stirred sediment from contaminating the sample.
The sample container is submerged with the mouth facing upstream
(if flowing).
• The dipper (Figure 3-6) or bailer is slowly submerged, allowed
to fill, and slowly retrieved.
The sample is then poured into the sample container by allowing
the liquid to run down the inside of the jar.
Cap the bottle and wipe the bottle clean if necessary.
Decontaminate the bailer.
3.2.4.3 Weighted Bottle Sampler
The following guidelines for the use of a weighted-bottle sampler
are taken from EPA's A Compendium of Superfund Field Operations Methods.
A weighted-bottle sampler is used to collect samples at any pre-
determined depth. The sampler consists of a glass bottle, a weighted
sinker, a bottle stopper, and a line that is used to open the bottle and
to lower and raise the sampler during sampling. This sampler can be
either fabricated or purchased. The procedure for use is as follows:
Assemble the weighted bottle sampler as shown in Figure 3-6.
Gently lower the sampler to the desired depth so as not to re-
move the stopper prematurely.
Pull out the stopper with a sharp jerk of the sampler line.
Allow the bottle to fill completely, as evidenced by the cessa-
tion of air bubbles.
Raise the sampler and cap the bottle.
Wipe the bottle clean. The bottle can also be used as the
sample container.
3.2.4.4 Pump and Tubing
While the use of a pump requires a power source (batteries or gene-
rator), it also allows for remote sampling and sampling at a specific
depth. The depth is limited by the type and power of the pump and by
the hydraulic head.
3-27
-------
FIGURE 3-6
POND SAMPLER and
WEIGHTED-BOTTLE SAMPLER
WasMr
Pin .
I .LCark
' Wuiw
Nut
W«ignt*4-8ottla Catena*
1000ml Uqt)
Watgntaa-Sottla Samolar
JL
Pol®, Talaacoplng. Aluminum. Haawy Ouly.
250-4S0cm (98-180")
Pond Samplar
3-2S
-------
Peristaltic Pumps
Peristaltic pumps can be used to collect surface vater samples and
transfer them directly to the sample container (Figure 3-5). Advantages
of the pumps are that they are easy to use, and the discharge tubing can
be easily changed between samples to prevent cross contamination. Dis-
advantages of the pumps are that they require a power source, and are
not recommended for collection of samples for volatile organics analysis
when the pump must be located higher than the water surface. Directions
for using a peristaltic pump are as follows:
1. Install clean, medical-grade silicone tubing in the pump head,
per the manufacturer's instructions. Allow sufficient tubing
on the discharge side to facilitate convenient dispensation of
liquid into sample bottles, but only enough on the suction end
for attachment to the intake line. This practice will minimize
sample contact with the silicone pump tubing. (Some types of
thinner Teflon tubing may be used.)
2. Select the length of suction intake tubing necessary to reach
the required sample depth and attach the tubing to intake side
of pump tubing. Heavy-wall Teflon of a diameter equal to the
required pump tubing will suit most applications. (A heavier
wall will allow for a slightly greater lateral reach.)
3. If possible, allow several liters of sample to pass through the
system before actual sample collection. Collect this purge
volume, and then return it to source after the sample aliquot
has been collected.
4. Fill necessary sample bottles by allowing pump discharge to
flow gently down the inside wall of the sample container with
minimal entry turbulence.
3.2.4.5 Kemmerer Sampler
This apparatus allows the collection of surface waters at specified
depths (Figure 3-7). The sampler is attached to a measured sampling
line, and the messenger activated corking assembly is lifted open. The
sampler is then lowered to the desired depth and the messenger is re-
leased, tripping the corking system. The sampler is retrieved and the
contents transferred to the appropriate sample containers.
3.2.4.6 Glass Thieving Rod
Glass tubing can be used to collect surface water samples. Advan-
tages of the method are the ability to sample stratified water bodies,
such as a lagoon with a floating oil layer. Maximum sampling depths are
limited to a few feet, and are dependent on the viscosity of the liquid
being sampled. Disadvantages of the method are the relatively small
volumes obtained by the tubes, difficulty in preventing drippage, and
potential loss of oily sample fractions to the inside of the tube. To
collect a sample, a glass tube generally of less than 20-mm is lowered
3-29
-------
FIGURE 3-7
MODIFIZD-KEMMERER SAJIPLER
¦8odv
Bottom Drain
¦ Low«r Stopper
3-30
-------
slowly into the source, so as to maintain the stratification of the
source. The liquid on the inside and outside of the tube should be at
the same height, indicating minimal disturbance while filling. Cap the
top of the tube (usually with a thumb) to create a seal, and withdraw
the tube from the source. Holding the end of the glass tube over the
sample container, make a small break in the seal at the top to allow the
sample to slowly drain into the sample container. This may need to be
repeated several times to obtain sufficient sample volume.
3.2.4.7 Compositing Strategies
Composite surface water samples can be collected to represent an
average discharge concentration over time, over a range of depths, or
spatial locations. Time composites can also be used to sample seeps or
other contaminant sources that have very low flow or discharge volumes.
Automated systems can be programmed to collect sample aliquots at pre-
determined times.
3.2.5 Ground Water Sample Collection Methods
The following considerations should be addressed when preparing to
collect ground water samples from wells:
Background information should be recorded systematically using a
method such as a "Ground Water Measurement Data Sheet" (Figure
3-8). Well information can be obtained from driller's logs,
geotechnical reports, the facility owner, etc.
The well owner should be notified of the proposed sampling and
permission to access the well should be acquired. If the well
is locked, arrangements should be made to obtain a key. Vehicle
access to the well site should be determined, and if not pos-
sible, alternative arrangements to transport sampling equipment
should be made.
Preparation for fieldwork, which includes the selection of
specific sampling equipment and collection techniques.
3.2.5.1 Monitoring Wells
This section outlines the steps necessary for obtaining ground
water samples from a monitoring well. Construction methods may be found
in EPA/600/2-851104 Section 2. An equipment checklist is provided in
Table 3-3.
Removing Well Cap/Venting
As the veil cap is removed, air monitoring of the breathing zone
should be conducted using the appropriate instruments and health and
safety procedures. Allowing the uncapped well to vent for several
minutes prior to beginning sampling activities will enable gases that
may have concentrated within the veil to escape and dissipate.
3-31
-------
FIGURZ 3-8
GROUNDWATER MEASUREMENT DATA SHEET
SITE NAME: WEIL NO.: DATE:.
TYPE OF WELL; Monitoring Domestic Commercial/Industrial_
Irrigation
ELEVATION: MEASURING POINT AT:
CONSTRUCTED DJ^PTH! DATUM:
1. FIELD OBSERVATIONS AND MEASUREMENTS
a. FIELD PERSONNEL:
b. WEATHER:
c. CONDITION OF WELL;
d. DEPTH TO STATIC WATER (from measuring point):.
a. MEASURED TOTAL DEPTH OF WELL:
£. DIAMETER OF THE WELL:
g. LENGTH OF WATER COLUMN (total depth. - dap til of wtr.)
h. CALCULATED REQUIRED PURGE VOLUME:
i. PURGING METHOD (type, model, composition, ate.):
Hand Pump Bailer
Portable Unit Dedicated Unit:
Date/ Volume Conduct.
Time Purged Temp pH (umbos) Turbidity Other other
ADDITIONAL NOTES
3-32
-------
TABLE 3-3
MONITORING WELL SAMPLING EQUIPMENT CHECKLIST
Equipment
Use
Sample Containers
Sample Filtering
Field Blanks
Keys
Pipe wrenches
Propane torch
Hammer and cold chisel
Electronic water level
indicator/graduated
depth sounder
Tape measure
Pump
Generator
Extension cord
DOT approved storage drums
Well bailer
Monofilament line/
Braided nylon cord
Decontamination solutions/
water
Appropriate to analyses desired
See Section 3.2.5.
See Section 4.
For locked monitoring wells.
May be necessary to remove steel security
caps on wells that have not been re-
cently opened and sampled.
Use to determine static water level and
total depth of well.
Use to measure between increments on the
water level indicator/depth sounder.
Use to purge or evacuate well prior to
obtaining sample; it is not a recommended
means to obtain a sample.
Power source for electric pumps.
For use with electric generators.
For storage of potentially contaminated
purge water pending sample analysis.
Use to purge small amounts of standing
water if pump is not used and to obtain
ground water samples. Figure 3-9
Use for lowering bailer into well; should
be of sufficient strength to hold full
bailer and overcome any resistance
between well casing and bailer. In-
dividual line/cord should be dedicated
to each well.
Use for decontaminating bailer and water
level indicator between wells.
3-33
-------
TABLE 3-3 (Cont.)
MONITORING WELL SAMPLING EQUIPMENT CHECKLIST
Equipment
Use
Plastic pails, graduated
Thermometer
Portable pH meter
Portable specific
conductivity meter
Calibration solutions
for conductivity and
pH meters
Field logbook
Camera/film
Sample tags
Chain-of-custody records
Receipt for sample forms
Waterproof ink. pen
Veil sampling data sheets
Disposable gloves
Field filtering unit
(optional)
Decontamination supplies:
i.e., detergent, sponges,
bottle brushes, Acetone or
Methanol (reagent grade),
paper tovels
Water (organic-free or
deionized)
Use for measuring volume of vater purged
from veil prior to sampling. Also used
to contain potentially contaminated water
until it can be disposed of properly.
Use to measure temperature of ground
vater.
Use to measure pH of ground vater.
Use to measure specific conductivity of
ground vater.
Use to calibrate field instruments.
Used to record field observations.
Use to document sampling procedure.
Use to record veil information and field
measurements.
For personnel safety and to prevent
cross contamination vhile handling
equipment.
For filtration of samples.
Use to clean sampling equipment betveen
veils.
Use for rinsing equipment betveen veils
and for cleaning field instrument probes.
3-34
-------
Water Level Measurements
The field measurements should include depth to standing water and
total well depth. This information is required to calculate the volume
of standing water in the well and provide a check, on the integrity of
the well (e.g., identify siltation problems). The measurements should
be taken to the nearest 0.01 foot.
Electric Tape
a. The reference point (top of casing, top of security casing, pump
base) should be constant through all measurements and should be re-
corded. The elevation of this reference point must be known and
clearly marked at the well site;
b. A record of previous depth-to-water measurements of each well
should be checked to see if the current measurement is reasonable.
If not, then a second measurement should be made;
c. Always make the depth-to-water measurement immediately after open-
ing the well. This measurement must occur before the well has been
bailed or a sample taken;
d. Make sure the switch is in the "on" position;
e. Lower the probe into the well;
f. When the indicator light and/or buzzer goes on, slowly raise and
lower the tape until the precise depth where the signal initiates
is determined;
g. Mark the tape at the reference point, then measure the distance to
the nearest measured increment on the tape. Add or subtract ac-
cordingly to obtain the depth to water;
h. To measure total well depth, lower the tape slowly into the well
until a slight lessening of tension is observed. Raise and lower
the tape, determining the precise point at which the tension eases,
measure the depth as mentioned in step g. Special caution should
be exercised to prevent snagging when measuring depths of wells
with dedicated submersible pumps. Also, in deeper wells it may be
necessary to add additional weight to the probe in order to make
measurements possible.
i. The water level indicator should be at least wiped with a clean
paper towel and rinsed/washed with distilled water, hexane and
rinsed with distilled water after use. The time of the depth of
water reading, point of reference, and depth to water level should
be recorded in a water proof field notebook.
3-35
-------
Steel Tape
a. This technique is identical to the electric tape method except that
the bottom two feet of a weighted steel tape is chalked (powder)
and lowered until contact with ground water. Approximate water
depth should be known and the sound of an attached weight entering
water must be noted. Chalk must not be contaminated.
b. Once water is contacted, lower the tape a few inches and mark tape
at the reference point on the well head. Measure the distance from
the top of the wetted chalk to the reference point.
Determining Water Volume to be Purged
The goal of well purging is to remove stagnant water in the well,
and water in the disturbed formation/gravel pack surrounding the well
screen prior to collecting a representative ground water sample.
The EPA approved method, using a predetermined purge volume, is
described below. In addition, alternatives for sampling slow recharge
wells are provided.
Predetermined Purge Volume
A minimum of three casing volumes of standing water should be
removed from the casing prior to sampling. The amount of water removed
may be determined by collecting it in a graduated pail or drum, by the
use of an in-line flow volume meter, or by previous knowledge of the
pump capacity.
Using this method, the volume of standing water in the well must be
calculated, and may be obtained using the following formula:
v = r2h (0.163)
where: v = static volume of water in well in gallons,
r = inside radius of well casing in inches,
h = length of water column in feet, and
0.163 = a constant conversion factor that compensates for the
conversion of the casing radius from inches to feet, the
conversion of cubic feet to gallons, and pi.
A water column volume table for various casing diameters is pro-
vided for fast calculations in Table 3-4.
It should be noted that to be truly assured that the well has been
purged the stabilization of pH, conductivity and temperature will occur.
3-36
-------
TABLE 3-4
Volume of Water in Casing or Hole
Diameter
of Casing
or Hole
(In)
Gallons
per foot
of Depth
Cubic Feet
per Foot
of Depth
Liters
per Meter
of Depth
Cubic Meters
per Meter
of Depth
1
0.041
0.0055
0.509
0.509 x 10°
l'A
0.092
0.0123
1.142
1.142 x 10°
2
0.163
0.0218
1024
1024 x 10-»
2'A
0.255
0.0341
3.167
3.167 x 10*J
3
0.367
0.0491
4.558
4.558 x 10-J
3%
0.500
0.0668
6.209
6.209 x 10°
4
0.653
0.0873
8.110
8.110 x
4%
0.826
0.1104
10.26
10.26 x 10°
5
1.020
0.1364
1167
1167 x 10°
5%
1.234
0.1650
15.33
15.33 x 10-'
6
1.469
0.1963
18.24
18.24 x 10°
7
1000
0.2673
24.84
24.84 x 10°
8
1611
0.3491
3143
3143 x 10°
9
3.305
0.4418
41.04
41.04 x 10-1
10
4.080
0.5454
50.67
50.67 x 10-'
11
4.937
0.6600
61.31
61.31 x 10-1
12
5.875
0.7854
72.96
72.96 x 10-1
14
8.000
1.069
99.35
99.35 x 10"J
16
10.44
1.396
129.65
129.65 x 10-J
18
13.22
1.767
164.18
164.18 x 10°
20
16.32
2.182
20168
202.68 x 10-J
22
19.75
2.640
245.28
245:23 x 10°
24
23.50
3.142
291.85
291.85 x i0°
26
27.58
3.687
342.52
342.52 x 10-J
28
32.00
4.276
397.41
397.41 x 10-3
30
36.72
4.909
456.02
456.02 x I0-J
32
41.73
5.585
518.87
518.87 x 10°
34
47.16
6.305
585.68
585.68 x 1 Or1
36
52.88
7.069
656.72
656.12 x 10"J
I Gallon =» 3.785 Liters
I Meter - 3.281 Feet
I Gallon Water Weighs 8.33 lbs. = 3.785 Kilograms
1 Liter Water Weighs 1 Kilogram = 2.205 lbs.
1 Gallon per foot of depth = 12.419 liters per foot of depth
1 Gallon per meter of depth = 12.419 x 10° cubic meters per meter of depth
3-37
-------
FIGURE 3-9
STANDARD BAILER
STANOAflO
BAILEH
OF TER.ON*
STANOAAO
SAILER
OFPVC
9OTTOM
EMPTYING
OEVICH
3-33
-------
Slow Recharge Wells
Where slow-recharging wells are encountered, the three casing
volume minimum requirement may be waived. There are currently several
different approaches to purging and sampling wells that recharge slowly,
including:
Evacuating the well to dryness and allowing it to recover enough
such that a full sample volume can be withdrawn from the well.
Allowing the well to recharge after complete evacuation while
taking several small incremental samples during recharge.
Purging Methods
The method used to purge a well is dependent upon the size (inside
diameter) of the well to be sampled, depth to water, volume of water in
the well, and well accessibility. The types of equipment available for
well evacuation include hand-operated or motor-driven suction pumps,
peristaltic pumps, compressed gas (air lift) pumps, submersible pumps,
and bailers made of various materials, such as stainless steel, Teflon,
and PVC.
Some pumps cause volatilization and produce high pressure
differentials, which result in variability in the analysis of pH,
specific conductance, metals, and volatile organic compounds. They are,
however, acceptable for purging wells if sufficient time is allowed to
let the water stabilize prior to sampling.
When purging equipment must be reused, it should be decontaminated,
following the same procedures required for the sampling equipment.
Clean gloves must be worn by the sampling personnel. Measures should be
taken to prevent surface soils from coming in contact with the purging
equipment and lines, which could introduce contaminants to the well.
Purged water should be collected and screened with photoionization or
organic vapor analyzers, pH, temperature, and conductivity meters. If
these parameters and facility background data suggest that the water is
hazardous, it should be drummed and disposed of properly following
analysis of the collected sample.
Table 3-5 lists some of the pros and cons of the various well evac-
uation methods widely available for use.
Purging Rates
The rate at which wells are purged of stagnant water should be kept
to a minimum. Purging rates should be maintained below the rates at
which well development was performed. High purging rates can also cause
additional development to occur with resulting increased turbidity of
water samples. Well hydraulic performance information is therefore
helpful in determining optimum purging rates.
3-39
-------
TABLE 3-5
EVALUATION OF WELL EVACUATION METHODS
Well Evacuation Method
Best Used When:
Peristaltic pump
(Figure 3-5)
Water table is within suction lift. Used
on wells that require less than approxi-
mately four gallons of water removal for
adequate evacuation. Good for slow
recovery wells. Should not be used for
the collection of samples for volatile
organic analysis.
Centrifugal pump
Water table is within suction lift,
on wells that have moderate to high
recovery rates. Cannot be used for
sampling.
Used
Bailer (Teflon or
stainless steel)
Recovery is slow and on wells where
access is difficult.
Electric submersible
pump
Pump is permanently installed or in deep,
large diameter wells where use of low
yield pumps is not practical.
Bladder-type (e.g.,
Geotech, Well Wizard)
Water table is below suction lift. Used
when water table recovery rates are
moderate to high. Pump must be
completely submerged.
3-40
-------
If using an electric pump or other pump with a constant flow rate,
the total purge time can be calculated using the following equation:
_ in n- [Volume of Stagnant Water in Well Casing (gal)] x
Total Purge Time [Desired Number of Volumes]
(mm) = |
Pumping Rate (gallons/minute)
Decontamination of Purging Equipment
Sampling personnel should assume that sampling equipment, either
new or used, is contaminated and, therefore, should be decontaminated
according to the procedures appropriate for its construction and
intended use. The decontamination of equipment should be performed at
the laboratory of the sampling team. Field decontamination of sampling
equipment should be performed only under extenuating circumstances such
as logistical considerations and shortage of dedicated sampling
equipment. When field decontamination cannot be avoided, the following
general rules should be adhered to:
1) No equipment should be decontaminated in the field more than
once between laboratory decontamination.
2) Equipment used to collect hazardous waste samples must be
decontaminated before it can be used to collect environmental
samples. In general, any decontaminated equipment should only
be used to collect samples of "lower quality" than the first
sample collected.
3) All decontamination and subsequent use of decontaminated
equipment should be documented in a field logbook.
4) Equipment should never be reused if visual signs, such as
discoloration, indicate that decontamination was insufficient.
Refer to Section 3.3.2 Decontamination of Sampling Equipment, for
specific decontamination procedures.
Collection/Disposal of Purged Water
Purged water may need to be containerized (drummed) and should not
be discharged directly on the ground in the immediate well vicinity.
However, based upon the site background review, the location of the well
in relation to the site, and screening of the purged water with a HNu,
OVA, or specific conductance meter, the water may not need special hand-
ling. The disposal of purged water will be developed as part of the
site specific sampling plan.
Sample Collection
Ground water sample collection should take place immediately fol-
lowing well purging. At times, the same device can be used for sample
3-41
-------
collection as was used for well purging. However, water samples should
not be collected with the centrifugal pump because of unacceptable aera-
tion. If a well was evacuated with a centrifugal pump,.it can be
sampled with a bailer or peristaltic pump. Wells evacuated with a peri-
staltic or bladder pump or with a bailer can and probably should be
sampled using the same method (except for volatile organics) to save
time and avoid the additional chance of possible contamination by intro-
ducing more equipment into the well. Limit the liquid flow rate when
sampling for volatiles to less than 100 ml/min to reduce the chances of
loosing product.
Sampling equipment should be constructed of material compatible
with the well construction and analytical objectives. Equipment with
neoprene fittings, PVC bailers, tygon tubing, silicon rubber bladders,
neoprene impellers, polyethylene, and viton may not be acceptable. An
inert cable-chain (e.g., fluorocarbon resin-coated wire, monofilament,
single strand stainless steel wire) should be used to raise and lower
the bailer. If nylon cord is used, it should be discarded between each
well.
Most samples are obtained with a stainless steel or Teflon bailer.
When one is ready to collect a ground water sample, a new cable should
be securely attached to a cleaned bailer. The other end of the rope
should be fastened to the well casing or protective pipe. The cable
should be of more than sufficient length to allow for water level
drawdown while sampling. To acclimate the bailer to the well water, the
initial three (3) bails should be properly disposed of. When transfer-
ring the sample water from the bailer to the appropriate sample con-
tainers, care should be taken to avoid agitation which promotes the loss
of volatile constituents by aeration of the sample and outgassing of
volatile chemical constituents. Bottom-draw bailer designs with check
valves and syringe samplers minimize these sources of bias.
The time of sample collection, as well as the field test results
for temperature, pH, and conductivity should be recorded in the field
log book or on the Well Sampling Data Sheet.
Sample fractions should be collected in the following order: 1)
volatiles; 2) fractions that require field filtration; 3) large volume
samples (e.g., extractable organics, total metals, or nutrient anions).
After the well has been sampled, the bailer should be cleaned by
washing with water, rinsing with acetone and methanol, and rinsing with
distilled water. The cable and plastic sheet should be properly dis-
carded as provided in the site safety plan and new materials provided
for the next well.
In summary, follow the below guidelines when sampling a well:
Positive gas displacement bladder pumps should be operated in a
continuous manner so that they do not produce pulsating samples
that are aerated in the return tube or upon discharge.
Check valves should be designed and inspected to assure that
3-42
-------
fouling problems do not reduce delivery capabilities or result
in aeration of the sample.
Sampling equipment (e.g., especially bailers) should never be
dropped into the well, because this will cause degassing of the
water upon impact.
The contents should be transferred to a sample container in a
way that will minimize agitation and aeration.
Clean sampling equipment should not be place directly on the
ground or other contaminated surfaces prior to insertion into
the well.
Collection of Light Immiscibles (Floaters)
The approach to collecting floaters is dependent on the depth to
the surface of the floating layer and the thickness of that layer. The
floater must be collected prior to any purging activities. If the
thickness of the floater is 2 feet or greater, a bottom valve bailer is
the equipment of choice. When the thickness of the floating layer is
less than 2 feet, but the depth to the surface of the floating layer is
less than 15 feet, a peristaltic pump can be used to "vacuum" a sample.
When the thickness of the floating layer is less than 2 feet and the
depth to the surface of the floating layer is beyond the effective
"reach" of a pump (greater than 25 feet), a bailer must be modified to
allow filling only from the top.
Collection of Heavy Immiscibles (Sinkers)
The best method for collecting sinkers is to use a double check
valve bailer. The sinkers must be collected prior to any purging
activities.
Filtration Methods
Sample fractions intended for dissolved metals analyses are typi-
cally filtered in the field using a 0.45-micron_membrane filter.
In-line filtering at the well head is the most convenient method,
but requires that the well be pumped and equipped with a sample
collection spigot sized to fit tubing that will accommodate a filter.
In this method, the sample passes from the well through a short length
of tubing, preferably tygon, through the filter, and into the Sample
container.
A second method is to collect the sample into a container, then
transfer it to a second container using a filter barrel or a peristaltic
pump with the filter located between the first container and the pump.
3.2.5.2 Domestic Well Sample Collection Methods
There are two goals associated with sampling domestic wells: ob-
taining water that is representative of aquifer conditions and obtaining
3-43
-------
water representative of drinking water. The construction of most domes-
tic wells is significantly different from that of a typical monitoring
well. As such, special considerations must be addressed when sampling
domestic wells. Informational needs specific to domestic wells, and
usually obtainable from the well owner, include the following:
Location of well on property;
Presence of water treatment system and/or pressure tank;
Presence of a sampling port prior to treatment system or pres-
sure tank; and
Well construction information unavailable from well logs (well
depth, diameter, screened zone, casing material, static water
level, type of pump in well, pumping characteristics, etc).
Domestic wells normally include a sanitary seal to protect from the
introduction of foreign materials down the casing. A metal plate covers
the well with a port for water discharge and a port for venting. The
vent port is usually between 1/2 to 3/4 inches in diameter and protected
by a screw-on cap. Depending on the age and maintenance of the well
head, this cap may be rusted in place. Other than lifting the sanitary
seal (with attached piping), the vent port is normally the only access
to ground water.
Calculation of Stagnant Water Volume
Because domestic wells are typically sealed, access for water level
measurements may not be possible. A field decision must be made con-
cerning the removal of the vent port cap, which may be rusted in place,
or lifting the sanitary seal to insert the measuring tape. Destruction
of private property should always be avoided. Although functional harm
cannot be done by breaking the vent port cap, lifting of the seal with
attached piping (and submersible pump if included) can cause great harm.
If access to ground water is not possible, the stagnant water volume
must be calculated using information from the driller's log. If well
access is available, care must be taken not to get the water probe
tangled in the piping and/ar pump system. Measurements for static water
level and total depth are collected in the same manner described .for
monitoring wells.
Well Purging
Domestic well piping systems normally exit the ground and enter a
pressure tank (30 - 100 gallons) and an optional treatment system (for
excess hardness, iron, etc.). Sampling ports (spigots) may be located
at any point in the system. Well purging time will depend on whether
the spigot is located before or after the pressure tank. If located at
the well head, the recommended three (3) static volumes should be purged
(with owner's consent) or until temperature, pH and conductivity have
stabilized as recommended in Section 3.2.5.1. Traditionally, domestic
wells have been sampled after running the tap for 15 to 20 minutes, re-
gardless of stored volumes. If located after the holding tank, the tank.
3-44
-------
volume must be added to the static volume so that in-line water can be
removed. Flow rates from domestic veils vary widely so purge times must
be calculated at each location.
Care should be exercised not to stress well systems by purging
large amounts of water. During home use, pump systems typically run for
short periods of time (a few minutes) to maintain pressure in the hold-
ing tank. By forcing the pump to work, longer periods, damage can be
caused to older systems. Domestic wells are completed many times in
shallow and relatively unproductive aquifers. Long pumping periods may
result in excessive drawdown and the eventual sucking of air. Age of
the pump should be ascertained prior to purging so that when combined
with general water chemistry information, condition of the system can be
assessed. Particularly harsh water chemistry may result in premature
aging of the pump. Generally, pumps less than five (5) years old should
be able to handle any purging scenario. Always consult the owner for
permission to run the tap for extended periods of time.
If purging well water from a spigot located prior to the holding
tank, water should first be run from a spigot further down the line to
start the pump running. After the pump begins to run, open the well-
head spigot. Without maintaining pressure on the pump, a faulty foot
valve may empty all water in the piping system to the bottom of the
well, requiring the system to be re-primed.
If a ground water temperature has been established while sampling
other wells in the area, an abnormally high or low temperature reading
is an indication that the measured water may have been held in a pres-
sure/storage tank, and is not fresh from the aquifer. If continued
purging fails to show an adjustment in temperature to that similar of
other nearby wells, make a note in your log book or at the bottom of the
Ground Water Measurement Data Sheet (Figure 3-8).
Listening for when the pump turns on is additional confirmation
that the well is indeed being purged and that you are not simply drain-
ing the pressure tank or storage tank. On some wells it may be possible
to turn the pump on with a switch at the well head. However, this is
not recommended because of possible well damage.
Sample Collection
Water samples collected from domestic wells should be obtained from
outlets as close as "possible to the pump. Samples should not be col-
lected from leaky or faulty spigots or spigots that contain screens or
aeration devices. In addition, all samples should be collected prior to
any filter, water softening devices. If this is not possible, the pre-
sence of a treatment device should be noted in the logbook. A steady-
flowing water stream at moderate pressure is desirable in order to pre-
vent splashing and dislodging particles in the faucet or water line.
The samples should be collected directly into the appropriate
sample containers, with minimum agitation and contact" with air.
3-45
-------
Filtration Methods
Typically, water from domestic wells is not filtered so that analy-
sis reflects the quality of water consumed by the public. If filtering
is deemed appropriate, see Section 3.2.5.1.
3.2.6 Air Sample Collection Methods
3.2.6.1 Continuous Monitoring
Continuous monitoring does not require the collection of a sample
for laboratory analysis. An air monitoring instrument specific to the
contaminant(s) being measured is carried on or set up near a site and an
airstream is passed through the instrument, analyzed, and recorded in-
stantaneously or on a continual basis. This method is usually limited
to, but not restricted to, instruments with low accuracy (i.e., HNu,
OVA), and is used primarily as a screening technique prior to a full-
scale field investigation.
3.2.6.2 Grab Samples
Grab sampling involves the filling of syringes, Tedlar bags, or
stainless steel canisters within a matter of seconds, then sending the
sample off to be analyzed by the laboratory. This method characterizes
specific concentrations at a particular time and space.
3.2.6.3 Integrated Samples
Integrated sampling is generally the most useful way of character-
izing air contaminants at a site. Samples are collected over long
periods of time (generally one to twelve hours) by trapping air in con-
tainers or passing air through filters or chemical adsorbants that trap
contaminants. The canisters or filters are then sent to the lab for
analysis.
3.2.6.4 Sampling Equipment
Meteorological Station
Before any gathering of samples can be performed, a meteorological
station must be set up near the site to characterize the main meteoro-
logical parameters. The station should have the capabilities to measure
wind speed and direction, temperature, barometric pressure, and humid-
ity. It is also important that the station used is light and mobile
enough to allow quick and easy set-up, yet sturdy enough to withstand
the elements. Placement of the station depends on the topography of the
surrounding area (including spacing and size of buildings, paved areas,
etc.). Care should be used to set up the station in an area most repre-
sentative of the site. Additionally, a three-meter tower should be used
to avoid readings only representative of the immediate microclimate.
Meteorological data should be collected continuously throughout the
sampling project. This information is extremely important since many
f 3-46
-------
times background samples are determined by wind direction at the time of
sample collection. Also, day-to-day changes in sample concentrations at
the same site can usually be linked to corresponding changes in meteoro-
logical conditions.
Solid Adsorbent Collection
Solid adsorbents are a media commonly employed for sampling gas
phase organics. The adsorbents include materials such as Tenax GC and
XAD-2, vith Tenax being the most commonly used. One advantage of the
adsorbent collection technique is the absence of "active sites" that can
lead to irreversible adsorption of certain polar compounds. A limiting
factor vith these materials is their inability to capture highly vola-
tile materials (e.g., vinyl chloride) as well as many polar materials
(e.g., methanol, acetone).
Figure 3-10 shows typical Tenax cartridges used in the field. Air
is drawn through the cartridge for a'specified length of time (usually
about four hours) concentrating compounds on the Tenax material. If
possible, a backup cartridge should be used. A schematic of the Tenax
sampling train is shown in Figure 3-11. When the sampling time has
ended, the ends of the cartridge are capped and the cartridge is packed
and shipped to the laboratory for analysis via thermal desorption.
Solid adsorbents (silica gel and florisil) can also be used to trap
inorganics in much the same manner. Activated Carbon or Molecular
Sieves are also used on a limited basis.
Whole Air Collection
Sampling by whole air collection is simply the filling of evacuated
glass bulbs, stainless steel canisters, or plastic bags over a desired
length of time and analyzing the air directly by gas chromatography.
This method is excellent for nearly all volatile organic compounds.
Plastic containers made from materials such as Teflon or Tedlar are
usually used when analysis will be carried out soon after sample acqui-
sition, since the rate of leakage and/or permeation in and out of the
bags is relatively high. Adsorption or decomposition of compounds
through interaction with the container walls can also be a problem.
One of the best containers available for whole air sampling is the
electropolished 6-liter stainless steel canister. Unlike the delicate
non-rigid bags mentioned above, these rigid canisters are capable of
being pressurized up to 20 or 30 psi, and can be stored for days or
weeks at a time with limited or no effect on the compounds inside (5).
These canisters provide the added bonus of allowing round-robin analyses
of each sample because of the large volume of air captured.
Containers used for whole air collection must be fully evacuated to
0.0 atmospheres after each sample is collected, and flushed with pure
nitrogen if high concentrations of contaminants are found in the sample.
As with other sampling methods, blanks should always be sent to the
laboratory for analysis.
3-47
-------
FIGURE 3-10
TEKAX CARTRIDGE DESIGNS
tmu
lalOIaaa Garvidqa
0.5" To 9.123
Rtaucinq Union
Slasa Wool Pluqs
IO.S em Lonqi
) M*(ai Cartrtdqa
3-48
-------
FIGURE 3-11
TENAX SAMPLING TRAIN
a
6
3
X
e
a
£
s
l
JL
N
Ji
Y
o
a
3-49
-------
Polyurethane Foam (PUF)
Polyurethane foam (PUF) has been shown to be an excellent collec-
tion medium for trapping a variety of semi-volatile organic compounds.
Foam plugs are cut from the type of PUF used for furniture upholstery,
pillows, and mattresses, then treated with high grade hexane (pesticide
quality or equivalent) prior to being fitted into specialized sampling
cartridges (Figure 3-12). A known volume of air is drawn through the
collection media to trap the airborne organics.
Cylindrical polyurethane foam plugs (polyether type, 0.021 gm/cm3)
are cut from 3-inch stock using a 25-mm circular template. The soxhlet
extracted plugs are then placed (under slight compression) in 22-mm
(inside diameter) by 10-cm long hexane rinsed glass tubes. The glass
tubes are constructed from 22-mm (inside diameter) stock that has been
tapered at one end to facilitate attachment to the sampling pump. A
Teflon reducing adapter can also be fabricated that permits attachment
to the sampling pump with no modification to the glass tube.
Any high volume sampling pump capable of maintaining a constant
flow rate of 3- to 4-liter/minute can be used. Samples are collected at
this nominal flow rate for between eight to twelve hours, allowing a
total sample volume of between one to four cubic meters (m ).
Polyurethane foam has been shown to be excellent for trapping many
semi-volatile compounds including polychlorinated biphenyls and naphtha-
lenes, most pesticides, chlorinated benzenes, and polynuclear aromatic
hydrocarbons. Table 3-6 lists most compounds the PUF procedure can be
used for.
High Volume Sampling
In order to check for total suspended particulates (TSP) in the
air, high volume sampling (HIVOL) is needed. Both total particulate
loading and qualitative analysis of the particulates can be calculated
using this technique.
Ambient air is drawn into a covered housing and through a filter by
means of a high volume blower at flow rates between' 1.13 to 1.70-m3/min
(40 to 60 ft3/min) (Figure 3-12). Particles within the size range of
100 to 0.1-mm diameter are collected on the filter, although sampler
flow rate and geometry tends to favor particles less than 60-mm
aerodynamic diameter. The mass concentration of suspended particulate
is computed by measuring the mass of collected particulates (gravimetric
analysis) and the volume of air sampled.
After sample collection, pre-tared filters are analyzed gravi-
metrically to determine the total particulate loading. Trace metal
analyses may be accomplished by extracting all or part of the filter and
analyzing the extract accordingly (i.e., atomic absorption, ICP). It
should be noted that when trace metal analysis is desired, it is ex-
tremely important to submit blank, filters from each lot to the labora-
tory to determine back ground concentrations.
3-50
-------
TABLE 3-6
ORGANICS COLLECTED IN AMBIENT AIR USING PUF PROCEDURES
Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs)
Aroclor 1016
Aroclor 1221
Aroclor 1232
Aroclor 1242
Aroclor 1248
Aroclor 1254
Aroclor 1260
Chlorinated Pesticides
Chlordane (cis, trans)
Heptachlor
DDE
Dieldrin
p,p'-DDE
p,p'-DDT
o, p'-DDT
a-BHD
r-BHC (Lindane)
Hexachlorobenzene
Toxaphene
Endrin
Endosulfan I
Aldrin
Mirex
Organophosphorous Pesticides
Diazinon
Methyl Parathion
Malathion
Parathion
Ethyl Parathion
Dichlorvos
Ronnel
Chlorpyrifos
Herbicides
2,4-D esters
Isopropyl
Butyl
Isobutyl
Isooctyl
2,4,5-T N-butyl ester
Bromoxynil
Triallate
Trifluralin
Polynuclear Aromatic Hydrocarbons
(PAHs)
Phenanthrene
Anthracene
Fluoranthene
Pyrene
Benz(e)acenaphthylene
Polychlorinated Naphthalenes
Halovax 1001
Halovax 1013
Chlorinated Benzenes
1,2,3-Trichlorobenzene
1,2,3,4-Tetrachlorobenzene
Pentachlorobenzene
1.3.5-Trichlorobenzene
Pentachloronitrobenzene
Chlorinated Phenols
2,4-Dichlorophenol
2.4.6-Trichlorophenol
Pentachlorophenol
2,4,5-Trichlorophenol
3-51
-------
FIGURE 3-12
PUF SAMPLING TRAIN and
-HIGH-VOLUME AIR SAMPLER
Aaaamolad Samolar And Shaltar
High-Votuma Air Samoiar
Polyurainana Foam (PUF) Samellng Train
3-52
-------
3.2.7 Petroleum Product Sample Collection Methods
The collection of a petroleum/oil sample following a spill into
surface waters is treated separately from the collection of other
surface water samples due to the density and solubility characteristics
of oil. However, many of the same considerations discussed under the
section entitled "Surface Water Sample Collection Methods" are still
applicable. These general considerations, presented in the referenced
surface water section, are repeated here.
The solubility and density of the compound(s) of interest
determine the appropriate sample collection depth;
Factors such as safety and accessibility determine how far from
the bank one samples;
• Water samples are to contain only liquids (no sludges, etc.);
• A background sample is needed from upstream of the source in
question for all bodies of water (i.e., if a tributary adds to a
source stream both must have background);
Samples to be analyzed for volatile organics should have no head
space (or bubbles) in the sample jar, should be handled as
little as possible, and should be collected above areas of
turbulence (i.e., in streams);
Cyclical effects should be considered, such as time of discharge
from a facility, time of year and weather; and
Sampling should be performed moving from downstream to upstream
locations.
Coupling surface water sample locations with sediment sample
locations is beneficial as the likelihood for contamination of one media
by the other is high.
3.2.7.1 Oil Sampling Techniques
The thin layer of floating oil on water, frequently present only as
a "sheen", presents difficulties in the collection of adequate sample
volumes.
Manual Separation
Manual separation of the desired oil phase from the water phase is
accomplished using repeated decantation steps. Several methods may be
used in the decanting of the water phase.
Collection of the oil/vater sample in a sample jar followed by
an inversion of the jar with a partially screwed on cap
(allowing the water phase to trickle out).
3-53
-------
A separatory funnel.
• A pail fitted with a bottom tap.
A syphon.
Adsorbent Materials
The use of commercially available sorbent pads with a high affinity
for non-polar molecules (i.e., oil) can be used for the collection of an
oil sample from surface water. The recovery of the oil from the sorbent
material is accomplished using either mechanical or manual
wringing/compression of the sorbent. Consultation with manufacturer
will help determine which products/methods will work, for a particular
project.
3.2.7.2 Sampling Strategy
The choice of analyses to be performed on petroleum product samples
is necessarily guided by the objectives of the sampler or project
manager. Typically, the objective is to identify the probable source of
the spill. To identify the source of an oil release it is necessary to
obtain samples of the potential petroleum products at the point of
release (i.e., above grade tanks, underground tanks, pipeline, tanker
trucks, etc.) as veil as samples of the spilled petroleum product in the
surface water.
The analysis most typically employed to identify petroleum products
in spill incidents, arson incidents, or oil reservoir ownership disputes
is referred to as a GC fingerprint analysis. The results of these
analyses have been proven accurate and are recognized as legally
defensible data in court.
3.2.8 Soil Gas Sampling
Soil gas monitoring provides a quick means of waste site evaluation
for volatile organic contamination.
3.2.8.1 Method Summary
A 3/8" diameter hole is driven into the ground to a depth of four
to five feet using a commercially available "slam bar". Greater depths
can be sampled by the-use of a longer bar or bar attachments. A 1/4"
O.D. stainless steel probe is inserted into the hole. The hole is then
sealed at the top around the probe using modeling clay. The gas
contained in the interstitial spaces of the soil is sampled by pulling
the sample through the probe using an air sampling pump. The sample may
be stored in Tedlar bags, drawn through sorbent cartridges, or analyzed
directly using an HNu Model PI-101 Photoionizer. Other field air
monitoring devices, such as the combustible gas indicator and the
organic vapor analyzer can also be used dependent on specific site
conditions. Measurement of soil temperature using a temperature probe
may also be desirable. Bagged samples are usually analyzed in a field
3-54
-------
laboratory using a portable Photovac GC.
3.2.8.2 Equipment/Apparatus
A. Slam bar (1 per sample team).
B. Soil gas probes, stainless steel tubing, 1/4" O.D., 5 ft length
(3 per sample team).
C. Flexible wire or cable used for clearing the tubing during
insertion into the veil.
D. Connections, Teflon, to connect probe to HNu/sampler.
E. Modeling clay.
F. Plastic desiccator for drawing a vacuum around Tedlar bag for
sample collection (1 per sample team).
G. Gilian pump Model HFS113A adjusted to approximately 3.0 L/min (1
to 2 per sample team).
H. 1/4" Teflon tubing, 2 to 3 ft lengths, for replacement of
contaminated sample line.
I. Tedlar bags, 1.0 L, at least 1 bag per sample point.
J. Sample labels, data sheets, logbook, etc.
K. Field air monitoring devices.
L. Ice chests for equipment and protection of samples.
M. Metal detector or magnetometer for detecting underground
utilities/pipes/drums.
N. Photovac GC for field-lab analysis of bagged samples.
3.2.8.3 Procedures
1. Well Installation
Initially a hole slightly deeper than the desired depth is made
using a 5 ft single piston slam bar. For deeper depths, a
piston slam bar with threaded 4 ft long sections can be used.
Other techniques can be used as long as holes are of narrow
diameter and no contamination is introduced.
After the hole is made, the slam bar is carefully withdrawn to
prevent collapse of the walls of the hole. The soil gas probe
is then inserted. It is necessary to prevent plugging of the
probe, especially for deeper holes. A metal wire' or cable,
slightly longer than the probe, is placed in the probe prior to
inserting into the hole. The probe is inserted to full depth,
then pulled up three to six inches, then cleared by moving the
cable up and down. The cable is removed before sampling.
The top of the sample hole is sealed at the surface against
ambient air infiltration by using modeling clay and native soil
molded around the probe at the surface of the hole.
2. HNu Analysis
The veil volume must be evacuated prior to sampling. Connect
the Gilian pump, adjusted to 3.0 L/min, to the sample probe
using a section of Teflon tubing as a connector. The pump is
turned on, and a vacuum is pulled through the probe for
3-55
-------
approximately 15 seconds (longer for sample wells of greater
depths).
After evacuation, the HNu is connected to the probe using a
Teflon connector. When the HNu reading is stable, or peaks, the
reading is recorded and the HNu is disconnected.
3. Tedlar Bag Sampling
Evacuate the veil volume using the procedure explained above.
If HNu analysis was performed prior to taking a sample,
evacuation is not necessary.
Use desiccator and sampling train to take the sample. The
sampling train is designed to minimize the introduction of
contaminants and losses due to adsorption. All wetted parts are
either Teflon or stainless steel. The vacuum is drawn
indirectly to avoid contamination from sample pumps.
The Tedlar bag is placed inside the desiccator. The opened
valve is connected to the 1/4" Teflon tubing. The other end of
the Teflon tubing is connected, via sampling train, to the soil
gas probe using a Teflon connector. A vacuum is drawn around
the outside of the bag, using a Gilian pump connected to the
sampling train via Tygon tubing and a "T" connector, causing the
bag to inflate.
Break vacuum by removing the Tygon line from the pump. Remove
bagged sample from desiccator and close valve. Label bag and
record sample information.
CAUTION: Labels should not be pasted directly onto the bags,
nor should bags be labeled directly using a marker or pen. Inks
and adhesive may diffuse through the bag material contaminating
the sample. Place labels on the edge of the bags, or tie the
labels to the metal eyelets provided on the bags. Do not use
markers with inks containing volatile organics.
4. Tenax Tube Sampling
Additional apparatus: a) Syringe with a luer-lock tip capable
of drawing a soil gas or air sample from a Tedlar bag onto a
Tenax/CMS sorbent tube. Capacity is dependent upon the volume
of sample to be drawn onto the sorbent tube, b) Adapters for
fitting the sorbent tube between the Tedlar bag and the sampling
syringe, c) Two-stage glass sampling cartridge contained in a
flame-sealed tube (Refer to "Standard Operating Procedure for
Tenax/CMS Sorbent Tube Preparation" for preparation and storage
procedures), d) Nylon glove or lint-free cloth.
Handle sorbent tubes with care, using nylon gloves to avoid
contamination. Immediately before sampling, break one end of
the sealed tube and remove the Tenax cartridge. Connect the
valve on the Tedlar bag to the sorbent tube adapter. Connect
3-56
-------
the sorbent tube to the sorbent tube adapter with the Tenax
(white granular) side of the tube facing the Tedlar bag.
Connect the sampling syringe assembly to the CMS (black) side of
the sorbent tube. Fittings on the adapters should be finger
tight. Open the valve on the Tedlar bag. Open the on/off valve
of the sampling syringe. Draw a predetermined volume of sample
onto the sorbent tube.
After sampling, remove the tube from the sampling train with
gloves or a clean cloth. DO NOT LABEL OR VRITE ON THE TENAX/CMS
TUBE. Place the sorbent tube in a conditioned stainless steel
tube holder or culture tube. Culture tube caps should be sealed
with Teflon tape.
3.2.8.4 Interferences and Potential Problems
Concentrations in soil gas are affected by dissolution, adsorption,
and partitioning. Partitioning refers to the ratio of component found
in a saturated vapor above an aqueous solution to the amount in the '
solution. Contaminants can also be adsorbed onto inorganic soil
components or "dissolved" in organic components.
Soil "tightness" or amount of void space in the soil matrix will
affect the rate of recharging of gas into the soil gas well. Existence
of high, or perched, water table or of an impermeable underlying layer
(such as a clay lens or layer of buried slag) may interfere with
sampling of the soil gas.
A common problem with this method is soil probe clogging. A
clogged probe can be identified by the sound of the pump laboring, or by
using an in-line vacuum gauge. This problem can usually be eliminated
by using a wire cable to clear probe.
Prior to selecting sample locations, conduct an underground utility
search by contacting local utility companies. Each sample location
should also be screened with a metal detector or magnetometer to verify
that no underground pipes or drums exist.
3.2.8.5 Quality Assurance
Quality assurance should follow along the same lines as other types
of samples; ie blanks, both trip and decon, using ultra pure air, and
duplicates.
Holding times for Tedlar bags varies, depending on the sample type.
However, usually the holding time is 24 hours or less. The lab should
be consulted on this subject prior to sampling. All samples should be
preserved on ice.
3-57
-------
3.2.9 Sample Collection Methods For Special Waste Types
3.2.9.1 Leachate
At many hazardous waste sites the principle pathway of off-sitB
movement of hazardous material(s) is via leachate migration. Because
the leachate stream usually originates directly from buried wastes, it
is usually considered to be of high concentration, and therefore must be
handled appropriately. The following steps outline the procedure for
sampling leachates:
1. The ideal situation is to sample leachate streams under both
low and high flow conditions for an adequate data base.
2. The sample container is used as the sample obtaining device, as
leachate stream samples will be grab samples. Unless prior
arrangements have been made with the analytical laboratory, the
container of choice will be an 8-ounce wide-mouth glass jar,
with a 10% ullage (headspace) left.
3. If the leachate stream flow is low, a shovel may be used to dig
a small hole at the sampling point. The hole is allowed to
fill with leachate, and sufficient sample volume is then ob-
tained. The shovel should be decontaminated after use.
3.2.9.2 Drums/Closed Containers
Perhaps the most hazardous type of sampling procedure involves the
opening of containers to sample the contents. There are many different
types of containers containing literally thousands of possible hazardous
substances that may be found during a field sampling project. It is
important that as much information as possible be gathered before the
actual opening of any containers takes place.
Initial Hazard Assessment
Once the decision to open containers has been made, the team must
first evaluate the site to obtain at least the following information:
1. Number, type and condition of containers. Included is informa-
tion on bulging, exploded, burned, dented, rusted or otherwise
deteriorated containers; special containers such as laboratory
reagent bottles, compressed gas cylinders, tank, cars, vaults,
or drums of exotic construction or material; ponds, lagoons,
sludge pits, or other open containers; and evidence of buried
containers.
2. Site conditions adverse to safe and efficient container opening
operations. Included are areas of the site that cannot support
the weight of heavy machinery; the proximity of the surrounding
populace; the proximity of the site to highways, railroads, air
fields or other transportation routes that may have to be
closed; the proximity of other facilities that could be in-
3-58
-------
volved in, cause, or propagate a fire, explosion or toxic re-
lease on site; arrangement of containers (stacked, jumbled,
piled) that might interfere with operations; and location and
availability of areas off site that can be used for staging,
opening and storage of any containers that have to be moved.
3. Hazards associated vith the site. A thorough attempt must be
made to discover, by any means short of opening the containers,
exactly what they contain. Prior sampling data, air monitoring
data, manifests, drum labels (these cannot be completely
trusted), regulatory agency records, bills of lading, manu-
facturing records and the recollection of persons familiar with
site history should all be used. Of particular interest are
indications of the presence of substances that are radioactive,
explosive, classed as Poison A, violently reactive with air or
water, shock sensitive, highly flammable, percutaneous, or
highly toxic. These substances all require specialized tech-
niques and equipment.
Container Opening Devices
Several techniques can be used to open a closed container. Such
devices as a hammer and chisel, picks, axes, or firearms have been used
in the past; however, these devices are extremely dangerous. A remotely
controlled opening device is far more desirable even though it tends to
increase the team work load and the amount of equipment needed. Also,
it cannot be used on all containers or in all situations. Larger con-
tainers (tankers, tank cars, storage tanks) can usually be opened only
by hand.
Remotely Controlled Devices
EPA's National Enforcement Investigations Center (NEIC) has deve-
loped two remotely controlled drum opening devices shown in Figure 3-13.
The NEIC "penetrating sample device" uses a hydraulic system to force a
penetrator into the side of a drum. The penetrator also serves to seal
the resulting hole; a sample is withdrawn through the hollow stem of the
penetrator. The NEIC "bung remover" uses a compressed air tank, mount-
ing bracket, air impact wrench and non-sparking bung socket to spin the
bung from the top or side of.a drum.
Ecology and Environment, Inc. has devised two modifications of the
NEIC equipment. The E&E piercer hydraulically pierces drums from a top-
mounted position. The piercer is automatically withdrawn, and the re-
sulting hole is sealed after sampling. The E&E air drill uses a self-
feeding, automatically retracting, air-powered drill to cut through the
bung or top of a drum. The resulting hole is sealed after sampling.
Manual Method
The manual method involves use of a non-sparking brass bung opening
wrench to loosen the large or small bung plug on a drum. Drum bungs
come in various shapes and sizes so an assortment of openers must be
available to fit the bung. These sockets must be non-sparking as well.
3-59
-------
FIGURE 3-13
NEIC BUNG REMOVER and
PENETRATING SAMPLER DEVICE
Bung flamovar
3-60
-------
This method of opening drums can only be used if the drum is in
good condition. Any bulging or concave drums can not be opened using
this method. If the bung is rusted shut or corroded, this method can
not be used.
A second criteria for opening drums manually is that they be
labeled properly or that there is a reasonably good idea of drum
contents. Any material contained in a drum that has a low flash point,
high vapor pressure, highly reactive properties, high toxic rating, or
is explosive can not be opened using the manual method.
This method can not be used in confined spaces or in a tight area
where emergency escape would be difficult. If at all possible, the
drums should be opened early in the morning when the ambient air tem-
perature is low and solar radiation is not intense.
1. The smaller bung should be opened, if possible, in order to re-
duce the amount of spray released if liquid in the drum sprays
due to high vapor pressures. The smaller hole is also easier
to seal if the bung plug cannot be reinstalled.
2. A small disposable splash tarp should be placed over the drum
while the bung plug is being unscrewed. The tarp should be
heavy enough to knock down any spray and have a small hole in
the middle for the bung wrench arm to fit through. The tarp
should be at least 6x6 feet in order to cover the top of the
drum. This type of tarp can be reused or disposed of if it
becomes contaminated.
3. If possible, an extension should be used on the wrench arm in
order to keep the person removing the bung plug away from the
drum as it is being opened. Any sound of vapor escaping from
the bung opening should be considered a warning and the person
opening the drum should move away from the drum quickly. After
the pressure is released, then the team member can continue
opening the drum.
The manual method should only be used for small quantities of drums
to be sampled. If a remote opening device is available, then the manual
opening method should not be used.
Backhoe Piercing Method
The backhoe piercing method involves the use of a contracted back-
hoe (extend-a-hoe) and operator to pierce the top of the drum using a
point attached to the bucket. The extend-a-hoe should be able to extend
at least 20 feet away from the operator.
Most equipment rental companies will veld a 6 to 8 inch brass point
on the bottom of the bucket for no charge. This spear can then be
pushed or pressed down into the top of the drum creating a hole that can
be sampled using glass rods (thieves). The hole can then be repaired
3-61
-------
using plugs or molly bolts that are available commercially for this pur-
pose.
The backhoe must be equipped with a bulletproof type glass cab that
totally encloses the operator in case of an explosion or spray. The
backhoe operator must wear an air line respirator with a full-face piece
while he is punching the drums and be dressed in Level C protective
clothing as a minimum.
A combustible gas indicator with an alarm-type device must be set
up near the backhoe so that operator can shut the unit down if concen-
trations exceeding Z5X of the lower explosive limit are detected in the
immediate area.
Sampling Techniques for Steel Drums
The sampling method is determined by the type of container, access
to (opening of) the container, and the physical state of the material in
the container (solid, liquid, sludge). Access to the contents of the
drum will be provided by the remote opening method chosen, preferably
through the top of the drum.
Liquid Waste
One member of the sampling team carefully inserts a four foot
length of glass tubing (drum thief or rod) through the drum opening. If
possible, the tubing should be inserted at an angle to help obtain a re-
presentative sample. For most liquids a piece of tubing with an inside
diameter of 6 to 8 mm is adequate, but a larger bore may be required for
more viscous materials. The top end of- the tubing is then blocked with
a thumb or rubber stopper, and the tubing is raised from the drum to
transfer the contents to the sample container, which is held in a con-
venient place by the second sampling party member. Releasing the thumb
or cork allows the contents to empty into the container. The operation
is repeated until adequate volume is obtained.
Both members of the sampling party must try to avoid contact with
the material on the outside of the tubing. Disposable wooden "toaster
tongs" can be used to guide the contaminated part of the tubing to the
container. When sufficient volume is obtained, the tubing is broken and
discarded inside the drum.
Following are several important notes on sampling liquid wastes
from containers:
A 10X ullage (headspace) for expansion should be left in any
container used.
Sampling personnel must avoid allowing the material spilled on
gloves during the sampling process to come in contact with the
material from a subsequent drum. Potentially dangerous syner-
gistic reactions may occur, resulting in failure of the protec-
tive clothing. Where the presence of incompatible materials is
suspected, the sampler may put several disposable gloves over
3-62
-------
the hand (outside of the butyl rubber suit for Level A) which
comes in contact vith the material. The outer glove can be dis-
posed of after each sampling operation.
A rubber pipet bulb may be used on the sampling tube. Care must
be taken to prevent the material from contacting the bulb.
If the sampling party sees any evidence of a reaction (light,
smoke, etc.), they will immediately abandon all equipment and
evacuate the site.
If the glass tubing becomes clouded or smokey when it is in-
serted in the drum, it should be withdrawn and discarded since
this indicates the presence of caustics or hydrofluoric acid. A
length of rigid plastic tubing and a plastic sample container
should be substituted.
Sludge Waste
For sludges, a larger-bore glass tubing or a 40 ml VOA (volatile
organics analysis) vial fastened to a length of wooden dowel may be
used. The sampling apparatus may be discarded with other waste
accumulated during the sampling operation.
Solid Waste
Occasionally, a drum containing solid or granular waste may be en-
countered. This type of material is often contained in fiber-board
drums. A disposable scoop may be used for an open-top drum, while a
small ladle attached to a length of wooden dowel may be used to obtain
material through a bung hole.
Following are notes on sampling sludges and solids from containers:
It is possible that when a glass tube is inserted through a hole
in a drum a solid layer may be encountered below the liquid
layer. If the solid is hard, it could be a hardened sludge, or
it may be as exotic as an active metal, such as sodium. It
would be advisable to consider de-heading a drum of this type so
that a visual examination could be made. A suggested sampling
method would be' to carefully put pressure on a length of glass
tubing to obtain a small core for analysis. A stainless steel
micro spatula could be used to remove the material from the end
of the tubing. Care should be taken to keep the material from
contacting water. It should also be noted whether the material
discolors upon'contact with air.
The use of a sampling trier or slotted sampler is not recom-
mended for obtaining a granular solid sample, as the friction
and/or percussion associated with that action could cause an
explosion.
In the event that the use of glass tubing is not acceptable for
removing a liquid or semi-liquid from a drum, an alternative is
3-63
-------
the hand vacuum pump (Figure 3-14).
3.2.9.3 TCDD - Dioxin
TCOD is usually sampled as a contaminant in soil or sediment.
Because TCDD binds tightly to the soil, it is most often found in
near-surface soils, unless the contaminated material vas used as fill or
consists of transported sediments. Sampling for TCDD in soils is
similar to other types of soil sampling with the exception that a
thorough blending of the sample is of greater importance and that the
sampling equipment must be rigorously cleaned. Because the "action
levels" associated with TCDD contamination are very low, consider using
sampling equipment (stainless steel spoons, etc.) that has been cleaned
in a laboratory using CLP procedures and disposing of the equipment
after only one sample is taken. This greatly decreases the possibility
of cross contamination.
The quality control requirements listed below for dioxin' sampling
may be used:
Do not composite field samples.
Homogenize solid samples in the field using a mechanical blender
or send an undisturbed sample to the laboratory for
homogenization.
Keep samples away from light.
3.2.9.4 Volatile Organics in Soil
If a soil sample is to be analyzed for volatile organics, do not
composite field samples.
3.2.9.5 Wipe Sampling
Wipe sampling can be an integral part of the overall sampling
program. Wipe sampling can help to provide a picture of contaminants
that exist on the surface of drums, tanks, equipment, or buildings on a
hazardous waste site or that exist in the homes of a populace at risk.
Wipe sampling consists of jjubbing a moistened filter paper over a
measured area of 100 cm to 1 m . The paper is then sent to the
laboratory for analysis. The results are related back to the known area
of the sample. A proper sampling procedure is essential to ensure a
representative, uncontaminated sample.
Equipment Required
The following equipment is needed for wipe sampling:
Whatman 541 filter paper or equilivalent, 15 cm;
Disposable, chemical-protective gloves;
3-64
-------
• FIGURE 3-14
HAND VACUUM PUMP
3-65
-------
Solvent to wet filter paper.
Wipe Sampling Steps
The steps involved in obtaining a wipe sample are listed below:
Using a clean, impervious disposable glove, such as a
surgeon's glove, remove a filter paper from the box. Note
that although it is necessary to change the glove if it
touches the surface being wiped, a new glove should be used
for each sample to avoid cross contamination of samples. A
new glove should always be used when collecting a new sample.
Moisten the filter with a collection medium selected to
dissolve the contaminants of concern as specified in the
sampling plan. Typically, organics-free water of the solvent
used in the analysis is used. The filter should be wet but
not dripping.
2
Thoroughly wipe approximately £ m of the area with the
moistened filter. Using aim stencil will help in judging
the size of the wipe area. If a different size area is wiped,
record the change in the field logbook. If the surface is not
flat, be sure to wipe any crevices or depressions.
Without allowing the filter to contact any other surface, fold
it with the exposed side in, and then fold it over to form a
90-degree angle in the center of the filter.
Place the filter, (angle first) into a clean glass jar,
replace the top, seal the jar according to quality and submit
it with the other samples.
Prepare a blank, by moistening a filter with the collection
medium. Place the blank in a separate jar, and submit it with
the other samples.
Document the sample collection in the field logbook and on
appropriate forms, and ship the samples.
3.2.9.6 Waste Pile Sampling
Waste piles can range from small heaps to a large aggregates of
wastes. The wastes are predominantly solid and can be a mixture of
powders, granules, and chunks as large as or greater than 2.54 cm (1
in.) average diameter. A number of core samples have to be taken at
different angles and composited to obtain a sample that, on analysis,
will give average values for the hazardous components in the waste pile.
3.2.9.6.1 Sampling Methods
Waste piles are sampled in a similar manner as subsurface samples
are collected, utilizing the same type of sampling equipment.
3-66
-------
3.2.9.7 Above Ground Storage Tanks
Sampling a storage tank requires a great deal o£ manual dexterity.
Usually it requires climbing to the top of the tank through a narrow
vertical or spiral stairway while wearing protective sampling equipment
and carrying sampling paraphernalia. At least two persons must always
perform the sampling: One should collect the actual samples and the
other should stand back, usually at the head of the stairway, and
observe, ready to assist or call for help. The sample collectors must
be accompanied by a representative of the company, who must open the
sampling hole, usually on the tank roof.
3.2.9.7.1 Sample Collection Methods
In order to adequately sample a tank one must be sure to get a
representative sample. This is accomplished by obtaining an aliquot
from different elevations to ensure capturing some material from
the different phases, if any.
Coliwasa
This device is similar to the Kemmerer Sampler, utilized in the
collection of surface water, except the coliwasa extends the entire
depth of the tank.
Bacon Bomb
The Bacon Bomb is a device that is similar to a weighted jar that
is lowered into the tank to the desired level and opened. There are
usually two lines attached to the apparatus, one to lower and raise it,
and the other to open and close it.
Existing Valves
One must exercise caution when utilizing existing valves to sample
through simply because they can get stuck open and cause a release. To
sample using a valve one simply opens the valve a crack and collects the
sample in the sample container. However, if there are more than one
phase in the tank it probably won't be' collected.
3.2.9.8 Underground Storage Tanks
Sampling underground storage tanks can be very easy or risky
depending on the situation. A thorough record search should be done to
determine what materials have been stored within the tank and its exact
location. To determine the location, there are many geophysical methods
that are available: ground penetrating radar, metal dectectors, and
electro magnetic detectors, magnetometers to name a few each of these
devices should be used by an experienced operator.
Once the location of the tank has been determined the sampling may
be accomplished simply opening one of the ports on the tank, if they can
be loca-ced. If the access ports cannot be found then the tank must be
uncovered and an opening created. Extreme caution should be exercised
3-67
-------
when approaching an uncovered tank because of hazards associated vith
them:
An exposed tank can heat up from sunlight, the pressure inside
increase and the tank explode due to the gas mixture.
The tank may be corroded to the point where a person standing
on it may fall through.
Contaminants that have leaked out of the tank may have
saturated the ground and the removal of an impervious cover,
eg. concrete or asphalt, may liberate volatile material.
When the tank has been exposed and opening may have to be cut
through the surface to gain access to the material inside. Only safe
approved methods for cutting into the tank should be employed, such as a
nonsparking drill or saw depending on the material. DO NOT USE A TORCH!
The material vithin the tank can be collected employing the same
devices used when sampling an above ground tank.
3.2.10 HAZCLS Screening
The following procedures are used by TAT to provide a field
screening capability that will allow a qualitative determination of
chemical characteristics for virtually unknown wastes. Test results can
be used to help segregate wastes in-to Hazard Classification (HAZCLS).
Some of the tests will satisfy RCRA hazardous waste characteristic
definitions and some will help define DOT hazard classes for placarding.
These tests should not be viewed as an alternative to complete hazardous
waste characterization required by these two bodies of regulation.
HAZCLSing allows for a rapid assessment of materials at a site and the
evaluation of their potential hazards to the populace and environment.
Immediate mitigative measures, such as segregation or neutralization,
can also be selected. HAZCLS results allow for bench-scale
compatibility tests for eventual waste consolidation.
These tests should be performed in the numerical sequence as pre-
sented, unless otherwise specified in the HAZCLS procedure. The tests
should also be conducted in Level C personal protective gear including a
backmount canister respirator. The test bench should be established in
a covered, but well ventilated area. If uncovered, the work area should
be shaded.
A minimum of two field personnel are required to perform the 11
tests. Typically, the tests are split into two groups so that both
workers can screen samples at the same time. Test stations may be
established to facilitate efficient use of time when many samples must
be run. Table 3-7 lists required HAZCLS supplies and equipment. Table
3-8 combines tests that can be performed at segregated stations. Typi-
cally, tests are performed in series at a single table. Workers may sit
at chairs at the table. The table should be covered with plastic for
later disposal.
3-68
-------
TABLE 3-7
HAZCLS SUPPLIES AND EQUIPMENT
A. Equipment
1. Copper wire
2. Propane/butane torch and matches
3. Metal spoons
4. Small plastic bottles
5. Garbage bags
6. Test tubes and rack
7. 50 ml plastic graduated cylinder
8. Disposable pipettes
9. Plastic wash bottle
10. Thermometer
11. Felt tip pens
12. Absorbent material
13. Paper towels
14. HAZCLS Data Sheets
15. HAZCLS Procedure Sheet
B. Paper Test Strips
1. Potassium iodide
2. Lead acetate
3. pH
4. WATESMO
C. Reagents
1. Sodium Hydroxide (5%)
2. Acetone (reagent grade)
3. Hexane (reagent grade)
4. Hydrochloric acid (3N)
5. Deionized Vater
D. Instruments
1. Radiation meter
2. Organic Vapor Analyzer
3. SETA flash point tester
4. PCB test kit
5. Cyanide test kit
6. Dexsil (PCB): 50 ppm and 500 ppm
3-69
-------
TABLE 3-8
HAZARD CLASSIFICATION BENCH TEST FLOW CHART
Test
Action Level
Suspect
Parameter
Hazard Class
Station 1:
Visual Description
- phases
- color
- viscosity
Radiation
Organic Vapor
Acidity
Station 2:
Water Solubility
Water Reactivity
Oxidizer (all
water soluble
materials)
Sulfide (pH>7)
Station 3:
Cyanide (pH>7)
Station 4:
SETA Flash
Station 5:
Flame Test
Station 6:
PCB Test
>Background
(0.02 mRem/hr)
>100 ppm
>200 ppm
pH>7
pH<7
pH<4
pH>10
Float
Sink
Mix
>5°F Temp Change
(+) Potassium Iodide
Test Strip
(+) Lead Acetate
Test Strip
(-) Color Change
Rhodanine
Solution
<140°F
<100°F
Halogens
Cyanide/
Sulfide
Radioactive
Flammable
Strong Acid
Strong Base
Flammabili ty
Halogens, PCB,
Flammabili ty
Oxidizer
Halogens
(+) Green Flame
D-50 ppm Oil
50-500 ppm Oil
>500 ppm Oil
Halogens
Water Reactive
Oxidizer
Toxic (Sulfide)
Toxic (Cyanide)
Flammable
Flammable (DOT)
Toxic (Halogen)
On-Si te
Storage
Off-Site Toxic (PCB)
Disposal
Incineration Toxic (-PCB)
3-70
-------
Small glass test tubes (10 ml) are used to hold sample aliquots in
a rack on the table. Five samples are carried through the test pro-
cedure at any one time. Unused test tubes are stored in a bag on the
table and are continuously fed into the rack, as they are used up. Used
test tubes are thrown into a trash bag that lines a garbage can or is
taped to the back side of the vork table.
The OVA or HNu is set up at one end of the table and is used to
measure vapors as sample jars are opened, prior to removal of small
sample portions for testing. Samples are transferred to test tubes
using disposable pipettes (eye droppers) or spatulas. Portions of all
phases apparent in the sample jar must be transferred to individual test
tubes (each phase of each sample must be tested separately). Approxi-
mately 5 ml of liquid or 3 g of solid is required for testing.
A HAZCLS identification form is provided as Figure 3-15 and can be
filled out according to the procedures outlined below. Entries consist
of + and - for positive and negative results or designators listed at
the bottom of the form.
3.2.10.1 HAZCLS Procedures
1. SAMPLE DESCRIPTION - While still in the sample jar, describe
the physical nature of the sample. Include color, viscosity
(water as reference material), opacity or transparency, homo-
geneity, turbidity, phases, etc.
2. ORGANIC VAPORS - Using an HNu or OVA, crack the lid to the
sample jar open and measure the concentration of organic
vapors (ppm) in the headspace of the sample jar or container.
Transfer sample aliquot(s) to test tubes. Separate phases
into different tubes.
3. WATER DETECTION - Lay out the required number of WATESMO test
papers on the table and place a small portion of each sample
phase on a separate strip, using a spatula or eye dropper (if
windy, dip paper). Color change to dark blue indicates pre-
sence of water (methanol and some other water soluble solvents
may give false positive results).
4. CORROSIVITY - Lay out the required number of pH test papers on
the table and place a small portion of each sample phase on a
separate strip, using a spatula or eye dropper (if windy, dip
paper). For solids wet the paper with a few drops of water
and apply the moistened paper to the solid. Read the pH in-
dicated on the paper using the scale on the pH paper container
for reference.
If pH is greater than or equal to 7, check for cyanides and
sulfides (see steps 5 and 6).
If pH is less than 7 or if water soluble, check for the pre-
sence of oxidizers (see step 4). (NOTE: some exceptions
include sodium hypochlorite and halogens.)
3-71
-------
SITL ID
TDD
PAH
HAIABD CHAAACTCBHATIOH DATA SUE IT
LOC&TIOMi
I
hO
t£*apl •
Conk*Insr
Nu*bs r
Nu«b«i
of
Philat
Color
CNdty
WATCSMO
~ /-
ftsd
~/-
OVA
99*
pH
U«t«r
folub
H/f/S
Wstsr
Bet
4f*
Olid
s
~/-
CM
~/-
¦ IC
~/-
CI
~/-
ret
~/-
mtuD
CUJI
COLUMN ABB1CVIAT1QH3
Colors
BD r«d TM t«a
OR ocango BB brown
VL y•11 am BK bUck
CM |r««a Gf gesy
BU blus WT Mbit#
fH purplo CL di«r
Clsrlty
CL cl»»g
Of opsqu*
CD cloudy
Viscosity
NV aobviicoui |wat«(|
SV itilviicoui
VI viscous (ootor oil)
W v«cy viscous
rhusi
LQ liquid
CH null loo
SD Mdlt«Ot
SO solid
K psrticulsto
SL sludgs
P
in
co *rl
M
O
5
M
O
25
a
>
H
>
CO
ffl
Pi
M
H
P=)
W
Ul
-------
5. WATER SOLUBILITY AND REACTIVITY - Add 3 mis of room
temperature water to test tube, insert thermometer and note
temperature, then add 1 ml of sample. Note the generation of
heat in degrees F, bubbles, and/or vapors, indicating that the
sample is water reactive.
If 1 ml (1 g of solid) sample completely mixes with 3 ml water
and forms no precipitation or cloudy solution, the sample is
soluble and test result is listed as "MIX".
1. No density gradients indicate that the sample is pos-
sibly water.
2. If density gradients are present, check flash point
(see step 9).
If original quantity of material does not go into solution, or
becomes soluble only when the volume of water is doubled, the
sample is considered insoluble and listed as either "FLOAT" or
"SINK", depending on observed characteristics in water.
1. If the sample floats, test for an organic base and/or
organic acid, using same amounts of sample and water
as described above for water procedure.
Organic Base - react sample with three drops 3N
HCl. Solubility indicates organic base (indi-
cated as FLOAT-BASE in Water Solubility column).
Organic Acid - react sample with three drops 5%
NaOH. Solubility indicates organic acid (indi-
cated as FLOAT-ACID in Water Solubility column).
2. If sample sinks, test for halogenated hydrocarbons
and PCBs (see steps 10 and 11).
6. OXIDIZER - The presence of oxidizing material contained in the
sample is performed when sample water soluble.
1. Lay out the required number of KI-starch papers and
acidify with one to two drops of 3N HCl.
2. Apply a drop of liquid sample (or aqueous solid
sample) to paper.
3. If paper turns blue or black after one to two
minutes, sample is an oxidizer.
7. SULFIDE - The sulfide content of a sample is generally per-
formed only on samples with pH >7. The detection limit is
0.6 ppm of the sulfide ion.
1. Lay out the required number of lead acetate test
3-73
-------
papers and acidify with one to two drops of 3N HC1.
2. Apply a drop of liquid sample or touch to solid
sample.
3. If paper darkens after one to two minutes, sample
contains sulfides.
8. CYANIDES - the presence of cyanides in a sample is generally
performed only on samples with pH >7. Test kits are used that
test for the presence of cyanide at 0-30 ppm levels. Instruc-
tions are provided in individual kits.
9. FLAMMABILITY - Three measurement methods are used to determine
the flammability of the sample. These are:
- HNu-photoionizer or Foxboro OVA measurements
- BIC qualitative test
SETA Flash closed-cup measurements
The sample is considered to be flammable, according to both
RCRA and DOT regulations, if:
1. The SETA flash point is less than 100°F; or
2. The HNu reading (10.2 probe, 9.8 span) is greater
than 200 ppm and the BIC test (see below) is
positive, (+).
The sample is considered to be combustible, according to DOT
but flammable according to RCRA, if:
1. If SETA flash point is less than 140°F, but greater
than 100°F; or
2. The HNu reading is less than 200 ppm and the BIC test
is positive, (+).
The sample is nonflammable/noncombustable if it does not
ignite or burn after sustained exposure to the flame source.
The SETA flash point procedure is outlined in the kit.
For the BIC test procedure, use a butane or propane torch to
heat the end of a copper wire until glowing (fold wire end so
that extra sample can be supported). If sample ignites read-
ily and vigorously upon exposure to a flame source, the esti-
mated flash point is less than 100°F and a (+) is entered into
the appropriate box. If the sample does not ignite and sus-
tain flame, the estimated flash point is greater than 200°F
and a (-) is entered into the appropriate box.
3-74
-------
10. CHLORINATED HYDROCARBONS - The detection limit for this test
is approximately 0.5% chlorine concentration as perchlorethy-
lene. This test is performed on all samples that:
1. Are insoluble and have specific gravity greater than
1; or
2. Are slightly soluble and have HNu reading greater
than 200 ppm; or
3. Give any positive reading on a combustible gas indi-
cator.
NOTE: use gloves to avoid depositing chlorides from skin on
the copper wire that is used for this test. Some amines also
show positive interferences.
1. Heat copper wire in flame until flame is yellow, with
no trace of green.
2. Cool wire by waving in ambient air for 10-15 seconds.
3. Insert cool wire in sample.
4. Insert sample-coated wire into flame.
5. A green flame indicates that chlorinated hydrocarbons
are present.
11. PCBs - Field testing for PCBs is performed using either the
CLOR-N-OIL PCB Screening Kit, or the McGraw-Edison PCB test
kit. Very clean transformer oil is required so that false
positives are not encountered (tests indicate the presence of
chlorine that may be due to salt water or other natural pheno-
menon). Instructions for use are found in each kit.
3.2.10.2 HAZCLS Procedure Limitations
The HAZCLS procedure is used as a screening mechanism for segregat-
ing and combining unknown wastes. Although the outlined steps have
proven successful at a number of sites, many of the procedures have as-
sociated technical limitations that you should be aware of. The follow-
ing are listed according to appropriate test step:
2. ORGANIC VAPORS
HNu and OVA response factors vary widely depending upon
the compound. Readings can differ from true
concentrations by as much as a factor of = 50-100 times.
Both the HNu and OVA are affected by water vapor and will
give false readings if excessive (>80-85% relative
humidity) amounts are present.
3-75
-------
An OVA or HNu cannot be used to measure accurate
concentrations of sample jars and small containers. The
OVA has a 3 second response time (902) and requires
33 ml/sec (total volume - 100 ml). The HNu has a 10
second response time (90%) and requires 3 ml/sec (total
volume- 30 ml). For small containers serious dilution
of sample occurs.
4. C0RR0SIVITY
pH paper (and pH meter) results are valid only for water
solutions. Results are meaningless for organic liquids.
5. WATER-SOLUBILITY AND REACTIVITY
A temperature change is often due to heat of solution and
does not necessarily indicate a chemical reaction.
Most organic compounds do not exhibit complete
solubility. One ml of organic compound dissolving in
6 ml of water is an extremely soluble organic.
Solubility with HCl or NaOH is a test only for low
molecular weight organic compounds that are strong acids
or bases.
6. OXIDIZERS
Kl-starch paper works only for relatively strong
oxidizing agents in water. Results are invalid for
organic liquids.
7. SULFIDES
Lead acetate paper works only for water solutions.
9. FLAMMABILITY
Volatility does not necessarily correspond to
flammability (e.g., carbon tetrachloride, methylene
chloride).
10. CHLORINATED HYDROCARBONS
The HNu has very low sensitivity to most chlorinated
compounds.
Many chlorinated compounds are not combustible.
The copper flame test also gives a green Elame with
acidic compounds.
3-76
-------
11. PCBs
The test kits work only for low viscosity, light colored
oils (transformer oil, clean kerosene or diesel). They
do not work with heavy or dirty fuel oils. Test kits
have a very high rate of both false positives and false
negatives. Almost any chlorine or bromine containing
compound will give a false positive.
3.3 Equipment Decontamination
General personnel safety and decontamination procedures are ad-
dressed in site-specific Site Safety Plans (depends on level of pro-
tection) .
3.3.1 Decontamination of Heavy Equipment
Prior to mobilization on site (i.e., drill rig, backhoe, support
vehicles), heavy equipment must be cleaned thoroughly to remove all oil,
grease, mud, tar, oil-based preservatives, etc. The cleaning process
will consist of high-pressure/detergent/hot water (steam cleaner)
washing of the drilling equipment and a high pressure/hot water final
rinse. Special attention will be given to areas, such as the thread
sections of auger flights, drill rods, hoe buckets, and all down-hole
tools.
All drilling and associated equipment will be thoroughly decontami-
nated at the close of the project, prior to departure from the site, to
ensure that no contamination is transported from the site.
Petroleum-based lubricants, which are normally used to prevent
binding, should not be allowed during field activities.
Vehicles should be washed (if possible) at the conclusion of each
field trip. This routine maintenance should minimize any chance of
further contamination of equipment or samples. A thorough interior and
exterior cleaning is mandatory at the conclusion of investigations re-
sulting in known or suspected vehicle contamination.
3.3.2 Decontamination of Sampling Equipment
Where practical, disposable sampling equipment will be used. When
decontamination is required, equipment will be decontaminated prior to
and following its use in the contaminated area. The decontamination
procedure will include in sequence each of the following steps:
Initially rinse item with tap water (from orchard sprayer or
squirt-bottle) to remove gross contamination.
Clean item by washing with Alconox detergent and tap water. A
brush may be used to dislodge sediments. Personnel should be
aware of the materials they are handling and use special decon
3-77
-------
solutions for cleaning vhen warranted (see Table 3-9). No
solvents are to be used on equipment that is constructed of
butyl rubber and/or Neoprene components.
Rinse with tap water (using brush if necessary), and shake off
excess water.
• Triple rinse with an organic solvent. After final organic
solvent rinse, allow all solvent to evaporate completely before
continuing. Use hexane when the contaminant is dioxin; use
pesticide-grade acetone or ACS-grade methanol to remove organics
(see Table 3-10).
Rinse thoroughly with distilled water and then carbon-free
water. Shake off excess water.
Wrap the sampling equipment with aluminum foil or in clean
plastic bags once decontamination is completed to prevent acci-
dental contamination of the sampling equipment.
The organic solvent rinse can be omitted for equipment that does
not come into direct contact with sampled material or if there is no
possibility of on-site organic contamination. Generally, plastic
(Lucite R) filtering apparatus is not rinsed with acetone, unless it is
severely contaminated by oils or organic film. Acetone may degrade the
plastic.
All non-disposable equipment should be cleaned in the field before
being returned to the warehouse for storage. During severe winter con-
ditions,_ it may be necessary to repeat the final rinse step in warmer
warehouse conditions. The following procedures are used to clean equip-
ment prior to storage:
After using equipment, rinse with water in the field, and wipe
with paper towel;
Wash thoroughly with warm water and phosphate-free laboratory
detergent, using a bottle brush to remove particulate matter and
surface film;
Rinse thoroughly with warm tap water;
Rinse thoroughly with distilled water (at least 3 times);
Rinse thoroughly with acetone (pesticide-grade) or methanol,
allow to air dry. Rinse with distilled water at least 3 times;
and
Wrap with aluminum foil or in plastic bags.
All ice chest and reusable shipping containers are washed wich a
mild detergent (interior and exterior) and rinsed with tap water and
air-dried before storage.
3-78
-------
TABLE 3-9
GENERAL PURPOSE DECONTAMINATION SOLUTIONS
Decontamination solutions should be designed to react vith and
neutralize specific contaminants found at a hazardous waste
site. However, since the contaminants on a particular site
will be unknown in the majority of cases, it is necessary to
use a decontamination solution that is effective for a variety
of contaminants. Several of these general purpose
decontamination solutions (some ingredients are available at
hardware or swimming pool supply stores) are listed below:
Decon Solution A - A solution containing 5% sodium carbonate
(NajCO^) and 5% trisodium phosphate (Na^PO^).
Decon Solution B - A solution containing 10% calcium hypochlorite
(CaCl202).
Decon Solution C - A solution containing 5% trisodium phosphate
(Na^PO^). This solution can also be used as a general purpose
rinse.
Decon Solution D - A dilute solution
Sol.
Type of Hazard
1. Inorganic acids, metal
processing wastes
2. Heavy metals - mercury,
lead, cadmium, etc.
3. Pesticides, fungicides,
chlorinated phenols,
PCP's
4. Cyanides, ammonia and B
other non-acidic inorganic
wastes
of hydrochloric acid (HC1).
Directions for Preparation
To 10 gallons of water, add 4
pounds of sodium carbonate
(soda lime) and 4 pounds of
trisodium phosphate. Stir
until evenly mixed.
Same as #1 above.
To 10 gallons of water, add 8
pounds of calcium dioxins,
hypochlorite. Stir vith
wooden or plastic stirrer
until evenly mixed.
Same as #3 above.
5. Solvents and organic
compounds such as
trichloroethylene,
chloroform and toluene
C(or A)To 10 gallons of water
add 4 pounds of trisodium
phosphate. Stir until evenly
mixed.
6. PBB's and PCB's
C(or A)Same as #5 above.
3-79
-------
TABLE 3-9 (Cont.)
GENERAL PURPOSE DECONTAMINATION SOLUTIONS
Type of Hazard S
7. Oily, greasy unspecified C
wastes.
8. Inorganic bases, alkali D
and caustic waste
^ Directions for Preparation
Same as #5 above.
To 10 gallons of water, add
1/2 pint of concentrated
hydrochloric acid. Stir with
a wooden or plastic stirrer.
TABLE 3-10
RECOMMENDED SOLVENT SELECTION
Type of Hazard Solvent
1. PCB's, PCP, pesticides, phenols Methanol
2. oils, base neutrals, pesticides Methylene chloride
3. xylenes, PCB's, chlorinateds Hexane
A. phenols, PCB's Acetone
5. oils, fatty materials Carbon tetrachloride
6. metals Nitric acid
3-80
-------
3.3.3 Decontamination of Protective Clothing
Where possible, disposable personal protective equipment will be
used. When decontamination is required, the following procedure should
be used:
Initially rinse item vith tap water (from orchard sprayer or
squirt-bottle) to remove gross contamination.
Clean item by washing with Alconox detergent and tap water. A
brush may be used to dislodge sediments. Personnel should be
aware, of the materials they are handling and use special decon
solutions for cleaning when warranted (see Table 3-9). No
solvents are to be used on equipment that is constructed of
butyl rubber and/or Neoprene components.
Rinse with tap water (using brush if necessary), and shake off
excess water.
• Wash and rinse a second time if necessary.
Decontamination Problems And Solutions
Problem: Difficulty in cleaning equipment contaminated with heavy oily
or wax-like material.
Solution: If standard decontaminants fail to properly clean equipment,
try organic solvents such as acetone, benzene, hexane,
trichloroethene or kerosene. To make certain that all of the
solvent has been removed from the equipment after
decontamination is complete, monitor with OVA or HNu.
Problem: PDS becomes inadvertently contaminated during decontamination
operations.
Solution: Relocate PDS further upwind if possible; otherwise PDS
operators must remain masked.
Problem: Instruments (e.g. OVA, HNu, explosimeter, etc...) taken into
the waste site are getting contaminated.
Solution: Encapsulate instruments in plastic bags prior to entering the
HWS. If instrument must be grounded while dovnrange, place on
plastic drop.
Problem: Work party member dressed in Level B shows severe signs of
heat stress and is experiencing difficulty in breathing while
undergoing decontamination.
Solution: If you are faced with a potential-life threatening situation,
immediately take whatever action is necessary to alleviate the
problem, i.e. in this case, remove respirator and treat* for
heat stress even though decontamination may be incomplete.
3-81
-------
3.A References
1. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. A Compendium of
Superfund Field Operations Methods. Office of Emergency and
Remedial Response. EPA/540/P-87/001. December 1987.
2. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Characterization of
Hazardous Waste Sites - A Methods Manual: Volume II Available
Sampling Methods, Second Edition. Environmental Monitoring
Systems Laboratory. EPA-600/4-84-076. December 1984.
3. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Samplers and Sampling
Procedures for Hazardous Waste Streams. Municipal
Environmental Research Laboratory. EPA-600/2-80-018. January
1980.
4. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Preparation of Soil
Sampling Protocol: Techniques and Strategies. Environmental
Monitoring Systems Laboratory. EPA-600/4-83-020. August 1983.
5. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Protocol For
Ground-Water Evaluations. Hazardous Waste Ground Water Task
Force. September 1986.
6. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Practical Guide For
Ground-Water Sampling. Robert S. Kerr Environmental Research
Laboratory. EPA/600/2-85/104. September 1985.
7. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Control Of Oil And Other
Hazardous Material. Water Program Operations.
EPA-430/1-74-005. June 1974.
8. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Field Standard Operating
Procedures (FS0P)#7: Decontamination of Response Personnel.
Office of Emergency and Remedial Response.
9. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Standard Operating
Procedures: Soil Gas Sampling. Environmental Response Team.
SOP 2149. 9/30/88.
rev. 1/11/90
3-82
-------
SECTION 4 - FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL
4.1 QA/QC Sample Checklist
QA/QC Sample Type
Transport/Trip Blank
Transfer/Rinsate Blank
Duplicates/Replicates
Collocated
Field Spiked Samples
Background Samples
Split Samples
Lab Spiked Samples
Performance Evaluation
Samples
4.2 QA/QC Samples
There are a variety of sample types that are used to assess poten-
tial errors introduced during sample collection, storage, and analysis.
Typical quality assurance/quality control samples are discussed in the
following subsections.
4.2.1 Sample Blanks
Sample blanks are samples of deionized/distilled water or other
solvents (e.g., hexane for dioxin), rinsed collection devices or
containers, sampling media (e.g., sorbent), etc. that are handled in the
same manner as' the sample and subsequently analyzed to identify possible
sources of contamination during collection, preservation, handling, or
transport. The two primary types of sample blanks are explained below.
Transport/Trip Blanks
Transport, or trip, blanks must be included in each sampling pro-
ject to ensure quality assurance and quality control. One volatile
blank must be included with every VOA sample shipment. Contamination
due to handling, preservation, or laboratory procedures can be found,
and in many instances, quantitative corrections can be calculated. One
sample blank should be prepared for every different bottle type that is
filled. A transport blank is prepared by simply pouring carbon-free or
deionized water directly into the sample container prior to the trip
taking place. The container is then sealed and prepared for shipping.
Minimum Frequency
1 per shipping container (volatiles
only)
1 per 20 samples
5% of submitted samples (QA/QC purpose)
Rare
2 per site (recommended)
Site specific
Check with lab coordinator
1 per 20 samples (if available)
4-1
-------
Transfer/Rinsate Blanks
A transfer, or rinsate, blank determines vhether sampling devices
are contaminated. One rinsate blank should be collected for each type
of sample device used. To collect a transfer blank, follow normal
decontamination procedures, then pour organics-free, metals-free water,
or the desired rinsate blank solvent over the sampling device and
collect the runoff water in the sample container. The sample is then
sent to the laboratory to be analyzed with the other samples. For
instance, if a bailer is used, fill with organics-free or metals-free
water and let it stand for approximately the same length of time a
normal sample would be kept in the bailer. Transfer the water to a
sample container and prepare it for shipment.
4.2.2 Duplicates/Replicates
Duplicates are sequentially, collocated samples collected obtained
at the same time, in the same way, and contained, preserved, and
transported in the same manner. These samples are often used to assess
field/sampling variability. This variability tends to be relatively
high in soils and low in waters.
Replicates are samples that have been mixed (homogenized) as if
compositing and then separated into multiple sample containers for anal-
ysis. These samples are then contained, preserved, and transported in
the same manner. Replicates are used to verify the analytical repro-
ducibility of data (in addition to spiked samples). Field replicates
provide a "blind duplicate" for the laboratory when sample labeling does
not relate one replicate to the other. Laboratories perform their own
replicate analysis by subsampling a single container and refer to this
analysis as a "lab dup".
Duplicate/replicate sampling are not universally applicable to all
media or analytes of concern. Generally, water samples will not exhibit
variable chemical characteristics over the short time period required to
fill three (3) volumes required for replicate analysis. Replicate
samples for water do not require mixing prior to filling of containers,
unless variability is expected to exist. Soils may exhibit wide vari-
ability and a distinction between duplicates and replicates is impor-
tant. Due to the potential for loss of volatile contaminants during
homogenization for replicate samples, VOA soil replicates must be col-
lected as duplicates. It is important to note that replicate analysis
results depend on the complete mixing of sample in the field. The more
variable the distribution of contaminant, the more important a thorough
mixing job is required.
At least five (5) percent of submitted samples for each media are
required for replicate analysis in the Contract Laboratory Program
(CLP). Water samples require triple (3) volume (all with the same
sample I.D. number). Soil samples do not require any extra volume.
Duplicate analysis is not necessary unless a measure of field variabi-
lity is, important to site characterization on a local scale (if samples
are collected across entire contaminated areas, field variability is
defined by comparison of all samples). "Blind duplicates" are prepared
4-2
-------
by homogenizing samples in the field and submitting under different
sample I.D. numbers, so that the laboratory cannot connect their common
origin. This quality assurance measure is of dubious value since data
variability may be attributed to either the laboratory or inadequate
homogenization by the sampler. The best check on lab accountability is
through the matrix spike and matrix spike duplicate analysis performed
on designated samples (triple-volume waters and requested soils).
4.2.3 Spiked Samples
Spiked samples have a known amount of a substance of interest added
to them prior to analysis. This may occur during field activities
(rare) or in the lab (required). These samples are used to validate the
accuracy of the analytical technique. Field spikes may indicate sample
quality change during shipment to the laboratory.
The laboratory is required to perform analyses on a "matrix spike"
and "matrix spike duplciate". Specific samples may be designated by the
sampler for these analyses by filling out the "Chain-of-Custody" form
appropriately. Water samples require double the normal volume, soil
samples may require additional volume also (check with the designated
laboratory coordinator). If not designated by the sampler, the soil
analyses will be performed on samples chosen by the laboratory.
4.2.4 Background Samples
With any sampling program, sampling points beyond the limits of
site contamination (e.g., upwind ambient air samples or upstream surface
water samples) should be identified. Background sample data are useful
in determining whether or not a release of a hazardous substance has
occurred at a site. Background samples are collected to document
ambient concentration levels, which can then be compared to levels found
on site. This provides a means of assessing the true on-site concentra-
tion values. It is encouraged that two (2) background samples be
obtained to indicate field/sampling variability.
4.2.5 Split Samples
Split samples are replicate (soil)/duplicate (water) samples given
to the owner, operator, site representative or independent lab. If the
split (replicate/duplicate) sample is being taken for the operator, the
site representative must be contacted prior to sampling in order to
arrange for them being present at the time of sampling. Split sample
information is recorded in the space provided on the Chain-of-Custody
form.
4.2.6 Performance Evaluation Samples
Performance evaluation samples are data validation samples used to
measure the analytical capability of the laboratory performing the
analyses. Performance evaluation samples are prepared and certified by
the EPA Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory (EMSL/Las
Vegas).
4-3
-------
Currently, the following PE samples are available from EPA labs in
liquids, sludges, oils and fish: VOA's, BNA's, Metals, and
PCB/Pesticides. PE samples at varying concentrations can be obtained
from the Cincinnati Lab. 2,3,7,8- TCDD/Dioxin and some specific BNA's
in a soil matrix from the EMSL/LV. VOA's in air are available from the
Research Triangle Park. lab.
4.3 Field Activity Logbooks
This section establishes the minimum content requirements of log-
book. entries for all field activities conducted by EPA. This guidance
is provided to ensure that the documentation for any EPA data collection
field activity is correct, complete, and adequate for use in Any poten-
tial legal proceeding. It is important to remember that field activity
documentation can become evidence in civil and criminal law enforcement
proceedings, as well as in administrative hearings. Accordingly, such
documentation is subject to judicial or administrative review; even more
importantly, it is subject to the review of an opposing counsel attempt-
ing to discredit its evidentiary value.
The National Enforcement Investigation Center (NEIC) and the United
States Environmental Protection Agency have both prepared documents out-
lining their needs for legal proceedings. These various guidelines in-
dicate the importance of all information obtained during the inspec-
tions, investigations, and evaluations of uncontrolled hazardous waste
sites. Consequently, attention to detail must be applied by EPA and
Contractor personnel to all field documentation efforts for all of EPA's
projects. Project personnel must document where, when, how, and from
whom any vital project information was obtained. These types of
information are key to establishing a proper foundation for admissible
evidence.
Logbooks can serve as links in the evidentiary process, and must be
complete and accurate enough to permit the reconstruction of activities
that took place during field assignments. Logbooks are also used for
identifying, locating, labeling, and tracking samples and their final
disposition. Documentation of any photographs taken during the course
of the project must be provided in the logbook, along with a detailed
description of what is shown in the pictures. In addition, data re-
corded in the logbook will assist in the interpretation of the analyti-
cal results. For example, if there was heavy rain prior to sample col-
lection, or if the field team had trouble calibrating the pH meter, this
information would later be necessary in order to correctly interpret the
data.
In addition to every pertinent detail concerning the various field
activities for a specific project, the logbook should contain a summary
of any meeting and discussion both with the client and with any Federal,
State, or other regulatory agency that was on site during the field
activities. The logbook should also describe any other personnel that
appear on site, such as representatives of a potential responsible party
(PRP). The logbook can also be used for cost recovery purposes, which
means that data concerning site conditions must be recorded before the
response activity or the passage of time eliminates or alters those
4-4
-------
conditions. The accuracy, detail, completeness, and quality of the log-
book is subject to scrutiny by the client, the PRP, any opposing coun-
sel, and the courts. Consequently, the individual making entries into
the logbook must take time to ensure the information reflects the impor-
tance of the events.
4.3.1 General Guidelines
Following are general guidelines for preparing logbooks:
A separate field activity logbook must be maintained for each
project.
All logbooks must be bound and contain consecutively numbered
pages.
No pages can be removed for any reason, even if they are par-
tially mutilated or illegible.
All field activities (meetings, sampling, surveys, etc.) must be
recorded in the site logbook.
All information is to be printed legibly into the logbook in .
waterproof ink, preferably black. If weather conditions do not
permit this (i.e., if it is too cold or too wet to write with
ink), another medium, such as pencil, may be used, but it should
be specifically noted in the logbook why waterproof ink was not
used.
The language used in the logbook should be objective, factual,
and free of personal feelings or terminology that might prove
inappropriate.
Contemporaneous entries are always preferred, since recollec-
tions fade or change over time. If you are unable to record
your observations at the time, record them as soon after as
possible. The time that the notation is made should be noted,
as well as the time of the observation itself.
Each successive day's first entry is made on a new, previously
blank page.
Each page should be dated and all entries should have a time
notation based on the 24-hour clock (e.g., 0900 for 9 a.m., 2100
for 9 p.m.).
At the completion of the field activity the logbook must be
returned to the permanent project file.
4-5
-------
4.3.2 Logbook Format
The information requirements of each field activity logbook will
vary depending on the nature and scope of the project.
Title Page
Site Name
Location
Case No.
SSID No.
Successive Pages
Date
Time of site arrival/entry
Weather
Proposed Work, Summary
Team Members and Duties
Time of site departure (24-hour clock)
Other personnel on site
(e.g., visitors, other agency representatives,
property owners, etc.)
Persons "contacted and discussions
(e.g., site owners, neighboring property owners)
Signature (bottom of page)
Levels of protection
(levels originally used, changes, reasons for changes,
times of changes)
Specific activities undertaken
(e.g., site inspection, air monitoring, drum inventory,
soil sampling, etc.)
Note changes in instruction or activities that occur on site
Note any changes in weather conditions
Equipment calibration and equipment model and serial number
Sample Documentation
Sample location description/ site sketch
Station numbers
Sampler's name
Sample collection time
Designation of sample as grab or composite
Type of sample
(e.g., ground water, soil boring, surficial soil, etc.)
On-site measurement data
(e.g., pH, temp., DO, etc.)
Field observations and details important to analysis or
integrity of samples (e.g., heavy rain, odors, colors,
etc. )
Preliminary sample descriptions
(e.g., clay loam soil', very wet)
Type of preservative used
4-6
-------
Instrument readings
(e.g., OVA, HNu, etc.)
Lot number of sample containers, jar tag number
Shipping arrangements
(Federal Express air bill number)
Recipient laboratories
Photographs
The following information should be included for photographs:
1. Time, date, location, direction, and, if appropriate, veather
condi tions.
2. Complete description or identification of the subject in the
photograph and reason for taking the picture.
3. Sequential number of photograph and film roll number.
4. Camera type and serial number (e.g., Olympus 35-mm, #1164916).
Lens size and serial number, if appropriate.
5. Name of photographer.
Signatures
Each page of site logbook entries for a particular field
activity must be initialed by the person recording the information.
When two individuals make entries on the same page, they must
initial their own entries. The individual making the last entry on
the page must sign the bottom of the page. After reviewing the
entries, the field team leader must sign the last page of each
daily entry in the site logbook.
Data Collection Forms
If data collection forms are used to record specific
information obtained during field activities, then the logbook must
provide a record of what forms were used, an inventory of the forms
that includes applicable station locations, and the name of the
record taker.
Multiple Field Activities
In the event there are several field activities occurring
simultaneously, there may be a need to use separate logbooks for
each activity. Under these circumstances, a site summary logbook
should be used in addition to each task or activity logbook. The
summary logbook should describe the ongoing operations and the
general Eield activities (including personnel on site), and should
provide an inventory of the activity logbooks as well as of the
Eield activity leaders.
4-7
-------
Corrections
If corrections are necessary, they must be made by drawing a
single line through the original entry (in such a manner that the
original entry can still be read) and writing the corrected entry
alongside it. The correction must be initialed and dated. Most
corrected errors will require a footnote explaining the correction.
Do not erase or render the incorrect notation illegible.
A.4 References
1. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. A Compendium of Superfund
Field Operations Methods. Office of Emergency and Remedial
Response. EPA/540/P-87/001. December 1987.
2. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Preparation of Soil
Sampling Protocol: Techniques and Strategies. Environmental
Monitoring Systems Laboratory. EPA-600/4-83-020. August 1983.
3. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Samplers and Sampling
Procedures for Hazardous Waste Streams. Municipal Environmental
Research Laboratory. EPA-600/2-80-018. January 1980.
4. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Soil Sampling Quality
Assurance User's Guide. Environmental Monitoring Systems
Laboratory. EPA-600/4-84-043. May 1984.
5. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Data Quality Objectives
for the RI/FS Process. Office of Emergency and Remedial
Response. Document No. 9355.0-7A. June 6, 1986.
6. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Test Methods for
Evaluating Solid Wastes (SW 846). Volume II. September 1986.
rev. 9/13/89
4-8
-------
SECTION 5 - SAMPLE HANDLING, CUSTODY, PACKAGING AND SHIPPING
5.1 Concentration/Hazard Level Criteria
Specific procedures for sample handling, packaging, and shipping
are determined by the anticipated sample concentration. Samples may be
classified as either low, medium, or high level depending on the antici-
pated concentration.
5.1.1 Lov Level Samples
Samples are classified as low level if they consist of:
Low-hazard material, containing no more than 20 ppm of any con-
taminant. This includes soil or water, including ground water,
surface water, well water, river or ditch water, or water from
leachate springs.
5.1.2 Medium Level Samples
Samples are classified as medium level if they consist of:
Medium-hazard materials, containing 20 ppm to 15% of a single
contaminant. This includes on-site water-soil, surface
materials from lagoons, on-site impoundments, leachate collec-
tion pools, on-site ditches, or from beside drums; from areas of
direct but diluted contamination. Dioxin samples are designated
as medium level.
5.1.3 High Level Samples
Samples are classified as high level if they consist of:
High or unknown hazard materials, containing 15% or more of a
single contaminant. This includes materials from drums, surface
impoundments, storage tanks, or spills, direct discharges from
impoundments, and where there is little or no evidence of dilu-
tion.
5.2 Sample Analyses, Containers, Preservation and Holding Time
Requirements
Organic samples are divided into the following groups: Volatile
(or purgeable), Base/Neutral/Acid extractable (BNAs), and Chlorinated
Pesticides/ PCBs. Inorganic samples include metals and cyanide.
Special analyses can be requested for compounds of interest outside of
CLP Routine Analytical Services (RAS), such as Dioxin. It is always
good to check with the lab, especially non-CLP, to determine the
containers type and volumes required.
A summary of required volumes and container types for sample col-
lection is provided in Figure 5-1. A summary of sample preservation
requirements and holding times is provided in Table 5-1. Special
5-1
-------
FIGURE 5-1
ORGANIC SAMPLE COLLECTION
REQUIREMENTS
WATER SAMPLES
0CTRACTA8LE ANALYSIS
(LOW LEVEL]
6XTRACTA8LE ANALYSIS
(MBJIUM LEVB.0)
VOLATILE ANALYSIS
(LOW OR MEDIUM L£VH.*1
REQUIRED
VOLUME
1 GALLON
1 GAUON
80 ML
A
A
A
CONTAINER TYPE
1 x 4-UTEH AMBER
GLASS BOTTLES
OR
2 x 80-OZ. AMBSt
GLASS BOTTLES
u
OR
> 4 x 1 -UTER AMBER
GLASS 80TTLE5
* ™ 4 x 32-02. WIDE-MOUTH
j | | | | GLASS JARS
u u
2 x 40-ML GLASS VIALS
SOIL/SEDIMENT SAMPLES
REQUIRED
VOLUME
CONTAINER TYPE
EXTRAOABLE ANALYSIS
(LOW OR MEDIUM LEVEL*}
6 02.
1
1
L_
1 x a-02. '/VIDE-MOUTH
GLASS JAR
OR
P
u
Si
Li
2 x 4-OZ. WIDE -MOUTH
GLASS JARS
VOLATILE ANALYSIS
(LOW OR MEDIUM LEVEL*)
240 ML
33
2 x 120-ML WIDE-MOUTH
GLASS VIALS
•ALL MEDIUM LEVEL SAMPLES TO BE SEALED IN METAL PAINT CAN FOR SHIPMENT ^
5-2
-------
FIGURE 5-1 (CONT)
INORGANIC SAMPLE COLLECTION
REQUIREMENTS
WATER SAMPLES
Reoums)
VOUJME
CONTAINER TYPE
METALS ANALYSIS
(LOW LEVEL]
METALS ANALYSTS
(MEDIUM LEVEL*)
1 LITER
16 02.
D
1 X1-UTEH
POLYETHYLENE BOTTLE
1 x 16-OZ. WIDE •MOUTH
GLASS JAR
CYANIDE !CN"I ANALYSIS
(UOW LEVEL)
1 LITER
1 x 1-UTEH
POLYETHYLENE BOTTLE
CYANIDE (CM ) ANALYSIS
(MEDIUM LEVEL*!
16 OZ.
0
1 X 16-OZ. WIDE-MOUTH
GLASS JAR
SOIL/SEDIMENT SAMPLES
REQUIRED
VOUJME
CONTAINER TYPE
METALS'AND CYANIDE ICN")
6 OZ.
1 x 8-OZ. WIDE-MOUTH
ANALYSIS
GLASS JAR
(LOW OR MEDIUM LEVEL*)
OR
n n
2 x 4-OZ. WIDE-MOUTH
GLASS JARS
•ALL MEDIUM LEVEL SAMPLES TO BE SEALED IN METAL PAINT CAN FOR SHIPMENT
5-3
-------
FIGURE 5-1 (CONT)
DIOXIN SAMPLE COLLECTION
REQUIREMENTS
WATER SAMPLES
REQUIRED
VOLUME
CONTAINER TYPE
Z3.7J-TC00
ANALYSIS
2 LITERS
2 x 1 -LITER AMBER
(MULTI-CONCENTRATION)
GLASS BOTTLES
v—
REQUIRES
SOIUSEDIMENT SAMPLES
VOLUME
CONTAINER TYPE
Z3.7.8-TCDD
40Z.
H 1 x 4-OZ. WIDE-MOUTH
ANALYSIS
U GLASS JAR
(MUIT1-CONCENTRATION!
n
1 x 8-OZ. WIDE-MOUTH
11 GLASS JAR
HIGH HAZARD SAMPLE COLLECTION
REQUIREMENTS
UQUIO OR SOUO SAMPLES
REQUIRED
VOLUME
CONTAINER TYPE
ORGANIC ANO INORGANIC
6 02.
n 1 x 8-OZ. WIDE-MOUTH
ANALYSIS
GLASS JAR
'ALL MEDIUM LEVEL SAMPLES TO BE SEALED IN METAL PAINT CAN FOR SHIPMENT
5-4
-------
TABLE 5-1
BwqiTTgm (nrcuMBts. FHESQEVAnOI TEQMIOUES, MO HCLOCC TMS
Naot QoBcalasr1 Prnazvadon Msdan noiding doe
ftuTffrlal Teats:
ODliiora, iecal aid coui
P. G
Qool, 4*C, O.OOSI Na,S,Q.
6 hours
Fecal streptococci
P. c
Gaol, 4*C, 0.00® N^SCI
6 hours
Inorganic Tests:
L L J
Acidity
P. c
Cbol, 4*C
14 days
Allrillnlry
P. G
Cool, 4*C
14 days
Anonu
P. G
Cool, 4*C, H.30, to f*K2
Cool, 4*C
28 days
Blochsucal oxygen daand
P. G
48 hours
Bcoudfi
P. G
None required
28 days
BloctmcaL onygai danmd.
P. G
Cbol, 4"C
48 hours
carbonaceous
Qmcal oxygen deaand
Chloride
P. G
P. c
Cool, 4*C, H,S0; CO pHa
None required
28 days
28 days
Chlorine, coui residual
P. G
Ncne required
Analyze inroediateiy
Color
P, G
Cool, 4*C
48 hours
Cyanide, coui and anenahie
P, G
Qool, 4*C, NaCH co pK>12.
14 days
co cftlorinatlm
0.6g ascorbic acid
Flignde
P
Nods required
28 days
Hardness
P. G
KCj Co ptK2, CO pH<2
None required
6 oonths
Hydrogen ion (pH)
P. G
fatlyta ltmrrllacely
iyeldahl and organic
P, G
Cool, 4*C, co pH<2
28 days
nicrogBi
Metals:
Qannim VI
P, G
Cool, 4°C
24 hours
Mercury
P. G
mo. co phc
net Co ptK2
28 days
hfetais, au-eyc chraaain VI
P, G
6 months
ad mercury
Nictate
P. G
Cool, 4°C
48 hours
Nitrate-nitrite
P. G
Cool, 4"C, H.S0. ca pH<2
28 davs
Nitrite
P. G
Cool, 4*C *
48 hours
Oil ana grease
G
Cool, 4°C, a, SCI co pH<2
28 days
Organic caroon
P. c
Cool. 4°C, aa or fcLSO, co
p*K2
28 days
Orthopnosonate
P. G
Filter innmiatnly, cool, i'C
48 hours
Ckygen, Dissolved Probe
G Bottle and coo
None required
toalvze lnaediately
Winkler
do
Fix on sice and score in dark
8 hours
tfremi.s
G only
Owl, 4*C, a,SO, co pHQ
28 days
ptnsonows (elsaencai}
G
Qaol, 4aC ¦ "
48 hours
Bwpnorus, cocal
P. G
Qool, 4°C, H,SO, CO pH<2
Cool, 4*C *
28 days
Residue, coui
P, G
7 days
Stesldus, Filterable
P. G
Qaol,.4*0
7 days
Residue, NanfLLteraole (ISS)
P, G
Cool, 4*C
7 days
ftealdue, Secrlpahlp
P. G
Qaol, 4*C
48 hours
SMiriiiB, vnlarilp
P, G
Cool, 4*C
7 days
Silica
P
Cool, 4*C
28 days
Specific conouctsnce
P. c
Cool, 4"C
28 days
5-5
-------
TABLE 3-1 (CONT)
KEQDZXED GOfCUTOS, PKSQQKXZQf TB0MIQUF5, MO HXDEC TMS (CQOlNUeS)
toldlflg tlai
SuUece
Sulfide
Sulfite
Ttoperature
Hirbldlty
Organic Teats:
fur^rantu Halacartoons
Puz^eable anostlc
hytoorarhnnB
Arrolein m acrylonltrlle
nrah
fttthalata esters
•NIC
PCSa, acrylonltrlle
NUraarenaclcs and
laophorone
ttolyruciear armwrlr
hpirocanns
Haloechers
OUonnaud hrrarocaroans
TCDD
Total organic halogens
Peaclcldea Teata:
Peaclddea
Radio logical Teats:
Muna, oeea ana radlun
P. C
p, C
?, C
p. C
p. C
p. C
G, Tteflor-Liisad
C, Tef loo-lined
G, Teflon-lined
aapoa
C, Teflon-lined cap
0, Teflon lined cap
G, Teflon-lined cap
G, Teflim-lined cap
G, Teflon-lined cap
G, Teflon-lined cap
C, Teflon lined cap
G, Teflxm-lixied cao
G, Teflorr*ilned cap
G, Teflwiined cap
G, Teflon-lined cap
Qool, 4*C 28 days
Odd!, 4*C, add doc irnfarr 7 days
pirn anriliw hydroxide ta p*09
Nona required
Coal, 4*C
Nona required
Choi, 4*C
Cool, 4*C, O.UJffi
Cool, 4*C, Q.008X IU-S-0,
Cool, 4*C " i
Goal, 4*C, scare in dark,
0.00SZ Na^O,
Cool, 4*C
Cool, 4*C, 0.00K to-S-O.
store La dark
Coal, 4*C, O.OOffi Ma_S^0^
scan in dark
Cool, 4"C, 0.00S2 Na,S-0-
Cool, 4"C 1 1 J
Cool, 4®C, 0.00SZ Na^LO.
Cool, 4*C, HjSO^ to ptT<2
C, Tefloo-linod cap Cool, 4*C, pH 5-9
Analyze
48 hours
Analyze
48 hours
Qool, 4*C, QSCeX, Jia^Oj 14-days
Cool, 4*C, 0.Q08S Na-S.0.,
HQ U pH2
Coal, 4*C, 0.008Z Na-S-O^,
Adjust pH CO 4-5
14 days
14 days
7 days well extraction,
IC day¦ after emnrrInn
7 days until extract 1 no
7 days well extraction
40 days after extraction
4U days alter extract Un
40 days after extraction
40 days after ertrarclm
40 days after extraction
40 davs after extraction
40 days after extract im
40 days after extraction
7 days
40 davs after extraction
P. C
UO^ co pHC
^flalyetftylene (?) or Glaaa (G)
5-6
-------
TABLE 5-1 (CONT)
RECOMMENDED SAMPLE CONTAINERS,
PRESERVATION TECHNIQUES, AND HOLDING TIMES
Paramur Gsneainar Poaacvaara ItaUlcg Em
SanivoUdle Orssnla
Qgaesicnud Uhu e»«rl—
3-rj*. wirttnun
j\ut wicft TaiLon
Utms
Nana
U days
liquid S^^Ias
Ms Residual Gilonna
PTasme
or I l/2-^ai.
«ooar glass uicn Teiion
li.nr
Gaol.
Sarin I aae te
extracted
in 7 aavs ana
extract ana-
lyraa vicnin
40 days
Residual C-ion.-*
?rssne
SoiL/Sedinaats aod Sludges
1-giL. or 2 1/2-gai.
«wr }l in uica Teflon
lintr
3-«r. wldeaaudi gl.au
wish Teflon Uner
Add 3 aL 102 sedluB
cflimultaca par
gallm, CaaL, 4*C
Coal, 4*C
ausc be
fJOiA^Hl WlO-
la 7 days md
lyzad victim
tO days
14 days
5-8
-------
sample preparation steps follows:
Aqueous volatile organic sample jars must be filled completely,
with no visible air bubbles;
Soil volatile organic sample jars should be filled completely to
minimize jar headspace;
All organics samples must be iced to 4°C following collection
until received by the laboratory;
Aqueous metals samples must be preserved with nitric acid (HNO^)
to a pH less than or equal to 2;
Aqueous cyanide samples must be preserved with sodium hydroxide
(NaOH) to a pH greater than or equal to 12;
Do not cool dioxin, medium level, or high level water and soil
samples;
Protect dioxin samples from sunlight.
Protect Tenax/CMS sample tubes from UV light (i.e. sunlight) and
keep on ice until analysis.
All samples should be held for a minimal time in the field (less
than 24 hours) prior to shipping. Recommended holding times for dif-
ferent analyses refer to the maximum periods before extraction or analy-
sis can be performed. Maximum recommended holding times are listed in
Table 5-1.
The laboratory is required to perform matrix spike and matrix spike
duplicate analyses on a minimum of 5% of all samples (or one sample per
sample event, whichever is higher). An increased volume requirement of
three (3) times normal must be provided for the chosen sample (water
only). Twice the volume may be required for soil samples (consult the
designated laboratory coordinator). Additionally, for water samples,
one field blank should be supplied per Case, and one volatile trip blank
should be supplied per shipment. No soil blanks are required.
5.2.1 Analysis of Petroleum Product Samples
The GC fingerprint analysis allows comparison of the ratios of
individual hydrocarbons present in the product. Depending on the
boiling point range (cut) of the product, certain indicator ratios are
scrutinized. The GC fingerprint analysis can determine the type of
crude oil (paraffinic, asphaltic, naphthenic) or the refined product
type (gasoline, aviation fuel, kerosene, diesel, fuel oil, lube oil,
grease, asphalt, etc.). This analysis is still valid after the sample
has undergone weathering from either water/air exposure or through fire.
Examples of additional analyses available to characterize the
petroleum product are included below (source: Control of Oil and Other
5-9
-------
Hazardous Material, U.S. EPA, EPA-430/1-74/005).
1. Solubility in organic solvents - Used to differentiate greases
and asphalts from other petroleum products, and to distinguish
betveen crude oils and residual fuel oils from different
locations.
2. Specific gravity or API gravity - The gravity or density is a
distinguishing characteristic of oils. However, since the loss
of volatiles, which occurs in the early stages of environmental
exposure with volatile distillate fuels and crude oils results
in a change of this parameter, it is of limited value.
3. Infrared spectroscopy - Indicates the relative content of
aromatic or carbon-ring-type compounds. May also indicate
presence of additives such as silicones. Generally employed to
characterize materials less volatile than #2 fuel oil, such as
#4 and residual fuels.
4. Distillation range - Defined as the temperature difference
between high and low boiling compounds in an oil observed
during distillation. Actual procedures are specified by ASTM D
86-56, ASTM D 850, and ASTM D 216.
5. Viscosity - A measure of the resistance to flow. May be
expressed as (a) Saybolt second units (SSU), the time required
for a standard volume of oil to-pass through a standard
orifice, as specified by ASTM D 445-54T and ASTM D 446-53; (b)
kinematic viscosity at 100°F or 212°F in centistokes (ASTM D
445-65) or in Saybolt Furol units at 122°F. ASTM 2161-63T
gives the relationships between the different viscosity units.
6. Vanadium is analyzed according to ASTM D 1548-63.
7. Nickel is analyzed either in the final solution from the
vanadium procedure by atomic absorption (AAS) or by dissolving
5g oil in 100 ml of xylene for determination by AAS.
5.3 Sample Custody
Maintaining an unbroken sample chain-of-custody from the time the
sample is obtained through its arrival in the designated laboratory is
essential if t-he data results are to be admissible in court.
A sample is considered to be in custody if the following criteria
are met:
It is in the sampler's or other authorized person's possession;
It is in view after being in someone's possession;
It is locked up and an authorized individual maintains sole
access;
5-10
-------
It is in a designated and identified secure area.
The following steps during sample packaging and shipment should
assure that the samples vill arrive at the laboratory under proper
chain-of-cus tody:
Samples are always accompanied by a properly completed chain-of-
custody form. When transferring the possession of samples, both
the person relinquishing and the person receiving will sign,
date, and note the time on the record. This record can document
the transfer of samples from person to person or from an indivi-
dual to a secure holding area.
A chain-of-custody record must accompany each sample cooler and
numbered custody seals must be affixed to the front left and
back right of the cooler. These seals should be covered with
clear plastic tape. Strapping tape must encircle the cooler on
at least two locations. As long as custody forms are sealed
inside the sample cooler and custody seals remain intact, com-
mercial carriers are not required to sign off on the custody
form. For further assurance of chain of custody one may "seal"
the trash bag containing the samples within the cooler with a
custody seal, if this or the bag is broken then custody has been
compromised.
Whenever samples are split with a site representative or other
personnel, this information is recorded on the chain-of-custody
form in the space provided. The site representative should sign
the chain-of-custody record indicating whether or not splits
were accepted. If the representative refuses to sign, this
should be noted.
5.4 Sample Documentation
5.4.1 Low Level Samples
Organic Traffic Reports (for CLP only). A single organics
traffic report is used to request all extractable and VOA
analyses from a single sample location. Complete the form as
illustrated in Figures 5-2 (old) and 5-3 (new). The bottom two
copies accompany the sample. Include sample container Lot
Numbers and EPA Tag Numbers on the report form. The top copy is
mailed to the Sample Management Office (SMO), and the second
copy is for the Regional Office Files. Field duplicates require
a separate traffic report, although it is not necessary to
complete a separate traffic report for matrix spike duplicates
(indicate increased volume under section 6 of the traffic report
and specify matrix spike duplicate).
5-11
-------
FIGURE 5-2
ORGANIC TRAFFIC REPORT
TYPE OF ACTIVITY (CIRCLE ONE) ®
SUPWFUNO—PA SI ESI RIFS RO flA Efl
NPU) OAM OTHER
NQN-SUPEHBJNO— PROGRAM
SITE NAME;
Johns Backyard
CITY. STATE
Denver. CO
SITE SPILL 10:
AA
REGION NO:
08
SAMPLING COMPANY ®
EPA
SAMPLER: (NAME)
John Doe
SHIP TO:
ABC Labs
123 Lane May
Denver, Colorado
<3)
ATTN:.
Zip
Sample Custodian
SAMPUNQ OATE: ®
BEGIN: 2/22/89 END: 2/22/89
OATE smppgn2/22/8aAfWIEHf pri P#
AIRBILL. NO: 123-4S6-7890
SAMPLE DESCRIPTION
(ENTER IN BOX At 4. SOIL
1. SURFACE WATER 5. SEDIMENT
2. QROUNO WATER 6. OIL (SAS)
3. LfiACHATE 7. WASTE (SAS)
TRIPLE VOLUME REQUIRED FOR MATRIX
SPIKE/DUPUCATE AQUEOUS SAMPLE
SHIP MEDIUM ANO MIQH CONCENTRATION
SAMPLES IN PAINT CANS
SEE REVERSE FOR AOOmONAL
INSTRUCTIONS
CU>
SAMPLE
NUM8ER
(FROM LABELS)
HM—001
HM-002
HN-003
HM-004
HM-005
®
I
air
mfln
St 2 •
30«"
<9
V.
1 *
3
2 3
s i
o •
O -i
O
RAS
ANALYSIS
UJ
a
Us
5a
X IX
o
SPECIAL
HANOUNQ
©
STATION
LOCATION
so-oi
SQ-02
_S2dU.
so-oa
EPA Form 2075-7I3-S7)
vmrr _ ;un roev ~uENT r-QPv
white — i A0 COPV POH RETURN TO SMO
Y5LLQW - uA8 CCPV
5-12
-------
&EPA
NOA-~£up4rfurtdT Ooi.
1 Ship la:
6C- L-»~^
113 iAt|y
hbo<- VA
Organic "Raffle Report
ffbrCLPUst Onfy)
AiitUNumbM
ni-vrc-vfi
4. Out Shipped
LZmJtL
CtiiUi
r
lilpU volume >«)ub«d tof mtliii
¦pika/dupOcdt tqutout unipt*.
Ship medium and hlflh conctnliilloo
tvnpiaa In paU can*.
Cat* Nunto
/ 0 AO 6
SAS No (4 apphcaMa)
& Sunpl* D*tCiiption (£mu m Column A)
1. Surface Waiar
2. Groundwater
3. Leachata
4. BInsale
8. Soll/Sadimanl
6. Oil (SAS)
7. WaWe(SAS)
8. Other (SAS) (Specify)
CLP
Sun pi#
Numb*
(F/XX7» l*b4l»)
. 1*1
Sampla
Oiacilp-
UoA
(Ftom
ku (
Concan-
ballon
L«kM
U-m»d
H»hlgh
|C|
RAS AfMlysit
Sp*cUi
Handling
(E)
Suiloo
locillon
in
Oala/Tuna ol
Sampla
CdMUn
|0)
Conaipondlng
CLP Inofganla
Sampl*
Numbat
VOA
BNA
P*at/
PC 6
fif\ 1X3
4
L
X
y
lijl U»#k
*if)A|23
H
u
X
JL
oi/rt
lift
nr
1
I—
nlwk.
t ' '
ItU |-3«»v
1
¦ ¦ 1 • ¦ • ¦
*4
M
3
Pd
M
Cn
I
rn« r.~ *1
-------
Inorganic Traffic Reports (for CLP only). A single inorganic
traffic report is used to request metals and/or cyanide analyses
from a single sample location. Complete the form as illustrated
in Figures 5-4 (old) and 5-5 (new). Include sample container
Lot Numbers and EPA Tag Numbers on the report form. The bottom
two copies accompany the sample. The top copy is mailed to the
SMO, and the second copy is for the Regional Office Files.
Provide the sample location in section 7 of the traffic report.
Chain-of-Custody Forms. One chain-of-custody form is used to
document each sample shipment container (i.e., one form per
cooler) from one site. Complete the form as illustrated in
Figure 5-6. The top copy accompanies the samples, the bottom
two copies are returned to the office. Under project name, use
the TDD, case number, or other code identifier (not the site
name) as some CLP labs may have a conflict of interest at cer-
tain sites. Sample numbers are preassigned by the Regional
Sample Coordinator.
• Sample Tags. One sample tag must be prepared for each sample
container. Complete the tag as illustrated in Figure 5-7. Use
only indelible ink. on all labels and tags.
5.4.2 Medium Level Samples
Organic and Inorganic Traffic Reports (for CLP only). Traffic
reports for medium level samples are completed similarly to
those for low level samples (Figures 5-2, 5-3, 5-4 and 5-5),
except that medium concentration is specified where appropriate.
Chain-of-Custody Forms. Chain-of-custody forms for medium level
samples are completed similar to those for low level samples
(Figure 5-6), except that medium concentration is specified
where appropriate.
Sample Tags. Completed the sample tags in the same manner as
for low level samples (Figure 5-7).
5.4.3 High Level Samples
Organic and Inorganic Traffic Reports (for CLP only). It is
extremely important that "known or suspected hazards" be
specified on the form. Traffic reports for high" level samples
are completed similarly to those for low level samples (Figures
5-2, 5-3, 5-4 and 5-5), except that high concentration is
specified where appropriate.
Chain-of-Custody Forms. Complete as illustrated in Figure 5-6.
Sample Tags. Complete the sample tags in the same manner as for
low level samples (Figure 5-7).
5-14
-------
FIGURE 5-4
INORGANIC TRAFFIC REPORT
-*/£A ":;4@ usEP*caKiTR*circAaoHATaH*PHOCHiuii2S^£fi^'.f:'
sample MWi«c6MewoFaceiM»Hp!^.^y.-v^^^^?>"
f rw^^p.ot aaxai^jALEXANoniKswfciziti
TYPE OF ACTIVITY (CIRCLE ONE) 0
SUPERFUNO—PA SI ESI PIPS RO RA Efl
NPUJ O&M OTHER
NON^UPERFUNO— PROGRAM
SITE NAME:
Johns Backyard
CITY. STATE;
Denver. CO
SITE SPILL 10:
AA
REGION NO:
VTTT
SAMPLER: (NAME)
Tnhn Doa
sampling company ®
_EEA
SHIP TO:
VI Labs
987 Lane Avenue
Denver, Colorado ZIP
attm- Sample Custodian
SAMPLING OATH: ®
RpniM-2/22/89 eno: 2/22/89
DATE shipped- 2/22/Mrpifp- Fed '&
AIRBILL NO: 987-654-3210
SAMPLE DESCRIPTION
(ENTER IN BOX A) i. SOIL
1. SURFACE WATER S. SEDIMENT
2. GROUND WATER 3. OIL (SAS1
3. LEACHATE 7. WASTE (SAS)
DOUBLE VOLUME REQUIRED FOR MATRIX
SPIKE/DUPLICATE AQUEOUS SAMPLE
SHIP MEDIUM ANO HIGH CONCENTRATION
SAMPLES IN PAINT CANS
SEE REVERSE FOR ADDITIONAL
INSTRUCTIONS
® m
0
<0
e
o •
u
1
g
C/JUJ
<23
Q
5
5
i
ll
VJ
«•
X
«
9
a
MHM001
4
L
X
X
1 1
S0-01
MHM002
4
L
X
X
1 1 1 1 1
S0-02
MHM003
X I X
SU-03
MHM004
MHM005
X I X
SQ-04
X I X
I i
SW-01
I
I I I
I I
I I
; i
! I I
1 i I!
Form *Q73-p li-S/l
.VHITE - 3M0 CCPV
=»NK - OJcNT CC?Y
.VHITE - .~3 CCPV cor agTijpN TO SMO
'SLLO'.V - .i3 CCPV
5-15
-------
HoivSupirluiid PiEgiam
SiEBA
I typ« ol AclMly (Chacli oni)
Uwlad Slalai Enviionmanlal PiMaction Agancy
Conuid UtxMalory Progiam Sampla Managamanl Olbct
PO Boi 111 Alaiandna. VA 22113
70J-tST2«90 ns SiH>90
EN(=
¦JP10
'
RA
EH
OIM
RO
ESi
PA
flIFS
~3fsi | |;
_« O
SIPA
STSI
OUl#« (S/MCltf)
S•!•
B?ster\
CLP
St/TtpU
Numtx*
(Ft&n U&4H)
t*h(\ 1^3
1VT
Safflpla
Oaten?-
liOA
/frtwn
po* 0
<">
Concan-
Uallon
L-to-
fcUmad
H-htJh
n
JO-
SH* SpU 10
2. Rsoion Numbii
X
SamplwJNama)
rTtKn Pp^
Sampling Co.
1 Ship To.
L(\%
140
Ml
(C»
RAS Anulyfit
lOtti
x_
>L
jzL
Cyanlda
X
•Sb*' t.
t-fii f-vrht^~\
<0|
Spaclal
Handling
8 /rti^K
Inorganic Traffic Report
(For CLP Ust Only)
AEtull MumbtT"
•ui-W-WV
4. Dai* Shlppad
Caul
JL.
Doubla weiuma laquuad lot malm
apika'duplicata aquaoua umpla.
Ship madlum and high concanlianon
aamplaa In paml cant.
i lot additional miiiucbona
m
Suiioa
jlL-
^lL.
tn
Oala/Tima d
SampU
CotacUon
llj 1 »Mn
i\fi nishf
lift ill*VP
Cata Numbai
I 6. t AO
SAS Ho |on /Eni* m Column A)
1 Surface Water
2 Ground Watar
3. Leachaie
4. Rinsala
5. Soil/Sediment
6 Oil (SAS)
7 Walla (SAS)
B. Other (SAS) (Specify)
(G|
Coiiaipondwg
Oigame
Sampla
Numb*
Afl P-3
as
o
O
£
l-i
O
M
O
tn
T)
o
pa
H
P!
•n
n
0
a
pa
M
Cn
1
Ln
I PA foim flMM (lit) Raplacat EPA Fo
-------
US ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
biwifonrnental Servient Oivulon
CHAIN OF CUSTODY RECORD
REGION VIII. ONE OENVER PLACE
999 18TH STREET
DENVER, CO. 80302-2413
PROJ NO
PROJECT NAME
.lolms backyard
NO.
OF
CON-
TAINERS
/# / & / /Pi
f Ji /Jf
/ / V V / W (4 /
/ Qt/ JC/ V , / _y at/
/ ^/ ^/ -7 ^ .V REMARKS
/ »io< Fi«tj t iiti. Second Copy lo Hvini*uii«t ol ln«pKlKl Facility
&».. wi. John Hoe
O Accwiid V D*chn*«l S>tMiuii
O
£
o
~n
n
d
to
H
o
s
s
o
o
M
8
&
M
Ln
av
-------
FIGURE 5-7
SAMPLE TAG and SAMPLE SEAL
; I 3 1
c
j:
o
a\
co
CN
CN
-w
o
0
1
CN
O
a>
CO
I
CO
o
e
<9
U
•s
>sfi
flj
qi a
u
«H«4
jT
0 0
i«°
; -c
: 3-H
O 1-1
— IS
BOO Anions
SolidS ITSS) (TDS1 (SS)
COO. TOC. Nutrients
Phenol ics
Mercury
Metats
Cyanaa
Oil ana Greass
Organ as GC/MS
Priority Pollutants
Volatile Orqanig
Pwoodw
Mutagenicity
Bacteriology
Remarxs:
BNA Analysis
HM-004
r«g mo.
8-6 4862
L«o 3«mci« no.
UNITED STATES
rt ' ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
( \ OFFICIAL SAMPLE SEAL
'
SMtfliM. UTE
HM-004 2/22/89
o
SIGNATURE
John Doe
X
4
3
PRINT NMi4/U
-------
5.4.4 Dioxin Samples
• CLP Dioxin Shipment Records. A shipment record is used for
dioxin samples in place of traffic report forms. Complete as
illustrated in Figure 5-8. The top two copies of the shipment
record are returned to the regional office, the bottom tvo
copies accompany the sample. Dioxin sample numbers are pre-
assigned. Multiple samples from a single site may appear on a
single shipment record.
Chain-of-Custody Forms. Use the dioxin sample number in place
of the traffic report number. Complete as illustrated in Figure
5-6.
Labels/Tags. Dioxin sample numbers are available as pre-
assigned labels from the CLP. One label must appear on the
sample container, and a duplicate label must be affixed to the
metal paint can in which the sample will be shipped. EPA sample
tags must be affixed to the sample container. Labels indicating
the site name, sample location, date, and time of collection
must also be affixed to the sample container.
5.4.5' Special Analytical Services (for CLP only)
Special Analytical Services are required under the following condi-
tions :
For organic and/or inorganic analysis of oils or other atypical
matrices such as fish, mammal tissues, or air;
For parameters other than the 150 Target Compound List (TCL)
organics or inorganics;
For lower detection limits or for quality control that is more
extensive than available through the routine CLP Invitation For
Bid (IFB) process;
For quicker turnaround times than the normal 30 days;
For EP toxicity, flashpoint, and other RCRA solid waste para-
meters ;
For dioxin/furan analysis which is not provided by Routine
Anaytical Services (RAS);
For high level samples.
The following documentation is required for SAS samples:
Paperwork Requirements. Figure 5-9 is an example of an SAS
packing list. This form is used in place of a traffic report.
Up to 20 sample locations may be listed on a single packing
list. Each sample number corresponds to a specific sample loca-
5 19
-------
FIGURE 5-8
CLP DIOXIN SHIPMENT RECORD
USEPA Contract Laboratory Program
Sample Management Office
P.O. Box 818 Alexandria Virginia 22313
CASE NO:
5000H
BATCH NO:
34
FTS 8-557-2490 7037557-2490
CLP DIOXIN SHIPMENT RECORD
Sits Name:
Johns Backyard
Sampling Office:
EPA
City & Slate:
Denver, Colorado
Qty & State:
Denver. Colo rado
EPA Site No:
Sampling Contact:
John Doe
Latitude:
(name)
Sampling Date:
2/22/89
Longitude:
Tier 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(circle one)
Data Turnaround:
15-0ay 30-Oay _X_
MATRIX
oescraimoN
SAMPLE
NUMBERS
SOIL'
SEDIMENT
OTHER:
U!
O -i
mi &
G <
V)
SAMPLE TO
DUPLICATE
SAMPLE TO
SPIKE
BLANK
EQUIPMENT
RINSATE
OTHER:
(SAS ONLY|
SPECIFY:
(SAS ONLY)
5000H-34-001
X
X
I
5000H-34-002
X
X
5000H-34-003
X
x I
5000H-34-004
x I
X
5000H-34-005
X
X
I
I
|
I
I
I I
I
i
I I I
I
I I I I I
I
I
I I I
I
| |
|
I I I
till
I I I I
I
|
I
| | | |
I
I I I I
I
I I I
I
I
! I I
I
I I I ! I
I
: i .
I I
! I | i i
I
¦ '.'.-'T.' >'"7 • i j-V; ¦/
.V;.r -. y."- --;
¦J.
¦••V. j '•••i
- .v ''^
oV'."
A' -v v..-:\v .w /
«V-j lv/'*^1 V
WHITE—SMO Cooy YELLOW—fleqion Cooy PINK—I ao Codv tor Return to SMO GOLD—Lao Cooy
5-20
-------
FIGURE 5-9
SPECIAL ANALYTICAL
SERVICES PACKING LIST
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
CLP Sample Management Office
P.O. Box S13 « Alexandria, Virginia 22313
Phone: 703/357-2090 - FTS/557-2090
SA5 Numoer
5000H
SPECIAL ANALYTICAL SERVICE
PACKING LIST
Sampling Office:
EPA
Sampling Dateis):
2/22/89
Ship To:
MMM Labs
555 Lane Road
Denver, Colorado ZIP
Attn: Sample custodian
For Lab Use Only
Date Samples Rec'd:
Sampling Contact:
John Doe
Date Shipped:
2/22/89
(name)
294-7061
Site Name/Code:
Johns Backyard/AA
Received By:
(phone)
I.
2-
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
S.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
U.
13.
16.
17.
IS.
19.
20.
Sample
Numbers
5000H-01
5000H-02
Sample Description
Le^ Analysis, Matrix, Concentration
Medium soil - VOA, BAN, Pest./BNA
Medium soil - VOA, BNA, Pest./BNA
Sample Condition on
Receipt at Lab
For Lab Use Only
White - SMO Copy, Yellow - Region Copy, Pink - Lab£opy for return to 5MO, Gold - Lab Cooy
5-21
-------
tion. The top two copies of the packing list are returned to
the TAT office, and the bottom two accompany the shipment. If
both Routine Analytical Services (RAS) and SAS parameters are
requested, it may be possible to simply list the additional SAS
parameters requested on the appropriate traffic reports, thus
eliminating the need for the packing list.
Chain-of-Custody Forms. Chain-of-custody forms are required per
unit shipped. SAS numbers will replace traffic report numbers
in all places (Figure 5-6).
Labels/Tags. Labels and tags are required on all sample con-
tainers. The SAS number will be used in place of the traffic
report number where appropriate.
5.5 Sample Packaging Procedures
5.5.1 Low Level Samples
The following guidelines should be followed to package low level
samples.
1. Decontaminate the outside of all sample containers;
2. Affix the traffic report number to the sample container and
cover with clear plastic tape.
3. Affix the tags to the sample bottles;
4. Secure bottle caps with tape or a chain-of-custody seal;
5. Mark level of sample material on each bottle (except VOA
samples) with a grease pencil;
6. Place each sample in a plastic self-sealing bag (Ziplock), and
wrap with bubble wrap, or^other packing material (2 VOA con-
tainers per bag), polyethylene bottles do not require padding;
7. Place samples in an ice cooler lined with two large plastic
bags with a layer of vermiculite (non-combustible absorbent
packaging material) in the bottom of the inside bag;
8. Samples must be placed in cooler in a way as to prevent break-
age; do not over-pack;
9. Fill the remainder of the inside bag with vermiculite and seal
the inner bag with strapping tape, place shipping ice
contained in sealed plastic bags between the large bags, tape
the outer plastic bag closed;
10. Place the proper sections o£ the traffic reports and chain-o£-
custody forms in a clear plastic bag and tape to the inside
lid of the cooler;
5-22
-------
11. Secure each cooler with strapping tape at two locations and
tape the outside cooler drain shut;
12. Label the outside of the cooler in indelible ink with the
proper laboratory address, cover this and other shipping
labels with clear plastic tape; and
13. Affix signed and dated chain-of-custody seals to the front
left and back right of the cooler, cover vith clear plastic
tape.
5.5.2 Medium and High Level Samples
The following procedures should be followed to package medium and
high level samples.
1. Decontaminate the outside of all sample containers;
2. Affix the traffic report number to the outside of the
container and cover with clear plastic tape;
3. Affix the tags to the sample bottles;
4. Secure bottle caps, place in clear self-sealing plastic bags;
5. Pack each sample container in a metal paint can, filled with a
vermiculite cushion. The can lid must be secured with three
metal clips;
6. Apply appropriate hazard warning and shipping labels and
laboratory address label to the lid of the metal paint can;
and
7. Place samples in ice coolers and complete packaging according
to low level procedures.
5.5.3 Dioxin Samples
The following procedures should be followed to package dioxin
samples:
Package according to medium level soil sample procedures;
Dioxin sample numbers must appear on the sample container and a
duplicate label must be affixed to the metal paint can;
Labels indicating site name, sample location, date, and time of
collection must be affixed to the sample jar or bottle;
Protect from sunlight.
5-23
-------
5.6 Federal Express Shipping Requirements
Samples may be shipped via Federal Express using the following two
forms:
Federal Express Airbill. A regular airbill is used for all low
level samples. Complete the airbill as illustrated in Figure
5-10. Record the airbill number on corresponding traffic report
and chain-of-custody forms.
Federal Express Restricted Articles Airbill. A Restricted
Articles airbill is used for medium and high level samples clas-
sified as hazardous materials, flammable liquid N.O.S. (Not
Otherwise Specified), or flammable solid N.O.S. Complete the
airbill as illustrated in Figure 5-11. Dioxin samples are
shipped as medium level, flammable solid N.O.S.
It should be noted that these regulations change with time and the
shipper should be called prior to shipping to verify any changes.
5.7 DOT Shipping Requirements
Samples must be transported in a manner that protects their integ-
rity, as well as protecting against any detrimental effects from pos-
sible leakage. Regulations for packaging, marking, labeling, and ship-
ping of hazardous materials and wastes are promulgated by the U.S.
Department of Transportation (DOT) and described in the Code of Federal
Regulations (49 CFR 171 through 177). In general, these regulations
were not intended to cover shipment of samples collected at hazardous
waste sites or samples collected at emergency responses. However, EPA
has deemed it prudent to observe DOT procedures. The information pre-
sented here is for general guidance, Figure 5-12 and Table 5-2. For
specific details of DOT regulations for shipping and marking, see
Appendices 5 and C.
A distinction must be made between environmental and hazardous
samples to determine the appropriate procedures for transportation.
Packaging requirements for hazardous samples are more rigorous than
those for environmental samples. If there is any doubt, a sample should
be considered hazardous and shipped accordingly. In addition, consi-
deration should be taken to protect the health and safety of laboratory
personnel receiving the samples. Special precautions are used at labo-
ratories when hazardous samples are received. Again, if there is doubt,
samples should be considered hazardous rather than environmental.
It should be noted that these regulations change with time and the
shipper should be called prior to shipping to verify any changes.
5.7.1 Low Level Samples
Low level (environmental) samples are exempt from DOT Hazardous
Materials Regulations even though some preservatives are classified as
hazardous. A letter of understanding between EPA and DOT states that
5-24
-------
u u
1 ji' ' _d1
&) a*
JZ
fc-1
4T
~
LU
CT
O
-J
kH
JT
a
LU
tr
I I I I
— AIRBILL
W&""
_J 106711103^
usi mis AiKM i tot oomutc smrmiitii »ttm* r«( to«ri«f»r4i #1-4 4i4j*4 4«*04S4&
usi tut iMHttsttokit mi* »»ruu /of sMrmfHi row inuci
9»iirj0«srt4tJ iN iJi iw rat /iff
PACMH
I BACK IkB NUMBER
Sendei s Federal Express Account Number
1111-2222-3
. FiomfYoui Name) Please Pnnt
Your Name
lllllllll
Your Phone Number (Very br^jonani)
< i
Company
Department/Floor Ho
Company
Su^rel AckJ/ess
City
Slate
//fftequred
To (Recipient's Name) Please Print
Lab Contact
R*c {MTV's Phone Huntrn (Utary important
( )
Company
Departmer*SFtoof Na
Laboratory
Enact Street Address /Wa fiami Mnwr M ft A lu« m fit* Op Ctfhij
City
Stale
f/U/Atf BEfEBENCE INFORMATION (fIBST 24 CHABACTEBS WILL AffEAB ON INVOICE.)
EV" Any Information Concerning the Project
w
PirtffMT | I u «^ruw I I tW A«cip«)l • fwat* Atci No 1,1 Bui id Pmj F«aE> Acct No
* I—' L-i F4 m Aaount MktKjw Mu« Xjv FlAA(c(w«Humoi(tyo«
~ c- 123=456=789=0
[' | u o«m c«a
FM m Cr«J4 C«d NurfTit*i btfow
>
SERVICES
I-! niomi i 6 I-] otumcir
i—iot>A«MO<.i.M, i—i if mi
21—I couaiia-PM 7 r~i
•—1 DVUMtBBT L-1
, rn ovfAKifitfi
J I—i 101
. r—i ohbmibmi
4 U ri/K
»~
5 ~ SUHOAMO l0 ~
not Uiw nan
b«CO [till I m Na St**»*«4
6 |~~) unci
7 Q oim tncui uirtf
9 Q yf
>0 ~
»~
,2 n
' L_J fmtrwDM
Total
n:
11
rM« MfliHI
Received At
1 O Regular Stop
30
Drop Boa
On-Gali Stop
4 ~
BSC
ft ~
Stabon
FEDEX Corp Employee No
Dale/Time lor FEDEX Use
If NOLO fOB rtCU-Vl tarf fEDU jU*W J
Street
Address
Coy
Stale
SEBVICE CONMTlQNt, DECLABEB ULUE
AND IIBIIT Of LIABILITY
Um ol ITki (lU con*u yOui jgicCfteftf io r* WIMC6 u* uftuns
«v oj extern Servce CU»ue Sea
back <4 tondtt i cop^ at fts lur lunner rtumidfaon
*4 not Do ic&po'tt'tte ki <"y cum e>CM ot f 100 pm
pacMQe 0ia ie^4 or ms (unuge OkHfOt rton QBinery
untett you fcpec^r a Iwgnt* «iou^r)rw t^celDtw te* p*y40l
pet ad^tortai $10C *nd aucuntjTi you actu^J k>« n 9«
tvtnl ol • ciajit U4i>mum amouv bTMaions lam Im cuitrt
Feae>« £ap»s Stivee GiaOe *4*1 Ycu njt* 10 ieco><« hom
la loss nwnijc vafcje c/r* p*o*y u«d
asbiioi^otufei incant raaeti p>uM aoaneyi toev custi and
any(Mherloiinor(bm>gdM(ieff)e«died tficidtaWCQittOlwXlB
ipecoi 4 bmted 10 ffta gieUM cT S tOO o> duciartao cAaruu*pMl Sm
Service Guae lo> li^thur rtiloimafcon
Sender authorizes Federal Express to deliver tus slup«
rnenl without obtaining a delivery signature and shall
indemnify and hold harmless Federal Express bom any
claims resulting therefrom
FleJease
Signature
S
1
Declared \fekrt~Chuga
I ®
HI
M
O
W
Ul
I
Federal Express Um
Base Charges
Othec 1
Otwt 2
ToteI Charges
PART #2041736800
Kirstoi baii ?/y
ffwmoMuiA sactf
m
-------
FIGURE 5-11
FEDERAL EXPRESS FORM FOR RESTRICTED ARTICLES
^E^osasi
w8293H _L gBpqqnBftc;,,
« a I a i o « • i ;
¦¦mi
9823408851
AMUUMMMM
SHIPPER'S CERTIFICATION FOB RESTRICTED ARTICLES/DANGEROUS GOODS.
CHBCXONE* Q49CFR Q ICAO (TYPg OR PRINTI |
Taocosrro smith cjjwin*...
' •*ucEAsaoRii~n jwagewr*
-rfflonngioH • ^Igxo^.
Flammaole liquid
JJ.O.S.
ADQIT10NAL
DESCRIPTION
REQUIREMENTS
FOR
RADIOACTIVE
MATEHIALS
(SEE BACK)
LIMITED QUANTITY LAB S
Flammable
Liquid
AMPLES
SUB3H31AHV
^S-Rigx:
UN 1993
CIUIGO AIRCHAFT ONLY
-<3UAMT7Trt
rMKZHOCTTORS
16 8-oz.
. SEZAXIDNSCV
•¦sa't
rp»
~ wh»ti i
QTOJ.OW II
qyeuqwm
~ *o*i
-S
\
TRANSPORT
OETAILS
THIS SHIPMENT IS WITHIN THfi
LIMITATIONS PRESCRIBED FOB
PASSENGEA
AIRCRAFT
fCAflGO
aircraft only)
(OeLETE-NONAPPUCABLf)
\
3
AiflPOAT Of QEPAATUflf
A|R*0«T Qf OUTlHAriON
SHIPMENT W .
TYP« ^
NON-flAOIOACTTVl
5
fl*OIO*CTTVE
(OeLETE-NON/MfLICABLE)
iF ACCEPTABLE FOR PASSENGER AIRCRAFT. THIS SHIPMENT CONTAINS RAOIOACTIVE MATERIAL INTENOEO FOR USE IN. OR
INCIDENT TO. RE5EARCH. MEDICAL DIAGNOSIS OR TREATMENT
I HEREBY DECLARE THAT THE CONTENTS OF THIS CONSIGNMENT ARE FULLY ANO ACCURATELY DESCRIBED ABOVE BY PROPER
SHIPPING NAME ANO ARE CLASSIFIED. PACXED. MARKED. ANO LABELED. ANO ARE IN ALL flESPECTS IN PflOPEH CONDITION FOR
TRANSPORT BY AIR ACCORDING TO THE APPLICABLE INTERNATIONAL ANO NATIONAL GOVERNMENT REGULATIONS.
sa**< AHO NTXE Of SHIPPER
Your name/Title
PLACE ANQ OATE
gUEAQEMTT TELEPHONE NUM8CA
Field or office ;/
i siQMATune of SHipeen
SEE WARNING
ON BACX
5-26
-------
FIGURE 5-12
SAMPLE SHIPMENT LABEL EXAMPLES
QOTHazardous Materials Warning. Labels
V
'^7
, #>:
¦\«i« .
—V
t
A-,
& ¦
v V
hi uatea.
2t Vrv oerson wno crtera a nazarooua nwanv
'or iwjuunt mm mom tne oaoraoe. a
reana 1 Sec. 172.4GCU4
3. Lao— ffwoe tfftawq to oacwaqee imn
inougn not reoureo ov tne requaoomi
oremaa teen laoei racrejenia a naxaro of
innnnmifl me oacxage. |Sec. 172.4011
4, LafleiMMA8L£
S0U0 aiw OANGSTOUS wne< WET Uotrm
(Sac. 17Z403UX4M
10* Ma1w1at aa a Potaon fl. RannuflM
' FlammaoM SoUd. or Oxjalzar tnai
aaommii ina uauauon of a Canan
iiiauiiai mm oa momma CCRROS1VE in
aooaon to tna aasa iao«L ISac. l7Z402Iali
inreugn tsi|
This Chart does not include all of the
labeling reautrements. Fcr aetails. rerer
to tne Coce or Fecerai Regulations.
Title 49. Fart 172. Sec.1.72.4CC throucn
172.-U6.
aiDeocrrmenror BortsDoronon
R®Mcrcn and So*aal Programs
Admrnmronon
Materials uanjoorration dureau
Qflca oi Ocennons ana Sntarcsmem
.vasninaton, 0 C. Z3590
CkSft 7 J una 1931
5-27
-------
TABLE 5-2
DOCUMENTATION AND SHIPPING LABEL SUMMARY
Required
Documentation
Low Level Medium Level High Level Dioxin
Samples Samples Samples Samples
EPA SampleTags/Labels
EPA Sample Seals
Traffic Report Form«;
Organic/Inorganic
Dioxin Shipment Record
Chain-of-Custody
EPA Request for Analysis
Federal Express Airbill
Federal Express
Restricted Articles
Airbill
Chain-of-Custody Seals
(on cooler)
"Fragile" and "This End
Up" Stickers
"Danger/Peligro" Stickers
"Flammable Solid, NOS"
Stickers
"Flammable Liquid, NOS"
Stickers
"Limited Quantity Lab
Samples" (on cooler)
X
X
If appli-
cable
X
X
If appli-
cable
If appli-
cable
If appli-
cable
X
X
If appli-
cable
If appli-
cable
If appli-
cable
X
X
X
X
If Appli-
cable
5-28
-------
samples containing specific reagents as preservatives are exempt, pro-
vided the reagents do not exceed a specified concentration in the sample
(Table 5-3).
Sample containers must have a completed sample identification tag.
The outside container must be marked "Environmental Samples". The ap-
propriate side of the container must be marked "This End Lip" and arrows
should be drawn accordingly. No other marking and labeling is required.
No DOT shipping papers are required. There are no DOT restrictions on
mode of transportation.
5.7.2 Medium and High Level Samples
Samples not determined to be environmental samples or samples known
or suspected to contain hazardous materials must be considered hazardous
substance samples and be transported according to the DOT requirements.
If the material in the sample is known or can be identified, then pack-
age, mark, label, and ship according to the specific instructions for
that material (if it is listed) in the DOT Hazardous Materials Table,
49 CFR 172.101.
If a hazardous sample is of unknown content, then select the appro-
priate transportation category according to the DOT Hazardous Materials
Classification (Table 5-4), a priority system of transportation cate-
gories. The correct shipping classification for an unknown sample is
selected through a process of elimination. The sample is classified
into one of six hierarchial hazard categories based on the available
information concerning the nature of the sample. These categories, in
order from highest to lowest hazard, are:
Radioactive material
Poison A
Flammable gas
Nonflammable gas
Flammable liquid
Flammable solid
Each sample is considered to be in the highest possible category until
proven otherwise. Although other categories exist below flammable
liquids and solids, unless some analytical information is available, all
hazardous material samples must be considered at least as being poten-
tially flammable.
The sample is considered radioactive unless it is known or demons-
trated to be nonradioactive (through the use of radiation survey instru-
ments), and the appropriate shipping regulations for Radioactive
Material are followed. If the Radioactive Material category can be
eliminated, the sample is considered to contain Poison A materials
(Table 5-5), the next category on the list. Materials classed as Poison
A are extremely dangerous poisonous gases or liquids o£ such a nature
that a very small amount of gas, or vapor of the liquid, mixed with air
is dangerous to life. Many Poison A materials are gases or compressed
gases and would not be found in drum-type containers. Liquid Poison A's
would probably be found only in closed containers. However, all samples
5-29
-------
TABLE 5-3
CONCENTRATIONS OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS USED AS
PRESERVATIVES IN WATER SAMPLES THAT ARE EXEMPT FROM
DOT HAZARDOUS MATERIALS REGULATIONS
1. HCl in water solutions at concentrations of 0.04% by weight or
less.
2. HgC^ vater solutions at concentrations of 0.004% by weight or
less.
3. HNO^ in water solutions at concentrations oE 0.15% by weight or less.
4. H^SO, in water solutions at concentrations of 0.35% by weight or
less.
5. NaOH in water solutions at concentrations of 0.08% by weight or less.
6. ^3*^4 *n water solutions at concentrations yielding a pH range
between 4 and 2.
(From Letter of Understanding Between EPA and DOT, April 11, 1979)
5-30
-------
TABLE 5-4
DOT HAZARDOUS MATERIAL CLASSIFICATION (49 CFR 173.2)
1. Radioactive material
2. Poison A
3. Flammable gas
4. Nonflammable gas
5. Flammable liquid
6. Oxidizer
7. Flammable solid
8. Corrosive material (liquid)
9. Poison B
10. Corrosive material (solid)
11. Irritating material
12. Combustible liquid (in containers having capacities exceeding
110 gallons)
13. ORM-B
14. ORM-A
15. Combustible liquid (in containers having capacities of 110
gallons
or less)
16. ORM-E
5-31
-------
TABLE 5-5
DOT LIST OF CLASS "A" POISONS (49 CFR 172.101)
Material
Arsine
Bromoacetone
Chloropicrin and methyl chloride mixture
Chloropicrin and nonflammable, nonliquified
compressed gas mixture
Cyanogen chloride
Cyanogen gas
Gas identification set
Gelatin dynamite (H.E. Germaine)
Grenade (with Poison "A" gas charge)
Hexaethyl tetraphosphate/compressed gas mixture
Hydrocyanic acid (prussic) solution
Hydrocyanic acid, liquefied
Insecticide liquefied gas containing Poison "A"
or Poison "B" material
Methyldichloroarsine
Nitric oxide
Nitrogen peroxide
Nitrogen tetroxide
Nitrogen dioxide, liquid
Parathion/compressed gas mixture
Phosgene (diphosgene)
Physical State at
Standard Temperature
Gas
Liquid
Gas
Gas
Gas (>13.1°C)
Gas
Gas
Gas
Liquid
Gas
Gas
Liquid
Gas
Gas
Gas
Gas
Gas
Liquid
5-32
-------
taken from closed drums do not have to be shipped as Poison A's, which
provides for a "worst case" situation. Based upon available informa-
tion, a judgment must be made whether a sample from a closed container
is a Poison A.
If Poison A can be eliminated as a shipment category, the next two
classifications are Flammable or Nonflammable Gases. Gases will be in
cylinders and are often labeled as to their flammability. If not
labeled, the gases should be shipped as Flammable Gases.
Since few gas samples are collected at hazardous waste sites or
responses, Flammable Liquid or Solid would be the next applicable cate-
gories. With the elimination of Radioactive Material, Poison A, Flam-
mable Gas, and Nonflammable Gas, the sample can be classified as Flam-
mable Liquid (or Solid)1 and shipped accordingly. These procedures would
also suffice for shipping any other samples potentially classified below
Flammable Liquid/Solid in the DOT classification table.
For samples containing unknown materials, the other categories
listed below Flammable Liquid/Solid are generally not considered because
eliminating other substances as flammable liquids requires flashpoint
testing, which may be impractical and possibly dangerous at a site.
Thus, unless the sample is known to consist of a material listed below
Flammable Liquid/Solid on the table, it should be considered a Flammable
Liquid (or Solid) and be shipped as such.
5.7.3 Radioactive Material
DOT regulations require strict procedures for the transportation of
radioactive materials. Unknown radioactive samples may not be trans-
ported, according to DOT regulations, because radioactive materials must
be classified and typed. Radioactive class is based on the amount of
fissile material and/or millirem measure. Radioactive type is based on
the activity of the particular material. In addition, the name of each
radionuclide in the radioactive material must be identified prior to
shipment. Prior to the collection of radioactive samples, a radiation
specialist should be consulted to provide guidance concerning personnel
protection, sampling techniques, and packaging and shipping require-
ments.
5.7.4 Poison A
Applying the word "poisonous" to a sample does not imply that it
is, in fact, poisonous, or indicate how poisonous it might be. It
simply describes the class of packaging required by DOT regulations.
All samples identified as Poison A materials should be treated by the
following procedures.
5.7.4.1 Packaging
Place samples in a 'polyethylene or glass container with an outer
diameter narrower than the valve hole on a DOT specification
S3A1800 or #3AA1800 metal cylinder. To prevent leakage, fill
the container no more than 90 percent full (at 130°F).
5-33
-------
• Attach a string or flexible vire to the neck, of the sample con-
tainer; lower it into a metal cylinder partially filled with
noncombustible, absorbent cushioning material (e.g., diatoma-
ceous earth or vermiculite). Place only one container in each
metal cylinder. Pack the cylinder with enough absorbing
material between the bottom and sides of the sample container
and the metal cylinder to prevent breakage and to absorb any
leakage. After the cushioning material is in place, drop the
end of the string or wire into the cylinder valve hole.
Replace valve, torque to 250 foot-pound (for 1-inch opening),
and replace valve protector on metal cylinder, using Teflon
tape.
Place one or more cylinders in a DOT-approved outside container.
5.7.4.2 Marking/Labeling
Use abbreviations only where specified.
Place the following information, either hand printed or in label
form, on the side of the cylinder or on a tag wired to the
cylinder valve protector:
"Poisonous Liquid, n.o.s. NA1955" or "Poisonous Gas, n.o.s.
NA1955".
Laboratory name and address.
- DOT label "Poisonous Gas" (even if sample is liquid) on
cylinder.
Put the same information on the outside container as on the
metal cylinder.
Print "Laboratory Sample" and "Inside Packages Comply With
Prescribed Specifications" on top and/or front of the outside
container. Mark "This Side Up" on top of the container and up-
ward-pointing arrows on all four sides.
5.7.A.3 Shipping Papers
Use abbreviations only as specified.
Complete carrier-provided bill-of-lading and sign certification
statement (if carrier does not provide, use standard industry
form). Provide the following information in order listed (one
form may be used for more than one exterior container):
"Poisonous Liquid, n.o.s." as proper shipping name.
"Poison" just after proper shipping name.
- UN1955.
5-34
-------
- Net weight or net volume (weight or volume may be abbrevi-
ated), and type of packaging.
- Include reference to the section of DOT regulations covering
the hazardous class (from Hazardous Materials Table 172.101).
- Additional handling information, if applicable.
Include a chain-of-custody record, properly executed, in the
container or with the cylinder if legal use of samples is re-
quired or anticipated.
Accompany shipping container to carrier and, if required, open
the outside container(s) for inspection.
5.7.4.4 Transportation
Transport unknown hazardous substance samples classified as
Poison A only by ground transport or government-owned aircraft.
Do not use air cargo, other common-carrier aircraft, or rented
aircraft.
5.7.5 Flammable Gas
Applying the word "flammable gas" to a sample does not imply that
it is in fact flammable, or indicate how flammable it might be. The
word describes the class of packaging required by DOT regulations. This
DOT classification also is applicable to commercial flammable gas pro-
ducts, therefore handling requirements are identical to those for flam-
mable gas samples. All samples or products identified as flammable gas
should be handled with the following procedures.
5.7.5.1 Packaging
All flammable gas samples and products must be contained in D0T-
approved compressed gas cylinders.
Cylinders must be packed in a strong outside container such as a
plastic case or corrugated cardboard box. A means to protect
the cylinder valve must also be provided.
5.7.5.2 Marking/Labeling
Use abbreviations only where specified.
Place the following information, either hand printed or in label
form, on the outside container:
- Name and address of destination.
"Flammable gas, n.o.s. UN1954".
Not otherwise specified (n.o.s.) is not used if the flammable
5-35
-------
gas is identified. The name of the specific material is
listed before the category (e.g., Hydrogen, Flammable Gas)
followed by its appropriate United Nations number found in
the DOT Hazardous Materials Table (172.101).
"Cargo Aircraft. Only". (Certain commercial flammable gas
products granted a DOT exemption may be shipped by passenger
aircraft provided the exception notice is transported with
the gas and the shipment is approved by the pilot of the air-
craft. )
- "Inside containers comply with prescribed regulations".
5.7.5.3 Shipping Papers
Use abbreviations only where specified.
Complete carrier-provided bill-of-lading and sign certification
statement (if carrier does not provide, use standard industry
form). Provide the following information in the order listed
(one form may be used for more than one exterior container):
"Compressed Gas, n.o.s." (or name of specific compound, if
known). If material is being shipped under a DOT exemption,
then the DOT exemption number must appear below the proper
shipping name.
- "Flammable Gas" and "Cargo Aircraft Only".
"UN1954" or UN number for specific compound if known.
- Net weight or net volume (weight or volume may be abbrevi-
ated) and type of packaging.
Include reference to the section of DOT regulations covering
the hazard class (from Hazardous Materials Table, 172.101).
- Additional handling information, if applicable.
Include chain-of-custody record, properly executed, in outside
container if legal use of samples is required or anticipated.
Accompany shipping containers to carrier and, if required, open
outside container(s) for inspection.
5.7.5.4 Transportation
Transport all flammable gases by rented or common-carrier truck,
railroad, or express overnight package service.
Do not transport by any passenger-carrying air transport system,
even if they have cargo-only aircraft. Regulations permit regu-
lar airline cargo-only aircraft but difficulties with most
suggest avoiding them. Instead, ship by airlines that only
5-36
-------
carry cargo.
When transporting by government-owned vehicle, including air-
craft, DOT regulations do not apply. Personnel should still use
procedures described here, except for execution of the bill-of-
lading with certification.
For overnight package services, determine weight restrictions -
at least one service limits weight to 70 pounds per package.
5.7.6 Nonflammable Gas
Applying the word "nonflammable gas" to a sample implies that it is
in fact nonflammable. The word describes the class of packaging re-
quired by DOT regulations. This DOT classification also is applicable
to commercial nonflammable gas products and handling requirements are
identical to nonflammable gas samples. All samples or products identi-
fied as nonflammable gas should be handled with the following proce-
dures .
5.7.6.1 Packaging
All nonflammable gas samples and products must be contained in
DOT-approved compressed gas cylinders.
Cylinders must be packed in a strong outside container such as a
plastic case or corrugated cardboard box. A means to protect
the cylinder valve must also be provided.
5.7.6.2 Marking/Labeling
Use abbreviations only where specified.
Place the following information, either hand printed or in label
form, on the outside container:
- Name and address of destination.
"Nonflammable gas, n.o.s. UN1956".
- Not otherwise specified (n.o.s.) is not used if the nonflam-
mable gas is identified. The name of the specific material
is listed before the category (e.g., compressed air, Nonflam-
mable Gas) followed by its appropriate United Nations number
found in the DOT Hazardous Materials Table (172.101).
Inside containers must comply with prescribed regulations.
5.7.6.3 Shipping Papers
Use abbreviations only where specified.
Complete carrier-provided bill-of-lading and sign certification
statement (if carrier does not provide, use standard industry
5-37
-------
form). Provide the following information in the order listed
(one form may be used for more than one exterior container):
"Compressed Gas, n.o.s." (or name of specific compound, if
known). If material is being shipped under a DOT exemption,
then the DOT exemption number must appear below the proper
shipping name.
- "Nonflammable Gas".
- "UN1956" or UN number for specific compound if known.
- Net weight or net volume (weight or volume may be abbrevi-
ated) and type of packaging.
- Include reference to the section of DOT regulations covering
the hazard class (from Hazardous Materials Table, 172.101).
Additional handling information, if applicable.
Include chain-of-custody record, properly executed, in outside
container if legal use of samples is required or anticipated.
Accompany shipping containers to carrier and, if required, open
outside container(s) for inspection.
5.7.6.4 Transportation
Transport all nonflammable gases by rented or common-carrier
truck, railroad, express overnight package service, cargo carry-
ing aircraft, or passenger carrying aircraft.
Transport by government-owned vehicle, including aircraft. DOT
regulations do not apply, but personnel should still use pro-
cedures described here, except for execution of the bill-of-
lading with certification.
For overnight package services, determine weight restrictions -
at least one service limits weight to 70 pounds per package.
5.7.7 Flammable Liquids/Solids
Applying the word "flammable" to a sample does not imply that it is
in fact flammable, or indicate how flammable it might be. The word
describes the class of packaging required by DOT' regulations. All
samples identified as Flammable Liquids or Flammable Solids should be
handled with the following procedures.
5.7.7.1 Packaging
Place sample container in a 2-ml thick (or thicker) polyethylene
bag, one sample per bag. Position identification tag so it can
be read through the bag. Seal the bag.
5-38
-------
Piace the sealed bag inside a metal can and cushion it with
enough noncombustible, absorbent material (e.g., vermiculite or
diatomaceous earth) between the bottom and sides of the can and
the bag to prevent breakage and to absorb any leakage. Pack one
bag per can. Use clips, tape, and other positive means to hold
the can lid securely, tightly, and permanently.
Place one or more metal cans into a strong outside container,
such as a metal picnic cooler or a DOT-approved fiberboard box.
Surround the cans with noncombustible, absorbent, cushioning
material for stability during transport.
5.7.7.2 Marking/Labeling
Use abbreviations only where specified.
Place the following information, either hand printed or in label
form, on the metal can:
- Laboratory name and address.
"Flammable Liquid, n.o.s. UN1993" or "Flammable Solid, n.o.s.
UN1325".
- Not otherwise specified (n.o.s.) is not used if the flammable
liquid (or solid) is identified. The name of the specific
material is listed before the category (e.g., Acetone, Flam-
mable Liquid) followed by its appropriate United Nations
number found in the DOT Hazardous Materials Table (172.101).
Place the following DOT labels (if applicable) on the outside of
the can:
- "Flammable Liquid" or "Flammable Solid".
- "Dangerous Vhen Wet" must be used with "Flammable Solid"
label if material meets the definition of a water-reactive
material or if water reactivity is unknown.
- "Cargo Aircraft Only". Must be used if net quantity of
sample in each package is greater than 1 quart (for "Flam-
mable Liquid, n.o.s.") or 25 pounds (for "Flammable Solid,
n.o.s.").
Place same information on outside shipping container as on the
can.
Print "Laboratory Samples", "This End Up", and "Inside packages
comply with prescribed regulations" clearly on top of the ship-
ping container. Put upward pointing arrows on all four sides of
the container.
5-39
-------
5.7.7.3 Shipping Papers
Use abbreviations only vhere specified.
Complete carrier-provided bill-of-lading and sign certification
statement (if carrier, does not provide, , use standard industry
form). Provide the following information in the order listed
(one form may be used for more than one exterior container):
- "Flammable Liquid, n.o.s." or "Flammable Solid, n.o.s." as
proper shipping name.
- "Flammable Liquid" or "Flammable Solid" and "Cargo Aircraft
Only" just after the proper shipping name.
- UN1993 (if flammable liquid) or UN1325 (if flammable solid).
- Net veight or net volume (veight or volume may be abbrevi-
ated) and type of packaging.
- Include reference to the section of DOT regulations covering
the hazard class (from Hazardous Materials Table 172.101).
- Additional handling information, if applicable.
Include chain-of-custody record, properly executed, in outside
container if legal use of samples is required or anticipated.
Accompany shipping containers to carrier and, if required, open
outside container(s) for inspection.
5.7.7.A Transportation
Transport unknown hazardous substance samples classified as
flammable liquids by rented or common-carrier truck, railroad,
or express overnight package service.
Do not transport by any passenger-carrying air transport system,
even if they have cargo-only aircraft. Regulations permit
regular airline cargo-only aircraft but difficulties with most
suggest avoiding them. Instead, ship by airlines that only
carry cargo.
When transporting.by government-owned vehicle, including air-
craft, DOT regulations do not apply. Personnel should still use
procedures described here, except for execution of the bill-of-
lading with certification.
For overnight package services, determine weight restrictions -
at least one service limits weight to 70 pounds per package.
5-40
-------
5.8 References
1. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. A Compendium of Superfund
Field Operations Methods. Office of Emergency and Remedial
Response. EPA/540/P-87/001. December 1987.
2. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Characterization of
Hazardous Waste Sites - A Methods Manual: Volume II Available
Sampling Methods, Second Edition. Environmental Monitoring
Systems Laboratory. EPA-600/4-84-076. December 1984.
rev. 1/04/90
5-41
-------
SECTION 6 - LABORATORIES AND ANALYTICAL REFERENCES
6.1 Program Structure and Utilization
Four avenues for sample analysis are presently available: Contract
Laboratory Program (CLP), EPA Laboratories, TAT Special Project
Laboratories, and other (Coast Guard, TAT field screening, and ERCS).
6.1.1 Contract Laboratory Program
The Contract Laboratory Program (CLP) is a national program of
commercial laboratories used by all ten EPA Regions and run by National
Program Officers. The laboratories bid on standardized contracts for
routine analyses of regular allotments of samples. Two analytical
programs: Routine Analytical Services (RAS) and Special Analytical
Services (SAS) are offered through the CLP.
6.1.1.1 Routine Analytical Services
Standardized analytical chemistry protocols, Tables 6-1, 6-2, 6-3,
and 6-4, are used to provide routine service for:
Full organic analysis:
Target compound list (TCL) organics
Volatile, base/neutral/acid, and pesticide/PCB
Fast turnaround VOA's (TCL GC/MS only)
Full inorganic analysis:
Total metals
Cyanide
Dioxin analysis:
2,3,7,8- TCDD only
Single phase soils and waters
Low, medium and high concentrations
on
Environmental samples
Single phase water and soil
Low and medium levels (<15% concentration)
Standard turnaround times are:
Organics
AO days
VOA's (Fast Turnaround) 14 days
Inorganics
Dioxin
35 days
21 days
6-1
-------
TABLE 6-1
LIST OF EPA APPROVED
INORGANIC TEST PROCEDURES
A99C9VM iMVtiaie flic
en mr
Jtd
:cr
299.1
Ancirony
oariuai
Sarrlllu*
BOVOfl
ClMiH
1
114
AlMBIBIf AA
-------
TABLE 6-1 (CONT)
LIST OF EPA APPROVED
INORGANIC TEST PROCEDURES
V.
tlaa
AA IllH
U Igcun
AJk Ilua
U furmaea
Extraction Procedure
(EP) Toxicity
iii.i
1U.J
Zlt.l
a». 2
7*10
7J11
7150
1310
1. CfJL. Iillinn tor Ouatni Mtiriit i( Vtiit and waata.
runs. 1)1).
2. AfU« AMA< W9CT. stuttftf MtBau t or tfta Cuaiaictea a< Wtttr ana
Haatawacar.. UU CdXtan. :j(9.
). m. Taa* Rttkaai far Oaluiw Ulld waatai. )« edition.
fW-444. miaaan. lf<«.
4. Uata ot Miltlaaai CH appnna aacaaaa iri availaAia in «0 en.
rart 134.3.
6-3
-------
TABLE 6-2
ua
OupMni Or
9UfftMl* Hoia
PumMif NanHial0a«i)itia
Volatxia oroanxca
Pitvf«Mi« AroMttes
Aeralaxa ana Acryiooitrii#
nmii
rattiiu c»tor»
ifUuiMUta
orftaMalBvina toavxcxdao % ?CBt
RUfOKoutica tn< Cyelxe Mtoaaa
P0lfm«l«ac Armcie Hydroearoana
Kiii«u«r«
alarm**#* Hyoroeacaaa*
9rf«M9Mav«aca Faa^eidaa
CUarxMta^ HtcAteidaa
TTtMiM Mfltlei4«a
Dlnitroaoxllao raociexdaa
C7*aamxao faaiieidao
Olttloeacoaaaca Matieidaa
SMMfi an* CtrfiaiMaaxa Pootxeidoa
CifMMtai and Uroa Poacxcxdao
orfUMicre^a roocxcxdoo
7al«tlla Orqtaiea
laaivolatlla OMUiea
3,3,7.l^TatncnAofBatftaaao p-dxoax
MlYealori&atod Olbaiio-»-
dAiuu aa« lotTeaioriaat
crmo*
401
(02
603
604
SOS
404
607
60*
609
610
61X7
6X2
1010
iota
1020
1030
• 040
1000
1010
1090
1100. 4310
• 120
1140
617*. ;u3
624
623
613
0240
1230. 8270
1210
614
619
611
627
629
610
631
612
<33
Of
cu
eu
, 622'
1 — AMlytoa potr coavaaaad claao ara not t hm a am f or all aacAoas. 5«a apoaxflc aocaod Car
iMiytaa aaaaiaM.
2 - 40CTX 131 A^aaaxi A.
3 - B9A« ?aac mtaa«i for evaluation Jolld Waaca. Jrd edition, sw-444. Novaaoar. 1314.
4 • CM. faat fiacaaai (or ifMeoQv«ntxoaai ?««*xcxaaa CAaaicaia Aaaiyaia of laoaatrxai aaa
IMI nipal waatavotar. CJA-440/1-41-0HC.
3 - CMtvan UMratary Prafraa. scitaaaac of wort in offact ic ciaa of bid
6 - Llata of aadltlooal CPA i^yrovta aauoaa aaf bo fou&a ia 40 CfH US.1.
6-4
-------
ULst
Table 6-3
Awpeen*
m« »r«
R(t«r*nc*
Paraaatar and HatWod CPA 19 71'
Acidity, *a C«C03 303.1
Mlkaimity, 4< caC03 318.1
Mmu las HI Saaalansation 330.2
titration 150.2
•iaatroda 330.3
lataaitM phaaaca 390.1
SlocAaaieal Oxy^aa oaaaira 409.1
Sroaioa titrlaacric 320.1
Fluarida alaecroda 340.2
esloroMcrie 340.1
lauutad eaapiaaoaa 340.3
Hardaaaa uitauca4 coioroaacnc 130.1
tltriaacric 130.2
pH •itctioncctc 130.1
pi papar
sail pK
tqaldshi nitro^an tas H)
titration 331.3
ifaaalaniation 331.3
alMtrsda 331.3
aataaatad phaaata 331.1
automatad bloc* di^aacar 331.2
p«tMtlontrle 331.4
Mltrata 1 tva raaqaat 3S3.3
Or^oa. diaaoivad viafclar natftod 360.2
ala«troda 360.1
Pkmii coioroaacnc (4AAP)
aaaaai 420.1
aataaatad 420.2
apactrophotoaacnc
aaaaai KAMI
mm
Tnrftidity napdaioaacrle 1(0.1
3td
flatnoda
402(4aI
401
417S
4170
417t.r
4i7a
307
4138
413C
413E
314B
423
4170
417B
417E.T
41IC
4iir
419
303X
S*-44»"
309
4244
424F
4218
42ir
9040
9041
9043
9200
9070
9071
9000
9006
9003
9007
214A
1. E7X. Mcttodi (or C&aaical Analysis at Watar a oak Waata.
EJJkr-taa/4-79-030. Hacctt. 1363.
2. Altt< AMA. wef. Staadard Mat&ada tor tt>a Cxaaxnatloa ot Watar and
Waacawacar. 14tli edltoa. 1903.
3. SM. Taat natboda (or Evaluating Solid Waata. 3rd Edition.
SV-446. aaoaaoac. 13l«
4. Lists at additional c?x approvad mac&ods ara availabia in 40
C7* 136.3.
6-5
-------
TABLE 6-4
TARGET COMPOUND LIST
Elements Identified and Measured
Inorganic Analysis
1.
Aluminum
9.
Cobalt
17.
Potassium
2.
Antimony
10.
Copper
18.
Selenium
3.
Arsenic
11.
Iron
19.
Silver
4.
Barium
12.
Lead
20.
Sodium
5.
Beryllium
13.
Magnesium
21.
Thallium
6.
Cadmium
14.
Manganese
22.
Vanadium
7.
Calcium
15.
Mercury
23.
Zinc
8.
Chromium
16.
Nickel
24.
Cyanide
VOA Compounds
1. Chloromethane
2. Bromomethane
3. Vinyl Chloride
4. Chloroethane
5. Methylene Chloride
6. Acetone
7. Carbon Disulfide
8. 1,1-Dichloroethene
9. 1,1-Dichloroethane
10. trans-l,2-Dichloroethene
11. Chloroform
12. 1,2-Dichloroethane
13. 2-Butanone
14. 1,1,1-Trichloroethane
15. Carbon Tetrachloride
16. Vinyl Acetate
17. Bromodichloromethane
18. 1,2-Dichloropropane
19. trans-1,3-Dichloropropene
20. Trichloroethene
21. Dibromochloromethane
22. 1,1,2-Trichloroethane
23. Benzene
24. cis-1,3-Dichloropropene
25. 2-Chloroethylvinylether
26. Bromoform
27. 4-Methyl-2-Pentanone
28. 2-Hexanone
29. Tetrachloroethene
3Q. 1,1,2,2-Tetrachloroethane
31. Toluene
32. Chlorobenzene
33. Ethylbenzene
34. Styrene
35. Total Xylenes
6-6
-------
TABLE 6-4 (continued)
BNA Compounds
1.
Phenol
34.
Acenaphthene
2.
bis(2-Chloroethyl)Ether
35.
2,4-Dini trophenpl
3.
2-Chlorophenol
36.
4-Nitrophenol
4.
1,3-Dichlorobenzene
37.
Dibenzofuran
5.
1,4-Dichlorobenzene
38.
2,4-Dinitrotoluene
6.
Benzyl Alcohol
39.
2,6-Dinitrotoluene
7.
1,2-Dichlorobenzene
40.
Diethylphthalate
8.
2-Methylphenol
41.
-4-Chlorophenyl-phenylether
9.
bis(2-Chloroisopropyl)Ether
42.
Fluorene
10.
4-Methylphenol
43.
4-Ni troaniline
11.
N-Nitroso-Di-n-Propylamine
44.
4,6-Dinitro-2-Methylphenol
12.
Hexachloroe thane
45.
N-Ni trosodiphenylamine(l)
13.
Ni trobenzene
46.
4-Bromophenyl-phenylether
14.
Isophorone
47.
Hexachlorobenzene
15.
2-Nitrophenol
48.
Pentachlorophenol
16.
2,4-Dime thylphenol
49.
Phenanthrene
17.
Benzoic Acid
50.
Anthracene
18.
b i s(2-Chlo roe t hoxy)Me thane
51.
Di-n-Butylphthalate
19.
2,4-Dichlorophenol
52.
Fluoranthene
20.
1,2,4-Trichlorobenzene
53.
Pyrene
21.
Naphthalene
54.
Butylbenzylphthalate
22.
4-Chloroaniline
55.
3,3'-Dichlorobenzidene
23.
Hexachlorobutadiene
56.
Benzo(a)Anthracene
24.
4-Chloro-3-Me thylphenol
57.
bis(2-Ethylhexyl)Phthalate
25.
2-Methylnaphthalene
58.
Chrysene
26.
Hexachlorocyclopentadiene
59.
Di-n-Octyl Phthalate
27.
2,4,6-Trichlocophenol
60.
Benzo(b)Fluroanthene
28.
2,4,5-Trichlorophenol
61.
Benzo(k)Fluroanthene
29.
2-Chloronaphthalene
62.
Benzo(a)Pyrene
30.
2-Nitroaniline
63.
Indeno(l,2,3-cd)Pyrene
31.
Dimethyl Phthalate
64.
Dibenz(a,h)Anthracene
32.
Acenaphthylene
65.
Benzo(g,h,i)Perylene
33.
3-Ni troaniline
Pesticide/PCB Compounds
1.
Alpha-BHC
14.
Endosulfan Sulfate
2.
Beta-BHC
15.
4,4'-DDT
3.
Delta-BHC
16.
Methoxychlor
4.
Gamma-BHC (Lindane)
17.
Endrin Ketone
5.
Heptachlor
18.
Chlordane
6.
Aldrin
19.
Toxaphene
7.
Heptachlor Epoxide
20.
Aroclor-1016
8.
Endosulfan I
21.
Aroclor-1221
9.
'Dieldrin
22.
Aroclor-1232
10.
4,4'-DDE
23.
Aroclor-1242
11.
Endrin
24.
Aroclor-1248
12.
Endosulfan II
25.
Aroclor-1254
13.
4/4'-DDD
26.
Aroclor-1260
6-7
-------
6.1.1.2 Special Analytical Services
Any deviation from RAS protocols .and deliverables or any analysis
not covered under RAS is considered a Special Analytical Services
project (SAS). SAS projects are subcontracted by Sample Management
Office (SMO). There are no standing analytical contracts or procedures.
Therefore, analytical methods and QC requirements must be supplied by
the region. SMO can provide feedback, on the analytical methods and QC
requirements.
The following are examples of SAS projects:
Unusual matrices:
Oils and tars
Air samples
Biological tissues
Organics:
2,4-D, 2,4,5-T only
Malathion, parathion
Inorganics:
Sulfate only
Hexavalent chromium only
Dioxins:
Tetra - octa CDD's and CDF's
"Normal" 2,3,7,8-TCDD using high-res mass spectrometry
Others:
Asbestos
Physical soil parameters
Ignitability
6.1.2 EPA Laboratories
The Region VIII Environmental Services Division (ESD) Laboratory
will perform the same analyses as a CLP would perform but only in small
amounts. The ESD lab will analyze up to 20 samples for VOA's, BNA's and
metals. The only matrices accepted by ESD are low level waters and
soils.
the Environmental Response Team (ERT) in Edison, New Jersey can aso
perform all types of analyses except dioxins. In order to utilize this
lab, the ERT must tie involved with the entire project including the
sample collection.
6.1.3 Special Project Laboratory
TAT is able to subcontract for all types of organic and inorganic
analyses. Laboratories are solicited to competitively submit bids on
individual projects. Rapid turnaround times are available at a premium
cos t.
6-8
-------
6.1.4 Other Laboratories
Other analytical service sources include: US Coast Guard Central
Oil ID Laboratory (COIL), TAT field screening, and ERCS.
The COIL laboratory in Groton, CT can provide oil spill source
identification using GC, HPLC, IR, and fluorescence. Normal turnaround
times are between 2 and 7 days, although quicker turnaround is
avalilable on a priority cases. A call to the Commanding Officer or a
Senior Technician must be made to initiate the priority assignment.
Routine services should follow the "Oil Spill Sample Handling and
Transmittal Guide" available through the lab.
TAT field screening includes the use of a Photovac GC for soil
vapor analysis, and x-ray flourescence (XRF) for metals in soil. The
photovac can be used to screen soil vapor samples for a variety of
chlorinated compounds and BTX. The XRF is capable of screening soil
samples for most metals with the exception of mercury.
Once the Action Memorandum has been approved, laboratory analysis
can be arranged through ERCS by subcontract. Turn around times can be
specified .and data quality objectives should be indicated.
6.2 Analysis Initiation/ Request Procedures
It is at all times the responsibility of the OSC to determine data
quality objectives and to specify the level of data quality required
when initiating an analysis request. For TAT, a sample plan check list
with laboratory parameters for each sample must be signed by the OSC,
indicating approval of the selected analytical parameters for each
sample.
Once the number and type of samples, turnaround times and analyses
to be performed have been decided, the initiation of sample analysis may
begin.
6.2.1 CLP
The CLP should be used if the analyses are RAS or SAS and the
deliverable turnaround times as stated in Section 6.1.1.1 are
acceptable.
6.2.1.1 ,RAS
To initiate an RAS request, the OSC must contact the TAT and relay
the desired analysis requirements. A lead time of one week is required
for processing through SMO. If a change in sampling dates, sample
analysis or number of samples occurs, SMO must be kept informed of the
changes. If the changes become extreme, a new subcontract may be
required with another one veek lead time.
SMO requires the following information to initiate a RAS request:
6-9
-------
Name of RSCC Authorized Requester.
• Name(s), association, and telephone number(s) of sampling
personnel.
Name, city and state of the site to be sampled.
Superfund site/spill ID (2 digit alpha-numeric code).
Dioxin tier assignment, where applicable.
Number and matrix of samples to be collected.
Type of analyses required.
Organics: full (VOA, B/N/A and pesticides/PCB) or VOA and/or
B/N/A and/or pesticides/PCB.
Inorganic: metals and/or cyanide.
Dioxin: 2,3,7,8-TCDD.
Scheduled sample collection and shipment dates.
Nature of sampling event (i.e., investigation, monitoring, .
enforcement, remedial, drilling project, CERCLA Cooperative
Agreements).
Suspected hazards associated with the sample and/or site.
Other pertinent information which may affect sample scheduling
or shipment (i.e., anticipated delays due to site access,
weather conditions, sampling equipment).
Name(s) of Regional or contractor contacts for immediate problem
resolution.
Follow up the verbal request with a written Routine Analysis
Request Form (Figure 6-1).
6.2.1.2 SAS
Lead time requirements for SAS are two weeks minimum for
straightforward analytical chemistry and six weeks minimum for large or
complex projects. A longer lead time is suggested if possible.
In addition to the information required for a RAS request, SMO
requires the following information to initiate a SAS request:
Specific analyses required and appropriate protocols and QA/QC.
Required detection limits.
6-10
-------
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
REGION VIII. DENVER. COIORADO
LABORATORY SERVICES REQUEST
PROJECT NAME
PROJECI CODE
SAMPLES COLl. BY.
DAIE_
SAMP1ES received ai laboratory by
DAIE.
DATA REVIEWED BY.
I
M I 1 i 1 M ANALYST INITIALS
SIAIION CODE
SAMPLE COLl IIME
SIAIION DESCRIPTION
AND REMARKS
CODE
PARAMEIER
—
—
—
t»1
T)
>
O
£
H
O
s
cn
M
&
<
M
O
M
in
pa
tm
o
c:
t*j
cn
H
CD
Pd
in
M
H
M
0
cj
ON
1
411 IllulU li
n(yi uamm bir«i«lH lAdlciltd. mMiH In pH In gnni Imbldllf In J HJ. ipMlllc con4uclioc« tiyimhMfCffl, u p« SIOAET
* cro
-------
Matrix spike and duplicate frequency-
Data turnaround and data format.
Justification for fast turnaround request, if appropriate.
Follow up the verbal request with a written SAS Client Request Form
(Figure 6-2).
6.2.2 .EPA Laboratories
Initiation of the ESD laboratory services may be done two ways.
The OSC may follow the same procedures as for the CLP, or the OSC can
contact the Regional Sample Control Center (RSCC) directly, Figures 6-3
and 6-4. The RSCC will need the same information as for a CLP request.
The same lead time requirements apply.
The ERT laboratory may be accessed by calling directly to the
laboratory in Edison, New Jersey.
6.2.3 Special Project Laboratory
The OSC can initiate a special project laboratory request by
contacting TAT with information equivalent to a CLP request. If any
changes- occur, TAT should be informed promptly in order that the
laboratory can be kept up-to-date. There are no set lead time .
requirements, although it is advantageous for all parties to have the
lead time as long as possible.
6.2.4 Other Laboratories
The COIL laboratory in Groton, Connecticut must be accessed by
calling the Commanding Officer or a Senior Technician directly.
The TAT field screening is arranged by contacting the TAT leader.
ERCS can be contacted to arrange for laboratory analysis through a
subcontract, similar to TAT special project laboratories (Section
6.2.3).
Information equivalent to a CLP request should be included and lead
times should be as long as possible.
6.3 References
1. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. A Compendium of Superfund
Field Operations Methods. Office of Emergency and Remedial
Response. EPA/540/P-87/001. December 1987.
2. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Test Methods for
Evaluating Solid Wastes (SW 846). Volume I, Section A: Metals,
Section B: Organics, Section C: Miscellaneous. September 1986.
6-12
-------
Environmental Protection Agency
Office of Enforcement
National Enforcement Investigations Center
Denver Federal Center, Bldg. 53, Box 25227
Denver, Colorado 80225
HAZARDOUS WASTE SAMPLE PREPARATION REQUEST
i
Region no.
Regional contact
Project iiditie
phone no.
Region
sample
no.
SAMPLE DESCRIPTION
Col lection
Date
Time
CHECK PREPARATIONS' REQUESTED
01
XJ
u
o
M co |
O K>
2 g
pa co
M H
-O M
d
m
cn
H
CO
M
M
H
Al tPiif inn:
-------
FIGURE 6-3
Hanoi nn routine analysis request ras/sas
SAMPLE CCKnDL OXKUfflAnCH Contractor:
DCS: 82= CS®1
Fan I
ROUTINE ANALTSIS arei/or SPECIAL ANALYTICAL SZS7IC2S REQUEST SUMARX
Filled out by Project Manager or Contractor Sample Control Coordinator.
SITE NAME SITE SPILL CODE OPERABLE UNIT
ACTIVITY TYPE CITT/STATE PROGRAM C "-SUPERFUND 'R'-SCTA 'S'-STATE)
EPA RPM PBCNE NO. CONTRACTOR PROJECT MANAGER
SHIPPING CONTACT/
SAMPLING TEAM LEADER PHCNE
ANTICIPATED SAMPLING ANTICIPATED SHIPPING
DATE RAS: SAS: DATE(S) RAS: SAS:._
HAS ANALYSES EnaTESTTO; (SUBMIT TO RSOC BY THE TUESDAY OF WEEK PRICR TO SAMPLDC)
INORGANICS ANALYSIS (CHECK) NO. OF SAMPLES CCNC (L.M.H)
Soil Metals CN
Water Metals CN_
ORGANICS ANALYSIS (CHECK) NO. OF SAMPLES CCNC (L.M.H)
Soli vnA BNA PEST PCB
Fast VOA (turn around days)
Water VOA BNA PEST PCB
Fast VOA (turn around days)
DIQXINS (LIST NUMBER OF SAMPLES)
Soil Water Other
SAS ANALYSES M
MATRIX/CCNC ANALYSIS(LIST) NO. OF SAMPLES
Is this request being submitted for samples collected under an EPA approved sampling plan? Yes No.
Where ts plan located:
If NO, Contractor Project Manager must sign this reauest and provide written explanation.
Project Manager (sLgnature)
Submitted co RSCC RSCC Ree d Submitted to SMO SMO Contact
6-14
-------
FIGURE 6-3 (CONT)
ROUTINE ANALYSIS REQUEST
Torn II
LABCRA1C8T ASSZOMBir and SAMPLE SHimw: dFOMAliaf
ANALYSIS REQUEST HlFCnurZCR
A. LABORATORY ASSIGNMENT. To be completed by RSCC upon notification from SMO.
(R - FAS, S - SAS) DATE RSCC RECEIVED LAB ASSIGNMENTS FRCM SMCL
INORGANIC
ORGANIC
R
S
'ft1
R
S
m
fr)
R
S
m
fri)
R
s
(p
(*)
R
s
rw
(fl
R
s
rn
B. SAMPLE SHIPPING INFORMATION. To be completed by Field Team* CSCC< or sample shipper and called Into
RSCC as soon as samples are shipped (no later that the following morning, if shipping is completed
after 5:00 EST). More than one shipping day can be Included on form if space allows.
No. Cone/ Date # Days
Lah Shipped Hatrix RAS (T nr OWSAS Analvspg Shtppgrf Data Dtie AlrhlLl fin.
SHIPPINC INFO CALLED INTO SMO/RSCC (date) SAMPLE SHIPPER (signature).
DATE COMPLETED FORM SENT TO CSCC CSCC (initials)
DATE COMPLETED FORM RETURNED TO RSCC DATE RSCC RECEIVED FORM
Notes:
6-15
-------
FIGURE 6-4
SPECIAL ANALYTICAL
SERVICES CLIENT REQUEST
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
CLP Sample Management Office
209 Madison Street - Alexandria, Virginia 22314
Phone: 703/557-2490 - FTS/557-2490
SPECIAL ANALYTICAL SERVICES
Client Request
Regional Transmittal
Telephone Request
A. EPA Region/Client:
B. RSCC Representative:
C. Telephone Number:
D. Date of Request: _
E. Site Name:
F. City, State:
G. Spill code:
H. EPA RPO:
I. Date of Sample Plan completion:
Please provide below description of your request for Special Analytical
Services under the Contract Laboratory Program. In order to most effi-
ciently obtain laboratory capability for your request, please address
the following considerations, if applicable. Incomplete or erroneous
information may results in a delay in the processing of your request.
Please continue response on additional sheets, or attach supplementary
information as needed.
1. General description of analytical service requested:
2. Definition and number of work units involved (specify whether whole
samples or fractions; whether organics or inorganics; whether aque-
ous or soil and sediments; and whether low, medium or high concen-
tration) :
6-16
-------
FIGURE 6-4 (CONT)
SPECIAL ANALYTICAL
SERVICES CLIENT REQUEST
3. Purpose of analysis (specify whether Superfund (enforcement or re-
medial action), RCRA, NPDES, etc.):
4. Estimated date(s) of collection:
5. Estimated Date(s) and method of shipment:
6. Number of days analysis and data required after laboratory receipt
of samples:
7. Analytical protocol required (attach copy if other than a protocol
currently used in this program):
8. Special technical instructions (if outside protocol requirements,
specify compound names, CAS numbers, detection limits, etc.):
9. Analytical results required (if known, specify format for data
sheets, QA/QC reports, Chain-of-Custody documentation, etc.)- If
not completed, format of results will be left to program discre-
tion.
10. Other (use additional sheets or attach supplementary information,
as needed):
11. Name of sampling/shipping contact:
Phone:
6-17
-------
12. Data Requirements
Parameter
FIGURE 6-4 (CONT)
SPECIAL ANALYTICAL
SERVICES CLIENT REQUEST
Detection Limit
Precision Desired
(±X or Concentration)
13. QC Requirements
Audits Required
Limi ts
Frequency of Audits (Percent/Concentration)
14. Action Required if Limits are Exceeded
Please return this request to the Sample Management Office as soon as
possible to expedite processing of your request for special analytical
services. Should you have any questions or need any assistance, please
contact your Regional representative at the Sample Management Office.
6-18
-------
3. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Test Methods for
Evaluating Solid Wastes (SW 846). Volume II. September 1986.
4. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. User's Guide to the
Contract Laboratory Program (CLP). Attachment A, Statement of
Work (SOW): Inorganics Analysis/Organics Analysis/Dioxin
Analysis. December 1987.
rev. 1/10/90
6-19
-------
APPENDIX A
SITE SAFETY PLAN FORMAT
-------
-------
SIC* Hiatory/Deecriptioa and unusual Features (see Saaplia? Plaa for detailed deecriptloa):
Location* of Cbeaieals/Vaates:
Estiaated 7oluae of Chealcala/Wastas:
Sita currently la Operation Tes: { 1 Rot ( ]
e. hump mnmn
List Hazards by Task (i.e., drua saapling, drilling, ate.) «ad auaber thea. (Task nuabers are cross-referenead
in Section 0)
Physical Hazard Evaluation: _____
Chealcal Hasard Evaluation:
Compound
pel/twa
Route
of Exposure
Acute
Syaptoaa
Odor
Threshold
Odor
Description
[tote: Csapleta and attach a Hazard Evaluation Sheet (or aa]or known eontaamant.
Pag* 2 of 9
-------
D. SItl URR nu PL»
Site Control: Attach up, us* back of thi» paq*, or ikateh of ait* sbovinq hot ton*, contamination reduction,
zona, ate.
Pariaatar identified? [ ] Sita secured? I }
Work kirn** Daaignatad? ( 1 2on«23%, explosive ataosphere >10% LEL, organic vapors above background lavala,
particulatea > ag/a , other .
a Laval C: 0^ <19.5% or >23%, axploaiva atmosphere >23% LEX,, (Calif ornia-20%) , unknown organic vapor (in
breathinq jone) >3 ppa, particulataa > ng/a , othar .
a Laval 3: 02 <-19.3% or >23%, axploaiva atmosphere >23% LEX. (Calif ornia-20%), unknown organic vapors (in
breathinq zona) >300 ppa, particulataa > mq/a , othar .
• Laval A: O. <19-3% or >25%, explosiv* ataosphere >25% UL (California-20%), unknown organic vapsrt
>508 ppa, particulate* > ag/» , othar.
Air Monitoring (daily calibration unlaaa otherwise notad):
Contaminant of Intaraat
Typa of Saapla
(araa, paraonal)
Monitoring
Equipaant
Frequency of
Sampling
(Expand if necessary!
Oacontaaination Solutions and Procedures for Equipaent, Sampling Gaarj ate.:
faga 3 of 9
-------
Personnel Decon Protocol:
Decon Solution Monitoring Procedurea, if Applicable:
Special Sit* Equipment. Facilities, or Procedures (Sanitary Facilities and Lighting
Must Meet 29 era 1910.120):
Sita Entry Procedures and Special Considerations:
Work Limitations (time of day, weather conditions, ate.) and Heat/Cold Strass Requirements:
8«ncal Spill Control, if applicable:
Investigation-Derived Material Disposal (i.a., expendables,~ dacon waste, cuttings):
Saaple Handling Procedures Including Protective wear:
Teaa Hanber*
Responsibility
Taaa Leader
Site Safety Officer
•Ml entries into exclusion zone require Buddy Systaa use. All E 4 E fiald staff participate in aedical
aonitorjnq proqraa and have completed applicable training per 29 cm 1910.120. Respiratory protactian propria
neets requirements of 29 CrS 1910.134, and ANSI 133.2 (1980).
Page o1 9
-------
t. MUUUCT UltlMUTlOT
(Usa supplaaantal shaata, if nacaaaary)
LOCAL KKSOtntCZS
(Obtain a local talaphona book from your hotal, if peaaibla)
Aabulanca
Ho«pital Eaargancy gooa _________________________________________
Poison Control Cantar
Police (include local, county sheriff, stata)
Fire Dapartaant
Airport ______________________________
Agency Contact (EPA, Stata, Local USCQ, ate. ) ___________
Local Laboratory
UPS/Tad. Sxprasa
Cliant/EPA Contact _____________________________
Site Contact
SITS VSOOHOCS
Sita Energency Evacuation Ala ra Method ______________
Water Supply Sourea
Talaphona Location, »unber _____________________
Callular Phone, if available __^___^______^_______i___
Radio
Othar
KNUtUESCT CORACTS
1. Dr. Rayaond Harbison (Univ. of Florida)
Alachua, Florida
2. Ecology and Environaent, Inc., Safety Oiractor
Paul Jonaaxre
3. Rational Office Contact
4. FITOM, TATOM, or Offica Manager
(501) 221-0465 or (904) 462-3277, 3281
(501) 370-8263 (24 hours)
(716) 684—8060 (offica)
(715) 655-1260 (hoaa)
(hoaa )
(offica)
(hoaa)
Paga S of 9
-------
1. Twenty-four hour anav«ring aervice: (301) 370-4263
what to repoct:
- State: "this is an emergency.
- Tear nane, region, and site.
Telephone number to reach you.
- Tour location.
- Nane of parson injured or exposed.
- Rttvn of eaergeney.
- Action taken.
2. A toxicologist, (Drs. Raymond Harbison or associate) will contact you. Repeat the information given to the
answering service.
3. If a toxicologist does not return your call within IS ainutes, eail the following parsons in order until
contact is aade:
«. 24 hoar hotline - (716) 6<4>«940
b. Corporate Safety Director - Paul Jonaaire - hoae * (716) 655-1260
c. Assistant Corp. Safety Officer - Steven Sheraan - hoae * (716) 688-0084
DOOKSCT BOUTXS
(SOH: field Xeea Bust Know Route
-------
t. (QumnT * »" " tct
wtmmim gkar
Laval A
So.
Laval B
Ho.
3CBA
SCBA
SPARS AIR TASKS
SPAM AIR TASKS
KSCAPSUIATISO SUIT (TW )
PROTECTIVE COVERALL
-------
ZBSTraonrxo.
No.
DfOOa BQOZVHSBT
Wo.
OVA
MASH TUBS
thermal desorser
BUCKETS
oz/explosimeter w/cal. kit
SCRUB BRUSHES
PHOTOVAC TIP
PRESSURIZES SPRAYER
HNu (Proba )
DETERSEST (Typa )
MMMKTOnETES
SOLVENT (Typa )
PXPt LOCATOR
PLASTIC SHEETZSC
WEATHER STATION
TARPS AND POLES
DRABSER PUMP, TUBES
TRASH SAGS
SRUHTON CO HP ASS
TRASH CARS
NOHXTOX CT ASIDE
MASKING TAPE
HEAT STRESS MONITOR
DUCT TAPE
NOISE EQUIPMENT
PAPER TOWELS
PERSONAL SAMPLING PUMPS
PACK MASK
FACE MASK SANITIZER
FOLDING CHAIRS
STEP LADDERS
radiation soozfieuc
OISTILIXD WATER
DOCUMENTATION FORMS
PORTABLE RATEMETER
SCALER/RATEMETER
SAMPUSQ EQUIPMENT
Sal Proba
8 QZ. BOTTLES
ZnS Proba
HALF-GALLON BOTTLES
SM Pancaka Proba
TOA BOTTLES
CM Sid* Window Proba
STRING
MICRO R METER
HAND BAILERS
ION CHAMBER
THIEVING RODS WITH BULBS
ALERT DOSIMETER
SPOONS
POCKET DOSIMETER
KNIVES
FILTER PAPER
PZRST AID EQUIPMENT
PERSONAL SAMPLING PUMP SUPPLIES
riRST AID SIT
OXYGEN ADMINISTRATOR
STRETCHER
PORTABLE EVE WASH
31*000 PRESSURE MONITOR
• 1 1
FIRE EXTINGUISHER
1
Psg* a of 9
-------
VMI HJUiPHMTT
NO.
HZsaouuBoas (Cont.)
No.
TOOL KIT
hydraulic jacx
LUO WREHCH
TOW CHAIS
7AH CHECX OUT
Gaa
)il
Battary
Windshield Wash
Tira Prvasura
SHIPPIHa EQtJXPHSST
inarnr.TJunwos
COOLERS
PITCHES PUMP
PAIITT CARS WITH LIES. 7 CLIPS EACH
SUKVETOR'3 TAPS
VESHICULITE
XOO FIBERGLASS TAPE
SHIPPING LABELS
300 NYLOH ROPE
DOT LABELS: "DANGER"
NYLOH STRING
"UP"
SURVEYING FLAGS
'INSIDE CONTAINER COMPLIES ..."
FILM
"HAZARD GROUP"
WHEEL BARROW
STRAPPING TAPE
BUHO wrench
BOTTLE LABELS
SOIL AUGER
BAGGIES
PICX
CUSTODY SEALS
SHOVEL
CHAIN—Or—CUSTODY FORMS
CATALYTIC HEATER
FEDERAL EXPRESS FORMS
PROPANE OAS
CLEAR PACKING TAPE
BANNER TAPE
SURVEYING METER STICK
CHAINING PINS & SING
TABLES
WEATHER RADIO
BINOCULARS
HAGAPHONE
532
°aq« 9 of 9
-------
APPENDIX B
DEPARTMENT OP TRANSPORTATION
GUIDE FOR
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS SHIPPING PAPERS
-------
&
USOeoonrnem GUIDE FOR
oOoraoonorcn
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS SHIPPING PAPERS
Specioi Programs
Administration
The following Information has been abstracted froa the Code of Federal Regulations, Title 49,
?arti 100-177
1. DEFINITIONS
A. SHIPPING PAPER (See. 171.8) A shipping paper any be a shipping order, bill of lading,
manifest, or other shipping document serving a slallar purpose containing the information
required by Sac. 172.202, 172.203 and 172.204.
B. HAZARDOUS VASTE MANIFEST (CFH, Title 40, See. 262.20) A hazardous waste manifest Is a
document (shipping paper) on which all hazardous waste is identified. A copy of the
manifest must accompany each shipment of waste from the point of pick-up to the destination
(CTR, Title 49, Sec. 172.205)
2. SHIPPERS RESPONSIBILITY (Sec. 172.200(a)] The shipper has the responsibility to properly
prepare the shipping paper when offering a hazardous material for transport.
NOTE: For shipments of hazardous waste, the hazardous waste manifest Is the only authorized
documentation. (CFR, Title 40, Sec. 262.23)
3. HAZARDOUS MATERIALS DESCRIPTION (Sec. 172.202) The shipping description of a hazardous
material on a shipping paper must Include the following information:
A. Proper shipping name- Sec. 172.101 or See. 172.102 (when authorized);
B. The hazard class prescribed for the material in Che same section; [See exceptions
See. 172.202(a)(2)!
C. The Identification number for the material (preceded by "UN" or "NA" as appropriate); and
D. Except for empty packaging*, the total quantity (by weight, volume, or as otherwise
appropriate) of the hazardous materials covered by the description.
E. Except as otherwise provided in the regulations, the basic description in 3A, B and C
above must be shown In sequence. For example "Acetone, Flammable Liquid, UN1090.n
F. The total quantity of the material covered by one description must appear before or after
(or both before and after) the basic description as indicated In 3A, S and C above.
(1) Abbreviations may be used to specify the type of packaging, weight or volume.
Example: "40 Cyl. Nitrogen Nonflamsable gas UN 1066, 800 pounds"; nl box Cement
liquid, n.o.s.. Flammable liquid, NAI133, 23 lbs."
(2) Type of packaging and destination marks may be entered in any appropriate manner
before or after the basic description.
C. Technical and chemical group names may be entered in parentheses between the proper
shipping name and hazard class. Example: Corrosive liquid, q.o.s. (capryrl chloride),
corrosive material.
4. CENTRAL ENTRIES ON SHIPPING PAPERS (Sec. 172.201)
A. CONTENTS When describing a hazardous material on the shipping paper(s), chat description
must conform to the following requirements:
(1) When a hazardous material, including materials not subject to the regulations, is
described on the same shipping paper, the hazardous material description entries
required by Sec. 172.202 and Chose additional entries chat may be required by
Sec. 172.203.
a. Must be entered first (See Figure 1), or
b. Must be entered In a contrasting color, except that a description on a repro-
duction of a shipping paper may be highlighted, rather than printed, in a
contrasting color (these requirements apply only to the basic description
required by Sec. 172.202(a)(1), (2) and (3), (See Figure 1); or
c. Must be Identified by the entry "X** placed before the proper shipping name in.a
column captioned "HH" [the "X" may be replaced by "RQ" (Reportable Quantity),
if appropriate] See Figure 1.
(2) The required shipping description on a shipping paper and all copies chat are used
for transportation purposes must be legible and printed (manually or mechanically)
in English.
(3) Unles* it is specifically authorized or required, the required shipping description
may not contain any code or abbreviation.
8-1
-------
lit* mciirrio*
Tim*
PKUtMft llf
I* IUn—IK
HI
ItM
UH
\ .--j==.-=-r^r-. /
t7?
-j~=
]•
#•••. it**—, rummitk tn.W 91 III)
I1N M.
|
<•
CK Iitntia. (M-daaatM* U JII1M4
IM K
. 1
til*. fliaaiM M. ijj. Jiua
mn
4
Inn, MwKm; htm. •«
i« *t.
)
1
tat. ftpm f riatnf. Itnim
iiiki
|
l>
Cutaa hm
Ota.
1
CO®
S=jL
I g»m>una»" ""
HUMMUS ¦Ullltu tITIllJ UlTtS flKT
| unc Ofenrnoi
Tim *
PkUphi M
I* UbmM
I OwC
tmtm UiMi UM4. ux JMtBS —
lUti
U
hfl. Cjftea flaw
nn
a
CfL UmM. I»nmi«k U JUtlW —
IM ta.
1__. . j . | M t'Ki {Ntrtt Ctlmt
^r
ainrictTiaa
Ink itmiKtai m 1
»*•»»"» MN> aif to
kftk|«ta« kf • h(tk(kbi|
H* UMi imttl a •
UMMtfmf am.
uuims Huiitiu iiniiwaiTtunie esut
)giTjmno»|
xumooiii aittiitu minus »» ~x* m km coma
HGUXC L HAZAJtCQUS JUTMIAU USTtfl OX SHlfrtBS ftfUS
3-2
-------
a b.lipping paper suy conutn additional information concerning the material provided
the information Is not Inconsistent with the required description. Unless otherwise
permitted or required, additional Information auac be placed after the basic descrip-
tion required by Sec. 172.202(a).
a. When appropriate, the entTles "IHCO" or "1MCO Class" may be entered immediately
before or Immediately following the class entry In the basic description.
b. If a aaterlal meets the definition of more than one hazard class, the additional
hazard class or classes say be entered after the hazard class in the basic
description.
8. NAME OF SHIPPER A shipping paper for a shipment by water oust contain the name of the
shipper.
5. ADDITIONAL DESCRIPTION REQUIREMENTS (Sec. 172.203) (ALL MODES?
A. Exemptions - Each shipping paper Issued In connection with a shlpaent t&ade under an
exemption must bear Che notation "DOT-E" followed by Che exeoptlon number assigned
(Example: DOT-E 4648) and so located' that Che exeoptlon nuaber Is clearly associated with
the description to which the exeoptlon applies.
B. Halted Quantities - Descriptions for materials defined as "Limited Quantities"...must
Include the wards "Limited Quantities" or "Ltd. Qty." following the basic description.
C. Hazardous Substances
(1) If the proper shipping name for a aixture or solution that is a hazardous substance
does not identify the constituents making it a hazardous substance, the naae or naae*
of such constituents shall be entered in association with the basic description.
(2) The letters "RQ" (Reportable Quantity) shall be entered on the shipping paper either
'before or after the basic description required by See. 172.202 for each hazardous
substance. (See definition Sec. 171.8) Example: RQ, Cresol, Corrosive Material,
NA2076; or Adipic Acid, ORH-E, NA9077, Rq.
D. Radioactive Materials - For additional description for radioactive materials, refer to
Sec. 172.203(d).
E. Empty Packaging!
(1) Except for a tank ear, or any packaging that still contains a hazardous substance,
the description on the shipping paper for an empty packaging containing the residue
of a hazardous material may Include the word(s) "dPTT" or "DCTf: Last Contained
(Name of Substance)" as appropriate in association with the basic description of the
hazardous material last contained in the packaging.
(2) For empty tank cars, see Sec. 174.25(c).
(3) If a packaging, Including a tank car, contains a residue that is a hazardous substance
the description on the shipping paper shall be prefaced with Che phrase "EMPTY: Last
Contained (Name of Substance)" and shall have "RQ" entered before or after the basic
description.
F. Dangerous When Wet - The words "Dangerous When Wet" shall be entered on the shipping paper
in association with the basic description when a package covered by the basic description
is required to be labeled with a "DANCEROUS WHDf WET" label.
C. Poisonous Materials - Notwithstanding the class to which a material is assigned:
(1) If the name of the compound or principal constituent that causes the aaterlal to meet
the definition of a poison is not included in the proper shipping name for the
material, the name of that coapound or constituent shall be entered on the shipping
paper in association with the shipping description for the material.
(2) The naae of the compound or principal constituent may be either a technical naae or
any naae for the material that Is listed in the NIOSH Registry. (Registry of Toxic
Effects of Cheaical Substances. 1978 Edition) [Sec. 172.203(k)]
NOTE: For additional details, Sec. 172.203(k)
H- Exceptions: OTHER REGULATED MATERIAL (ORM - A, B, C, AND D)
(1) Shipping paper requirements do not apply to any material other than a hazardous waste
or a hazardous substance that la:
a. An ORH-A, B or C unless it is offered or intended for transportation by air or
water when it is subject to the regulations pertaining to transportation by air or
water as specified in Sec. 172.101 (Hazardous Materials Table); or
b. An ORM-D unless i-C is offered or intended for transportation by air.
8-3
-------
MOOAL REQUIREMENTS
(ADDITIONAL INFORMATION)
NOTE: In addition to the basic requirements for shipping papers, additional information is
listed for each soda.
' TRANSPORTATION BT RAIL
A. SHIPPING PAPERS (Sec. 174.24)
(1) Except ss provided io paragraph (b) of this section, no person may accept far trans-
portation by rail any hazardous material which is subject to this subchapter unless
he has received a shipping papes prepared in a manner specified in Sec. 172.200.
In addition, the shipping paper mist include a certificate, if required by
See. 172.204. However; no member of the train crev of a train transporting the
hazardous material is required to have a shippers certificate on the shipping paper
la his possession if the original shipping paper containing the certificate is in
the originating carriers possession.
(2) This subpart does not apply to materials classed as ORM-A, 8, C or 0.
B. ADDITIONAL DESCRIPTION FOR SHIPPING PAPERS (See. 172.203(g)]
(1) The shipping paper for a rail car containing a hazardous material must concain the
notation "Placarded" followed by the name of the placard required for the rail car.
(2) The shipping paper for each specification DOT 112A or 114a tank car (without head
shields) containing a flammable compressed gas must contain the notation "DOT 112A"
or "DOT 114A", as appropriate, and either "Must be handled in accordance with
FRA E.O. Ho. 5" or "Shove to rest per E.O. No. 3." v
NOTE: For additional details, refer to Part 174.
7. TRANSPORTATION BT AIR
A. SHIPPING PAPERS ABOARD AIRCRAFT (Sec. 173.32) A copy of the shipping papers required by
See. 175.30(a)(2) must accompany the shipment It covers during transportation aboard an
aircraft.
NOTE: The documents required (shipping papers and notlflcstlon of pllot-in-cooaand) may be
combined into one document If it Is given to the pllot-ln-coamand before departure
of the aircraft. [See. 175.35(b)!.
B. NOTIFICATION Of PILQT-IN-COKMANP (Sec. 175.33) The operator of the aircraft shall give
the pilot-in-comand the following information in writing before takeoff (See. 175.35):
(1) Description of hazardous material bo shipping papers (Sec. 172.202 and 172.203);
(2) Location of the hazardous material In the aircraft; and
(3) The results of the inspection requirements by Sec. 175.30(b).
NOTE: For additional details, refer to Part 175.
3. TRANSPORTATION BT WATER
A. SHIPPING PAPERS (Sec. 176.24) A carrier may not transport a hazardous material by vessel
unless Che material is properly described on the shipping paper in the manner prescribed
in Part 172.
8. CERTIFICATE (Sec. 176.27)
(1) A carrier may not transport a hazardous material by vessel unless he has received a
certificate prepared In accordance with Sec. 172.204.
(2) In the case of an import t export shipment of hazardous materials which will not be
transported by rail, highway, or air, the shipper may certify on the bill of lading or
other shipping paper that the hazardous material is properly classed, described,
marked, packaged and labeled according to Part 172 or in accordance with the require-
ments of the IMC0 Code. (See See. 171.12)
C. DANGEROUS CARGO MANIFEST (Sec. 176.30) The master of a vessel transporting hazardous
materials or his authorized representative shall prepare a dangerous cargo manifest, list,
or stowage plan. This document may noe Include a material which is not subject to the
requirements of C7R, Title 49, or the IMCO Code. This documenc must be kept in a desig-
nated holder on or near the vessel's bridge. (See Sec. 176.30 for details)
D. EXEMPTIONS(Sec. 176.31) If a hazardous material is being transported by vessel under the
authority of an exemption and a copy of the exemption is required to be on board Che
vessel, lc muse be kept vlch the dangerous cargo manifest.
NOTE; For additional details, refer to Part 176.
3-4
-------
fc. iVumtiUNAL uocntf nuti fw a jnur i,>ii r Ki t.r.s (iec.
(1) Each shipment by water must have the following additional shipping paper entries:
a. Indenclflcaclon of the type of packages such as barrels, drums, cylinders, and
boxes,
b. The number of each type of package* Including those in freight container or on
s pellet, and
c. The gross weight of each type of package or the individual gross weight of each
package.
(2) The shipping papers for a hazardous material offered for transportation by water to
any country outside the United States must have in parenthesis the technical name
of the material following the proper shipping name when the material is described
by a "n.o.s." entry in Sec. 172.101 (Hazardous Materials Table). For example:
Corrosive liquid, n.o.s. (caprylyl chloride). Corrosive material. However, for a
mixture, only the technical name of any hazardous material giving the mixture its
hazardous properties must be identified.
9. TRANSPORTATIOH BT HICHVAT
A. SHIPPING PAPERS (Sec. 177.817)
(1) Ceneral - A carrier may not transport a hazardous material unless it is accompanied
by a shipping paper that is prepared in accordance with Sec. 172.201, 172.202 and
172.203.
(2) Shipper's certification - An initial carrier may not accept hazardous materials
offered for transportation unless the shipping paper describing the material in-
cludes a shipper's certification which meecs the requirements in Sec. 172.204 of this
subchapter. The certification is not required for shipments to be transported en-
tirely by private carriage and for bulk shipments to be transported in a cargo tank
supplied by the carrier. (Sec. 177.817(c))
(3) Interlining vlth carriers by rail - A motor carrier shall mark on the shipping paper
required by this section. If It offers or delivers a freight container or transport
vehicle Co a rail carrier for further transportation: [Sec. 177.817(c)]
a. A description of the freight container or transport vehicle; and
b. The kind of placard affixed to the freight container or transport vehicle.
(4) This subpart does not apply to materials classed as an ORM-A, 2, C or D.
(5) Accessibility of shipping papers: The driver and each carrier using the vehicle
shall ensure that the shipping paper 1s readily available and recognizable by
authorities in the case of an accident or inspection. [See Sec. 177.817(e) for
details]
B. ADDITIONAL DESCRIPTION tOJL SHIPPING PAPERS [Sec. 172.203(h)] For additional descriptions*
for Anhydrous ammonia see Sec. 172.203(h)(1); Liquefied petroleum gas see
Sec. 172.203(h)(2) and Exemptions see Sec. 172.203(a).
10. SHIPPER'S CERTIFICATION (Sec. 172.204)
A. GENERAL (Except B and D below)
(1) Except as provided in paragraphs (b) and (c) of Sec. 172.204, each person who offers
a hazardous material for transportation shall certify that the material offered for
transportation is in accordance with the regulations by printing (manually or
mechanically) the following statement on the shipping paper containing the required
description:
This is to-certify that the above-named materials are properly
classified, described, packaged, marked and labeled, and are in
proper condition for transportation according to the applicable
regulations of the Department of Transportation.*
works '"herein-named" may be substituted for the words "above named",
hazardous was,te shipments, the words "and the EPA" must be added to the
of the certification. [See CFR, Title 40, Sec. 262.21(b)]
NOTE: The
•NOTE: For
end
8-5
-------
a. At* i isAflSr OUTATIOH
(1) General - Certification containing the following language nay b« used In place of
the certification required by paragraph A(l) above:
I hereby certify thee the content* of this consignment are fully
and accurately described above by proper shipping name and are
classified, packed, aarked and labeled, and In proper condition
for carriage by air according to applicable national governnental
regulation*.
(2) Duplicate Certificate - Each person who offers e hazardous material to an aircraft
operator for transportation by air shall provide tvo (2) copies of Che certificate.
(Sec. 175.30)
(3) Passenger and Cargo Aircraft - If hazardous materials are offered for transpcrtatic
by air, add to the certificate the following statement:
Thla shipment la vlthla the limitations prescribed for passenger/
cargo-only aircraft, (delete non-applicable)
(4) Radioactive Material - Each person who offers any radioactive material for trans-
portation aboard a passenger-carrying aircraft shell slga (mechanically or manually)
a printed certificate stating that the shipment contains radioactive material in-
tended for use In, or incident to, research, medical diagnosis or treatment.
MOTE: Sec See. 17S.10 for exceptions.
C. SIGNATURE - the certifications required above must be legibly signed (mechanically or
manually) by a principal, officer, partner or employee of Che shipper or his agent.
[See. 172.204(d)]
0. EXCEPTIONS - Except for a hazardous waste, no certification is required for hazardous
material offered for transportation by motor vehicle and transported:
(1) In a cargo tank supplied by the carrier, or
(2) By the shipper as a private carrier except for a hazardous material that is to be
reshipped or transferred froa one carrier to another.
(3) Ho certification Is required for the return of an empty tank car which previously
contained e hazardous material and which ha* not been cleaned or purged.
HAZAJU500S WASTE MANIFEST IHFOSMATIOH
The following information haa been abstracted froa the Code of Federal Regulations (CFR),
Title 49. Farts 100-177 and CF2, Tlele 40, Pare 262.
1. DEFINITIONS
A. HAZARDOUS WASTE MANIFEST (CFR Title 40, 1262.20)
A hazardous waste manifest is a shipping document on which all hazardous wastes are
identified.
B. SHIPPING PAPEX - A shipping order, bill of lading, manifest, or other shipping
doeusent serving a similar purpose and containing the information required by
1172.202, $172,203 and {172.204.
2. DOT HAZAROODS MATERIALS MANIFEST REQUIREMENTS (1172.205)
A. No person may offer, transport, transfer or deliver a hazardous waste unless a
hazardous waste manifest is prepared, signed, carried and given as required of chat
person by J172.205.
B. The shipper (generator) must prepare the manifest in accordance with the EPA
Regulations, CFR Tlele 40, Part 262.
C. The original copy of the manifest must be dated by, and bear the handwrlccen signa-
ture of the person representing the:
(1)" Shipper (generator) of waste at the time it is offered for transportation, and
(2) Initial carrier accepting the waste for transportation.
D. A copy of Che manifest must be dated by, and bear Che handwritten signature of the
person representing:
(1) Each subsequent carrier accepting the waste for transportation, at the clme of
acceptance, and
(2) The designated facility rerelvirg the waste, upon receipt.
B-6-
-------
E. A copy of the manifest bearing all required dates and signatures must be:
(1) Given to a person representing each carrier accepting the waate for transportation,
(2) Carried during transportation In the sane manner as required for shipping papers,
(3) Clven to a person representing the designated facility receiving the waste,
(4) Returned to the shipper (generator) by the carrier that transported the waste from
the United States to a foreign destination with a notation of the date of departure
froa the United States, and
(3) Retained by the shipper (generator) and by the Initial and each subsequent carrier
for three (3) years froa the date the waste was accepted by the Initial carrier.
Each re'lined copy must bear all required signatures and dates up to and Including
those entered by the next person who received the waste.
F. The requirements of 1172.205(d) and (3) do not apply to a rail carrier when waste is
delivered to a designated facility by railroad If:
(1) All of che Information required to be entered on the manifest (except generator
and carrier identification numbers and the generator's certification) Is entered
on the shipping paper carried ia accordance with 1174.26(c);
(2} The delivering rail carrier obtains and retains a receipt for the waste thac is
dated by and bears the handwritten signature of the person representing the
designated facility; and
(3) A copy of the shipping paper is retained for three (3) years by each railroad
transporting the waste.
C. The person delivering a hazardous waste to an initial rail carrier shall send a copy of
the manifest, dated and signed by a representative of the rail carrier, to the person
representing the designated facility.
H. A hazardous waste manifest required by C7R, Title 40, Part 262 containing all the infor-
mation required by CTR, Title 49, Subpart C, may be used as the shipping paper.
J. THE MANIFEST-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ($262.20)
A. A generator (shipper) who transports, or offers for transportation, hazardous waste
for off-site treatment, storage, or disposal must prepare a manifest before transporting
the waste off-site.
B. A generator (shipper) must designate on the manifest one facility which is permitted to
handle the waste described on the manifest.
C. A generator (shipper) may also designate on the manifest one alternate facility vhlch
is permitted to handle his waste in the event an emergency prevents delivery of the
waste to the primary designated facility*
D. If the transporter (carrier) is unable to deliver the waste to the designated facility,
the generator must either designate another facility or Instruct the transporter to
return the waste.
4. MANIFEST INFORMATION (§262.21)
A. The manifest must contain:
(1) Manifest document number;
(2) Generator's (Shipper's) name, mailing address, telephone number, and the EPA
Identification number;
(3) Name and EPA identification number of each transporter (carrier);
(4) Name, address and EPA identification number of the designated facility and an
alternate facility, if any;
(5) Description of the waste(s) (e.g. proper shipping name required by the Department
of Transportation Hazardous Material* Regulations C7R, Title 49, S172.101,
S172.202 and S172.203); and
(6) Total quantity of each hazardous waste by units of weight or volume, and the type
and number of containers loaded into or onto the transport vehicle.
B. Certification ($262.21(b) J The following certification must appear on the manifest:
"This is to certify that the above named materials are properly classified, described.
Packaged, marked, labeled and are in proper condition for transportation according
to the applicable regulations of the Department of Transportation and the EPA"
3-7
-------
COPIES OF MA.HIFSST REQUIRED ' USE or THE MANIFEST (1262.23)
A. Tha generator wii't:
-------
APPENDIX C
DEPARTMENT OP TRANSPORTATION
GUIDE FOR MARKINGS
-------
©
' 'S Deoonment
Transportation
Research and
Special Programs
Administration GUIDE FOR MARKINGS
The following Information has been abstracted from the Code of Federal Regulations
(C7R), Title 49 Transportation, Parts 100-199. Refer to the appropriate Sections
for details.
NOTE: Rulemaking proposals are outstanding or are contemplated concerning the
regulations. Keep up to date vlth the changes.
HARKING - means the application of the descriptive name, proper shipping name,
hazard class. Identification number (when authorized), instructions, cautions,
weight or a combination thereof on the outside shipping container. Harking also
Includes the specification marks for both the Inside and outside shipping con-
tainers required by the Hazardous Materials Regulations.
DESCRIPTIVE INFORMATION
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS <5172.300-172.304)
All containers of hazardous materials. I.e.
packages, freight containers, or transport
vehicles, must, unless specifically exempted,
e marked vlth the proper shipping name(s)
jf the contents and the name and address
or either the consignee or consignor. All
markings must be:
1. Durable, in English, and printed on or
affixed to the surface of the package or
on a label, tag or sign.
2. On a background of a sharply contrasting
color and unobscured by labels or attach-
ments.
Antimony Chlonde. Solid
o
To: Johnson Products Co.
1420 Main SL
Armstrong. AK S2650
3. Away from other markings that could reduce
its effectiveness.
LIQUIDS - INSIDE.CONTAINERS (§172.312)
1. Inside containers must be packed with
closures In the upright position.
2. Must be marked on the outside vlth
"THIS END UP" or "THIS SIDE UP".
3. Arrows must be used only to show orienta-
tion of package. An arrow symbol indicated
by ANSI Standard MH6.11968 "THIS WAY UP".
Pictorial (arrows) of goods is recomended.
Corrosive Liquid. N. Q.S.
Johnson Products Co.
1420 Miin St
rArmstrong. AK
S25S0
THIS SIDE UP
C-l
-------
EXPORT BY WATER ($172,302)
All n.o.s. entries, when authorized la 5172.101
or $172,102, must have Che eechnical naae(s) of
che material iaoediately following the proper
shipping naae for export by water. For mixtures
(two or more) hazardous materials, che technical
name of at least cvo components must be identified,
RADIOACTIVE MATERIALS (5172.310)
1. Containers weighing over 110 pounds (gross
weight) must be marked on the container.
2.. Must be marked "TYPE A" or "TYPE B" as
required la letters at least 1/2" high.
3. For export, the letters "USA" must follow
the specification markings or package
certification.
z
71
Carrost«« Liquid. N.O.S.
(Phosohonc Acid)
?a: Johnson Produca Co.
H2Q flu# 0« La Minn
Nice. Francs
Pim Aaatoacuv* Maianas
G.W. 983 LB*.
T*«« «. U.£_A J49Q9/K 10
To: Joo^on '"Murj C*.
lOtiMOtu Mm
•(«« ' 1-HI
OTHER REGULATED MATERIALS (ORM'S) (5172.316)
ORM materials oust be designated insnediately
following or below the proper shipping naae
marking within a rectangular border approxi-
mately 1/4 Inch larger on each side of the
designation. The appropriate designation must
be one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
ORM-A
ORM-B -KEEP
ORM-B
ORM-C
5. ORM-D
DRY 6. ORM-D-AIR.
7. ORM-E
Z
Oil«d Matanai
QRM-C
To:
Johnson Produces Co.
1420 Main St.
Armstrong. AK
S25S0
NOTE: These markings serve as the certifica-
tion by the shipper chat the material is prop-
erly described, classed, packaged, marked and
labeled (when appropriate) and in proper con-
dition for transportation. Use of this type of
certification does not preclude che requirement
for a certificate on the shipping paper [5172.3
AUTHORIZED CONTAINERS IH OUTSIDE CONTAINERS
When a DOT specification container is required for a hazardous material and that
container is overpacked in another container meeting the requirements of 5173.21
and 5173.24, che outside container must be marked in accordance with 5173.25.
EXAMPLES: "THIS SIDE UP" or "THIS EHD UP" or "INSIDE PACXAGES COMPLY WITH
PRESCRIBED SPECIFICATIONS"
CYLINDERS - All cylinders must be marked in accordance with 5173.34 and 55173.301
through 173.306. Cylinders passing reinspeccion and recescing must be marked in
accordance with 5173.34(e)(6).
¦ " '*
16(c)]
y OffM-8 ""V
.jKEE? oar
Lv-33^-V-- • J
ORM-B KEEP ORY
EXAMPLE
C-2
-------
PORTABLE TANKS (5172. 326 and $172, 332) - Portable tanks must -display the proper
shipping name in letters at lease 2 inches high and placed on two opposite sides.
Identification numbers (55171.101 and 171.102 (when authorized)J arc required on
each side and each end for capacities ol 1.C00 gallons or more and on two opposing
sides in association with the proper shipping name for capacities of less than
1,000 gallons. The name of the owner or lessee must be displayed. Tanks carrying
compressed gases (DOT-51) must have all inlets and outlets, except safety relief
valves, marked to designate whether or not they communicate with vapor or liquid.
[J178.245-6(b)].
NOTE: When different hazardous materials are transported in marked portable tanks,
the shipping name and the identification number displayed must identify the material.
CARGO TANKS - HIGHWAY (COMPRESSED GASES) (5172.328) - Cargo tanks must be marked, in
letters no less than 2 inches high, with either the proper shipping name of the gas
or an appropriate common name, such as "Refrigerant Gas". Cargo tanks must only be
marked, i.e. proper shipping name and Identification number [when authorized
(55171.101 and 171.102)] for the material contained therein. DOT MC 331 tanks must
have inlets and outlets, except safety relief valves, marked to designate whether
they communicate with liquid or vapor when the tank is filled to Its maximum per-
mitted silling density. [5178.337-9(c)].
TANK CARS - RAIL (5172.330) - Tank cars, when required to be marked with the proper
shipping name by Parts 173 and 179, must be marked in letters at least A inches high
with at lease 5/8 inch stroke with the proper shipping name or the appropriate common
name. Identification number_markings (when authorized) must be displayed on each side
and each end [55171.101 and i.71.102 (when authorized)]. Tank cars must only be
marked for the material contained therein.
NOTE: See referenced Sections for requirements for DOT-106 and DOT 110 tank car tanks.
EXAMPLE OF PLACARD AND PANEL WITH IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
NOTE: The Identification Number (ID No.) may be displayed on placards or on
orange panels on tanks. Check the sides of the transport vehicle if the ID
number is not displayed on the ends of the vehicle.
OTHER MARKING REQUIREMENTS
REQUALIFIED CONTAINERS - Reusable cylinders, portable tanks, cargo tanks and tank
cars are required to be either visually inspected or retested at periodic intervals.
When this is accomplished, the date of the requalification must be shown on the
container as required in 55173.24, 173.31, 173.32, 173.33 and 173.34.
C-3
-------
REUSE OF CONTAINERS - Sows steel containers in Che DOT Series (DOT-17C. 17E and 17H)
nay be qualified for reuse by a recondicioner of drums who is registered with Che
Department of Transportation. These drums must meet the requirements of 5173.23(m)
i.e. old labels removed, exemption number (if any) and descriptive markings removed
and the drum reconditioned. Other concainers may be reused under varying conditions.
See $173.28 for details.
CARGO HEATERS - Cargo heaters authorized for use with flammable liquid or gas must be
narked in accordance with 1177.834(1)(2)(e) and (f).
MOTOR VEHICLES - Marking of motor vehicles and special requirements are found in
§1177.823 and 177.824.
SPECIFICATION CONTAINERS
Markings on specification containers must generally identify: (1) the DOT specifica-
tion number to vhich the container is cade (Parts 178 and 179); (2) the manufacturers
narae and address'or symbol (registered with the Associate Director for the Office of
Hazardous Material Regulation). Duplicate symbols are not authorized. All containers
must comply with the marking requirements of 5173.24 and the appropriate Section(s)
of Parts 178 and 179. Exceptions for Canadian and other import/export situations
nay be found in $$171.12 and 173.8.
NOTE: For certain containers, specific detailed information such as original test
date information and type of material vhich may be required can be found in
Parts 178 and 179.
C-4
-------
APPENDIX B
ERT Computerized Sampling QA/QC Plan
-------
SAMPLING QA/QC PLAN
GENERIC
Prepared by
(CONTRACTOR)
EPA Project No.:
Contractor Work Order No.:
EPA Contract No.:
APPROVALS
(CONTRACTOR) EPA
(CTL) DATE (EPAOSC) DATE
Tisk Leader, On-Scene Coordinator
(CPM) DATE (Name) DATE
Project Manager (Title)
-------
1,0 BACKGROUND
The [suspected] contamination is a result of:
The following information is known about the site:
The site is located in the city of in the County of , in the State
of . Sec attached map, Figure 1.1.
The nearest residents are located within (ft/mi) of the site, in a (compass") direction.
Other residents or significant environments in proximity to this site are located (ft/mi)
due (compass direction) of the site.
It is a (type of facility on .(No.) acres which has/had been operating for (No.) of years
and is now abandoned since (date).
The types of material(s) handled by this facility were/are:
radioactives
acids
unknown
organic solvents
bases
petroleum
inorganics
(specify other)
The volume(s) of contaminated materials to be addressed are: (specify in
acreage, drum count volume of liquids or waste)
The contaminants of concern are: concentration ranges
to
to
__ to
to
to
The basis of this information/data may be found in:
Z0 \ OBJECTIVES
The objective of this project/sampling event is to determine:
the presence of contamination
the extent of contamination
the magnitude of contamination
the impact of contamination
the effectiveness of new sampling methods or instrumentation
(specify other)
-------
For the purpose of:
site characterization
monitoring data
engineering design
risk assessment
enforcement action
disposal
field personnel health & safety
bioassessment
compatibility
(specify other)
The data will be evaluated against:
an existing data base (specify)
federal/state action levels (specify)
permit levels (specify)
(specify other)
QUALITY ASSURANCE OBJECTIVES .
As identified in Sections 1.0 and 2.0 the objective of this project/event applies to [all] [the
following] parameters:
Parameters Matrix INTENDED USE OF DATA OA OBJECTIVE
VOA
BNA
PEST
PCB
METALS
CN
PHENOLS
(TOT HYDROCARB]
[TOT CHLORIDES]
[TOX]
[COD]
[THM]
[OTHER]
[For QA-1 data, results may be non-qualitative to semi-qualitative, non-definitive (without
confirmed) identification, in addition, they may have gross quantitation and no confidence limits.]
Methods to be employed during this event include:
spot tests
indicator tubes
paper strip tests
chemical reactions producing colors, gases, or precipitates
electronic meters (e.g. pH, conduct)
electronic detectors
photoionization
-------
electron capture
flame ionization
flame photometric
electron capture
infrared
gas chromatography
mass spectroscopy (single ion monitoring)
_ GC/MS
atomic adsorption
_ ICP
X-ray fluorescence
other
[For QA-2 data, verification of preliminary screening results will be achieved by: [choose one of the
following, delete the others]
Definitive identification (for organics only)- On at least 10% of the samples collected, analyte
identification will be confirmed by a second method, such as mass spectroscopy.
Definitive quantitation - On at least 10% of the samples collected, analyte quantitation will be
verified by alternate method or repeat of preliminary procedure; and a determination of precision,
accuracy, and confidence limits will be made on at least 1% of the samples collected using the
verification method. (This is the only verification option for inorganic parameters).
Definitive identification and quantitation (for organics only)-On at least 10% of the samples
collected, analyte identification will be confirmed by a second method, such as mass spectroscopy
and analyte quantitation will be verified by alternate method or repeat of preliminary procedure;
and a determination of precision, accuracy, and confidence limits will be made on at least 1% of
the samples collected using the verification method, determination.
[For QA-2 data, methods for confirmed identification on organics include:]
GC/photoionization
GC/electron capture
GC/flame ionization
GC/flame photometric
infrared
gas chromatography
ma« spectroscopy
_ GC/MS
[other]
[For QA-2 and/or QA-3 data, methods for definitive quantitation and determination of confidence
limits will include matrix spike duplicates.]
[For QA-3 data, the results will have definitive identification, definitive quantitation and
determination of confidence limits (precision and accuracy) on the parameters of interest for 100%
of the samples collected.]
-------
[For QA-3 data, methods to be employed for both analysis and confirmation during this event
include:
infrared
gas chromatography
, mass spectroscopy
GC/MS
atomic absorption
_ ICP
[other]
For QA-1, QA-2 and/or QA-3 data, results will be representative, comparable, and complete. QA-
1, QA-2, and/or QA-3 Objectives are further defined by requirements in Section 6.O.]
4.0 APPROACH AND SAMPLING METHODOLOGIES
4.1 Media/Matrix
This event involves the assessment of the following media/matrix:
soil/sediment
groundwater
surface water
air
waste material
soil gas
specify other
4.2 Sampling Equipment
The following equipment will be utilized to obtain environmental samples from the
respective media/matrix:
Matrix/Media Sampling Equipment Fabrication Dedicated
[4.2.1 Sampling Equipment Decontamination]
-------
[This section is optional depending upon responses under 4.2]
The following decontamination procedure will be employed prior and subsequent to sampling each
station in the following sequence:
physical removal
non-phosphate detergent wash [specify: ]
potable water rinse
distilled/deionized water rinse
10% nitric acid rinse
solvent rinse [specify: ]
solvent rinse [specify: j
air dry
distilled water rinse
organic free water rinse
4.3 Sampling Design
The sampling design is depicted on the attached Sample Location Map (Figure 4-1) and is based
on the following rationale:
4.4 Standard Operating Procedures
4.4.1 Sample Documentation
All sample documents must be completed legibly, in ink. Any corrections or revisions must be
made by lining through the incorrect entry and by initialing the error.
1. Field Log Book
The Field Log Book is essentially a descriptive notebook detailing site activities and observations
so that an accurate account of field procedures can be reconstructed in the writer's absence. All
entries should be dated and signed by the individuals making the entries, and should include (at a
minimum) the following:
1. Site name and project number.
2. Name(s) of personnel on-site. .
3. D^tes and times of all entries (military time preferred).
4. Descriptions of ail site activities, including site entry and exit times.
-------
5. Noteworthy events and discussions.
6. Weather conditions.
7. Site observations.
8. Identification and description of samples and locations.
9. Subcontractor information and names of on-site personnel.
10. Date and time of sample collections, along with chain-of-custodv information.
11. Record of photographs.
12. Site sketches.
2. Sample Labels
Sample labels must clearly identify the particular sample, and should include the following:
1. Site name and number.
2. Time sample was taken.
3. Sample preservation.
4. Initial of sampler(s).
Optional, but pertinent, information:
1. Analysis requested.
2. Sample location.
Sample labels must be securely affixed to the sample container. Tie-on labels can be used if
properly secured.
3. Chain of Custody Record
A Chain of Custody record must be maintained from the time the sample is taken to its
final deposition. Every transfer of custody must be noted and signed for, and a copy of this
record kept by each individual who has signed. When samples (or groups of samples) are
not under direct control of the individual responsible for them, they must be stored in a
locked container sealed with a Chain of Custody seaL
The Chain of Custody record should include (at minimum) the following:
1. Sample identification number.
2. Sample information.
3. Sample location.
4. Sample date.
5. Name(s) and signature(s) of sampler(s).
6. Signature(s) off any individual(s) with control over samples.
4. Chain of Custody Seals
Chain of Custody Seals demonstrate that a sample container has not been tampered with,
or opened.
The individual in possession of the sample(s) must sign and date the seal, affixing it in
such a manner that the container cannot be opened without breaking the seal. The name
of this individual, along with a description of the sample packaging, must be noted in the
Field Logbook.
-------
5. Corrective Anion
Corrective actions are those taken in response to nonconformance reports, audit findings,
or surveillance findings. The quality assurance representative is responsible for reviewing
audit reports and nonconformance reports to determine the significant or repetitious
conditions adverse to quality, or failure to implement or adhere to required quality
assurance practices. When such problems are identified, the responsible manager must
investigate the causes of the problems and define and implement the necessary actions to
correct the problems. Documentation that supports major corrective actions must be
maintained in the project files.
4.4.2 Sampling
Groundwater Well Sampling
General Air Sampling Guidelines
Drum Sampling
link Sampling
Wipe, Chip, and Sweep Sampling
Soil Sampling
Surface NV&ter Sampling
Asbestos Sampling
Sediment Sampling
Waste Pile Sampling
Soil Gas Sampling
Tfedlar Bag Sampling
Charcoal Hibe Sampling
Tenax Tube Sampling
Indoor Air Sampling
PCBs in Air
Photovac GC Analysis of Soil Gas, Water, and Soil Samples
4.43 Sample Handling and Shipment
Each of the sample bottles will be sealed and labeled according to the following protocol. Caps
will be secured with custody seals. Bottle labels will contain all required information including
-------
sample number, time and date of collection, analysis requested, and preservative used. Sealed
bottles will be placed in large metal or plastic coolers, and padded with an absorbent material
such as venniculite.
All sample documents will be affixed to the underside of each cooler lid. The lid will be sealed
and affixed on at least two sides with EPA custody seals so that any sign of tampering is easily
visible.
4.5 Schedule of Activities
(See "Ikble 1 attached)
-------
Table 1: Proposed Schedule of Work
Activi ty
(Time Period)
1.
Laboratory Procurement
2.
Sample Staging
3.
(Sampling - Soil)
4.
(Sampling • Groundwater)
5.
Laboratory Analysis
6.
Oata Review
7.
Draft Report
8.
Final Report
-------
Table 2: Field Sampling Summary
Analytical
Parameter
Level
of
Sens i t i -
vity
Matrix
Container Type
and Volune
(# container rq'd)
Preserv-
ative
Holding
Times
Subtotal
Samoles
QC Extras
Total
Field
Sarcles
krip .
Rinsate|Blanks
Blanks (VOAs)
°C 4
Posirives
Matrix
Spikes
VOA
S
40ml vial
(1)
4'C
7day
1
j
VOA
u
40ml vial
(3)
*•
4'C
7day
1
1
1
1
SNA
s
8oz glass
(1)
4*C
7/40d
I
I
j
i
j
SNA
u
32oz amber glass
(2)
4'C
7/40d
I
I
I
I
PEST
s
8oz glass
C1)
4'C
7/40d
.
PCS
s
8oz glass
(1)
4'C
7/40d
!
PEST
w
32oz aircer glass
(2)
#*
4'C
7/40d
1
1
1
PCS
u
32oz amber glass
(2)
4'C
7/40d
P.P.
METALS
s
8oz glass
(1)
4'C
£mon
P.P.
METALS
u
1 liter glass or
polyethylene
(1)
MOj ph<2
4'C
6mon
* Matrix: S-Soil, W-Water, 0-0il, OS-Drum Solid, DL-Orun Liquid, TS-Tank Solid, TL-Tank Liquid, X-Other, A-Air
** If residual chlorine is present, preserve with 0.008X NajSjOj.
1. The concentration level, specific or generic, that is needed in order to make an evaluation. This level
will provide a basis for determining the analytical method to be used.
2. Only required if dedicated sampling tools are not used. One blank required per parameter per 20 samples.
3. One trip blank required per cooler used to ship VOA samples. Each trip blank consists of tuo 40ml vials
filled with distiIted/deionized water.
4. Performance check samples; optional for QA-2, mandatory for QA-3 Level. One per parameter.
5. For QA-2: One matrix spike duplicate per lot of 10 samples; therefore, collect two additional environmental sample
volunes (water matrix) for every 10 environmental samples. For solid matrix, one additional volune per 10
environmental samples. For QA-3: Two matrix spike duplicates per lot of 10 environmental samples; therefore,
collect four additional volunes of environmental samples for every 10 samples. Collect two additional volunes of
environmental sanple for solid Matrix spikes.
-------
Table 2: Field Sampling Summary (continued)
Analytical
Parameter
Level
of
Sens i t i-
vi ty
Matrix
Container Type
and Volune
(# container rq'dj
Preserv-
ative
Holding
Tines
Sifctotal
Samples
QC Extras
Total
Field
Samoles
Rinsate
Blanks
Trl'P J
Blanks | CC
(VOAs)| jPosi:ives
Matrix
Spikes
CYAN IDS
S
8oz glass
(1)
4'C
14day
I
j
CYANIDE
w
1 liter
polyethylene
(1)
NaOH to
pH > 12
4'C
14day
i I i
I I I
PHENOLS
S
Soz glass
(1)
4'C
28day
I
I
I
I
I
I
PHENOLS
u
1 liter ameer
glass
(1)
H,SO, to
pH ^ 2
4'C
28day
I i
I I
I I
_
I
I
'
I
I
!
• Matrix: S-Soil, W-Uater, 0-0ilr DS-Orun Solid, 0l-0run liquid, TS-Tank Solid, Tl-Tank Liquid, X-Other, A-Air
** If residual chlorine is present, preserve with Q.0O8X
1. The concentration level, specific or generic, that is needed in order to make an evaluation. This level
will provide a basis for determining the analytical method to be used.
2. Only required if dedicated sampling tools are not used. One blank required per parameter per 20 samoles.
3. One trip blank required per cooler used to ship VQA samples. Each trip blank consists of two 40ml vials
filled with distilled/deionized water.
4. Performance cheek sanples; optional for QA-2, mandatory for QA-3 Level. One per parameter.
5. For QA-2: Ore matrix spike duplicate per lot of 10 samples; therefore, collect two additional environmental samole
volunes (water matrix) for every 10 environmental samoles. For solid matrix, one additional volune per 10
environmental samples. For QA-3: Two matrix spike diplicates per lot of 10 environmental samoles; therefore,
collect four additional volunes of environmental samoles for every 10 samples. Collect two aoditional volumes or
environmental sample for solid matrix spikes.
-------
5.0 PROJECT ORGANIZATION AND RESPONSIBILITIES
The EPA On-Scene Coordinator, (EPAOSQ, will provide overall direction to (CONTRACTOR) staff
concerning project sampling needs, objectives, and schedule.
The (CONTRACTOR) Task Leader, (CTL), is the primary point of contact with the EPA On-Scene
Coordinator. The Task Leader is responsible for the development and completion of the Sampling QA/QC
Plan, project team organization, and supervision of all project tasks, including reporting and deliverables.
The (CONTRACTOR) Site QC Coordinator, (COSQCC), is responsible for ensuring field adherence to the
Sampling QA/QC Plan and recording any deviations. The Site QC Coordinator is also the primary project
team contact with the lab. The following field sampling personnel will work on this project.
Personnel Responsibility
The (CONTRACTOR) QA Officer, (CQAO), Health and Safety Officer, (Name), and Project Manager,
(CHSO), are responsible for auditing and guiding the project team, reviewing the final deliverables and
proposing corrective action, if necessary, for nonconformity to the Sampling QA/QC Plan or Health and
Safety Plan.
The following laboratories will be providing the following analyses:
Lab Name/Location Lab Type Parameters
6.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS
The following requirements apply to the respective QA Objectives and parameters identified in section 3.0:
The following QA protocols apply:
(For QA-1 data)
-------
-instrument calibration and/or performance check of the given test method will be documented (field data
sheets or log notebook).
•the detection limit will be determined, unless inappropriate.
-sample documentation will be provided.
(Additional QA Protocols for QA-2 data)
•chain of custody documentation (optional for field analysis)
•sample holding time documentation
•collection and evaluation of blanks and sample replicates (Refer to Tables 2 and 3)
•instrument calibration documentation
-PE samples, if appropriate
-definitive identification: confirmed identification of analytes by a second GC column or mass spectra for 10%
of the samples collected (organics only) and provide gas chromatograms and/or mass spectra.
-definitive quantitation: verify preliminary quantitative results by reanalyzing 10% of the samples colleied and
make a determination of precision, accuracy, and confidence limits by preparing and analyzing matrix spike
duplicates on 1% of the samples collected. If the preliminary method is a field screening procedure, an
alternate, EPA approved method will be used to verify the quantitative results.
(Additional QA Protocols for QA-3 data)
-PE samples
-definitive identification: confirmed identification of analytes by a second GC column or mass spectra for
100% of the samples collected (organics only) and provide gas chromatograms and/or mass spectra.
-definitive quantitation: verify quantitative results by reanalyzing 100% of the samples collected by an
alternate EPA approved method and make a determination of precision, accuracy, and confidence limits by
preparing and analyzing matrix spike duplicates on 2% of the samples collected.
'Numbers of samples to be collected for this project/event are entered onto Tables 2 Field Sampling Summary
and Table 3 QA/QC Analysis and Objectives Summary to facilitate ready identification of analytical
parameters desired, type, volume and number of containers needed, preservation requirements, number of
samples required and associated number, and type of QA/QC control samples required based on this QA
leveL
All project deliverables will receive an internal peer QC review prior to release, as per guidelines established
in the (EPA Regional/Branch or Contractor) Quality Assurance Program Plan.
-------
Table 3: QA/QC Analysis and Objectives S urinary
Analytical
Parameter
*
Matrix
Analytical
Method Ref.
Spikes
QA/QC
Detection|
Limits OA Objective
Matrix'
Surrogate^
VOA
S
8240/SU-846
VOA
u
624/CLP
I
j
BMA
s
8250 or 8270/
SW-846
8NA
u
625/CLP
PEST
s
8080/SU-846
PCS
s .
8080/SU-846
PEST
u
608
PC8
u
60S
P.P.
METALS
s
SV-844
P.P.
METALS
u
. EPA-600/CFR 40
1
2
3
4
Matrix: S-Soil, W-Water, O-Oil, OS-Orun Solid, OL-Orun Liquid, TS-Tank Solid, TL- ank iquid, X-Ot er,
A-Air
For QA2: One matrix spike delicate analysis per lot of 10 samples. For QA3: Two matr x spike duplicate
analyses per lot of 10 samples.
Surrogate spikes analysis to be run (enter yes) for each sample in QA-2 and QA-3.
To be determined by the person arranging the analysis.
Enter OA Objective desired: QA-1, QA-2, or QA-3.
-------
Table 3: QA/QC Analysis and Objectives Summary (continued)
Analytical
Parameter
Matrix
Analytical
Method Ref.
Spikes
QAj
Detection
L i m its
'QC
OA Objective
Matrix1
Surrogate^
CYANIDE
S
SU-846
5
CYANIDE
u
SU-846
PHENOLS
s
8040/SU-&W
PHENOLS
u
604/CFR 40
•
1
2
3
4
Matrix: S-Soil, U-Uater, O-Oil, OS-Orun Solid, OL-Drun Liquid, TS-Tanlc Solid, TL-Tank Liquid, X-Other,
A-Air
For QA2: One matrix spike duplicate analysis per lot of 10 samples. For QA3: Two matrix spike duplicate
analyses per lot of 10 samples.
Surrogate spikes analysis to be run (enter yes) for each sample in QA-1 and QA-2.
To be determined by the person arranging the analysis.
Enter OA Objective desired: QA-1, QA-2, or QA-3.
-------
DELIVERABLES
The (CONTRACTOR) Task Leader,(CTL), will maintain contact with the EPA On-Scene
Coordinator, (EPAOSC), to keep him/her- informed about the technical and financial progress of this
project. This communication will commence with the issuance of the work assignment and project
scoping meeting. Activities under this project will be reported in status or trip reports and other
deliverables (e.g., analytical reports, final reports) described herein. Activities will also be summarized
in appropriate format for inclusion in monthly and annual reports.
The following deliverables will be provided under this project:
Trip Report
A trip report will be prepared to provide a detailed accounting of what occurred during each
sampling mobilization. The trip report will be prepared within [two weeks] of the last day of
each sampling mobilization. Information will be provided on time of major events, dates, and
personnel on-site (including affiliations and phone numbers). The trip report will be
organized into three major section: Background, Observations and Activities, and Conclusions
and Recommendations (if appropriate).
Status Reports
A status report will be prepared on a [weekly/monthly/etc], schedule to provide a detailed
accounting of what has occurred, and what is planned to occur for the sampling event.
Information will be provided on time and date of major events and personnel on-site
(including affiliation and phone numbers). The status report will be organized into three
major sections: Background, Observations and Activities, and Future Activities.
Maps/Figures
The following illustrations will be provided:
Maps [size specifications ]
Figures [titles/types]
Drawings [scale]
Well borehole logs
Analysis
This sampling event requires analytical services. Documentation of lab selection, raw data, or
results will be provided in the analytical report.
Data Review
A review of the data generated under this plan will be undertaken. The assessment of data
acceptability or useability will be provided separately, or as part of the analytical report.
-------
Analytical Report
An analytical report will be prepared for samples analyzed under this plan. Information
regarding the analytipl methods/procedures employed, sample results, QAJQC results,
chain-of-custody documentation, laboratory correspondence, and raw data will be provided
within this deliverable.
Draft Final Report
A (draft) final report will be prepared to correlate available background information with data
generated under this sampling event and identify supportable conclusions and
recommendations which satisfy the objectives of this sampling QAJQC plan.
S.0 DATA VALIDATION
(QA-1 data validation)
QA-1 does not require an extensive review process. Data for this level should be evaluated for
calibration and detection limits at a minimum.
(QA-2 data validation)
Data generated under this QA/QC Sampling Plan will be evaluated accordingly with appropriate
criteria contained in the Removal Program Data Validation Procedures which accompany OSWER
Directive #9360.4-1.
Specific data review activities for QA-2 should be performed by the following approach:
1. Of the samples collected in the field, 10% will be confirmed for identification, precision,
accuracy, and error determination.
2. The results of 10% of the samples in the analytical data packages should be evaluated for
holding times, blank contamination, spike (surrogate/matrix) recovery, and detection capability.
3. The holding times, blank contamination, and detection capability will be reviewed for the
remaining samples.
(QA-3 data validation)
Data generated under this QA/QC Sampling Plan will be evaluated accordingly with appropriate
criteria contained in the Removal Program Data Validation Procedures which accompany OSWER
Directive #9360.4-1.
Specific data review activities for QA-3 should be performed by the following tiered approach:
1. a. For any one data package, review all data elements for 10% of samples.
-------
For the remaining 90% of the samples within the same data package, review holding
times, blank contamination, spike (surrogate/matrix) recovery, detection capability, and
confirmed identification thoroughly.
For every tenth data package, review all data quality elements for all samples in each
parameter category (i.e. VOAs and PCBs).
-------
(SUE/PROJECT TITLE)
Figure 1-1 Site Location Map
-------
(SITE/PROJECT TITLE)
Figure 4-1 Sample Location Map
-------
APPENDIX C
Organization and Delegation of QA Responsibilities
for the ERB Analytical Data Collection Activities
-------
-instrument calibration and/or performance check of the given test method will be documented (field data
sheets or log notebook).
-the detection limit will be determined, unless inappropriate.
-sample documentation will be provided.
(Additional QA Protocols for QA-2 data)
•chain of custody documentation (optional for field analysis)
-sample holding time documentation
-collection and evaluation of blanks and sample replicates (Refer to Tables 2 and 3)
-instrument calibration documentation
-PE samples, if appropriate
-definitive identification: confirmed identification of analvtes by a second GC column or mass spectra for 10%
of the samples collected (organics only) and provide gas chromatograms and/or mass spectra.
-definitive Quantitation: verify preliminary quantitative results by reanalyzing 10% of the samples colleted and
make a determination of precision, accuracy, and confidence limits by preparing and analyzing matrix spike
duplicates on 1% of the samples collected. If the preliminary method is a field screening procedure, an
alternate, EPA approved method will be used to verify the quantitative results.
(Additional QA Protocols for QA-3 data)
-PE samples
-definitive identification: confirmed identification of analvtes by a second GC column or mass spectra for
100% of the samples collected (organics only) and provide gas chromatograms and/or mass spectra.
-definitive Quantitation: verify quantitative results by reanalyzing 100% of the samples collected by an
alternate EPA approved method and make a determination of precision, accuracy, and confidence limits by
preparing and analyzing matrix spike duplicates on 2% of the samples collected.
'Numbers of samples to be collected for tliis project/event are entered onto Tables 2 Field Sampling Summary
and Table 3 QAJQC Analysis and Objectives Summary to facilitate ready identification of analytical
parameters desired, type, volume and number of containers needed, preservation requirements, number of
samples required and associated number, and type of QA/QC control samples required based on this QA
level.
All project deliverables will receive an internal peer QC review prior to release, as per guidelines established
in the (EPA Regional/Branch or Contractor) Quality Assurance Program Plan.
-------
Figure VIII. ORGAN UAH UN AND DELEGATION OF
l)A RESPONSIQILITIES
FOR THE ERB ANALYTICAL DATA COLLECTION ACTIVITIES
ERB
------- |